Database Processing Fundamentals, Design, and Implementation, 14th Edition David M Kroenke Test Bank

Database Processing Fundamentals, Design, and Implementation, 14th e BY David M. Kroenke

Email: richard@qwconsultancy.com

Database Processing, 14e (Kroenke) Chapter 1: Introduction 1) The purpose of a database is to help people keep track of things.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To understand the nature and characteristics of databases Classification: Concept 2) In a database, each table stores data about a different type of thing.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To understand the nature and characteristics of databases Classification: Concept 3) Like a database table, a spreadsheet has rows and columns.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To understand the nature and characteristics of databases Classification: Concept 4) In every database, not just the databases discussed in this book, table names are capitalized.

Answer: FALSE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To understand the nature and characteristics of databases Classification: Concept 5) A database shows data in tables and the relationships among the rows in those tables.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To gain a general understanding of tables and relationships Classification: Concept 6) Data is recorded facts and figures; information is knowledge derived from data.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To understand the nature and characteristics of databases Classification: Concept

1 ..

7) Databases record data in such a way that they can produce information.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To understand the nature and characteristics of databases Classification: Concept 8) Enterprise Resource Planning (ERP) is an example of a data mining application.

Answer: FALSE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To survey some important and interesting database applications Classification: Concept 9) Databases are a key component of e-commerce order entry, billing, shipping and customer support.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To survey some important and interesting database applications Classification: Concept 10) The largest databases in e-commerce are the order entry databases.

Answer: FALSE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Difficult LO: To survey some important and interesting database applications Classification: Concept 11) The e-commerce companies use Web activity databases to determine which items on a Web page are popular and successful.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To understand the importance of databases in Internet Web applications and smartphone apps Classification: Concept 12) Small databases typically have simple structures.

Answer: FALSE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To gain a general understanding of tables and relationships Classification: Concept

2 ..

13) A database system is typically defined as its four components: users, database applications, the DBMS and the databases.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To understand the nature and characteristics of databases Classification: Concept 14) Databases based on the CODASYL standard are based on the network data model.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To define the term database management system (DBMS) and describe the functions of a DBMS Classification: Concept 15) Applications are computer programs used directly by users.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To understand the nature and characteristics of databases Classification: Concept 16) Applications usually write data directly to the database.

Answer: FALSE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To understand the nature and characteristics of databases Classification: Concept 17) Sequenced Query Language (SQL) is an internationally recognized standard language that is understood by all commercial database management system products.

Answer: FALSE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To understand the history and development of database processing Classification: Concept 18) In database systems, indexes are held in the database.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Difficult LO: To define the term database and describe what is contained within the database Classification: Concept

3 ..

19) A database management system (DBMS) creates, processes and administers databases.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To define the term database management system (DBMS) and describe the functions of a DBMS Classification: Concept 20) The database management system (DBMS) is responsible for inserting, modifying, reading, and deleting data.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To define the term database management system (DBMS) and describe the functions of a DBMS Classification: Concept 21) The database application is responsible for concurrency control.

Answer: FALSE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Difficult LO: To define the term database management system (DBMS) and describe the functions of a DBMS Classification: Concept 22) The database management system (DBMS) is responsible for enforcing referential integrity constraints.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To define the term database management system (DBMS) and describe the functions of a DBMS Classification: Concept 23) Referential integrity constraints are rules about what data values are allowed in certain columns.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To define the term database and describe what is contained within the database Classification: Concept

4 ..

24) A database is a self-describing collection of non-integrated tables.

Answer: FALSE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To define the term database and describe what is contained within the database Classification: Concept 25) Integrated tables store both data and the relationships among the data.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To define the term database and describe what is contained within the database Classification: Concept 26) Microsoft Access is just a DBMS. Answer: FALSE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To describe the components of a Microsoft Access database system and explain the functions they perform Classification: Concept 27) Microsoft Access is a low-end product intended for individuals and small workgroups.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To describe the components of a Microsoft Access database system and explain the functions they perform Classification: Concept 28) The current DBMS engine in Microsoft Access is called ADE. Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To describe the components of a Microsoft Access database system and explain the functions they perform Classification: Concept 29) In Microsoft Access, you can use ODBC to connect to SQL Server in place of the ADE database engine.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To describe the components of a Microsoft Access database system and explain the functions they perform Classification: Application 5 ..

30) In an Enterprise-class database system, a database application interacts with the DBMS. Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To describe the components of an enterprise-class database system and explain the functions they perform Classification: Concept 31) In an Enterprise-class database system, a database application accesses the database data.

Answer: FALSE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To describe the components of an enterprise-class database system and explain the functions they perform Classification: Application 32) In an Enterprise-class database system, business users interact directly with the DBMS, which directly accesses the database data.

Answer: FALSE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To describe the components of an enterprise-class database system and explain the functions they perform Classification: Concept 33) All database applications get and put database data by sending SQL statements to the DBMS. Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To define the term database management system (DBMS) and describe the functions of a DBMS Classification: Concept 34) The DBMS ranked as having the "most power and features" in the text is IBM's DB2.

Answer: FALSE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To understand the history and development of database processing Classification: Concept 35) The DBMS ranked as being the "most difficult to use" in the text is Oracle Corporation's Oracle Database.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To understand the history and development of database processing Classification: Concept 6 ..

36) The DBMS ranked as being the "easiest to use" in the text is Microsoft's SQL Server.

Answer: FALSE Difficulty: Moderate LO: To understand the history and development of database processing Classification: Concept 37) The DBMS ranked as having the "least power and features" in the text is Microsoft Access.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To understand the history and development of database processing Classification: Concept 38) A database is called self-describing because it reduces data duplication.

Answer: FALSE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To define the term metadata and provide examples of metadata Classification: Application 39) The description of a database's structure that is stored within the database itself is called the metadata.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To define the term metadata and provide examples of metadata Classification: Concept 40) Indexes are data structures that speed searching of database data.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To define the term database and describe what is contained within the database Classification: Concept 41) Database design is important, and fortunately it is simple to do.

Answer: FALSE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To define and understand database design from existing data Classification: Concept

7 ..

42) A database design may be part of a new systems development project.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To define and understand database design as new systems development Classification: Application 43) A database design is rarely a redesign of an existing database.

Answer: FALSE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To define and understand database design in database redesign Classification: Concept 44) Each row in a database table is also known as a record.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To understand the history and development of database processing Classification: Concept 45) Data Language/I (DL/I) structured data relationships as a tree structure.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Difficult LO: To understand the history and development of database processing Classification: Concept 46) The CODASYL DBTG model structured data relationships as a tree structure.

Answer: FALSE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Difficult LO: To understand the history and development of database processing Classification: Concept 47) The relational model was first proposed in 1970 by E. F. Codd at IBM. Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To understand the history and development of database processing Classification: Concept

8 ..

48) The 1977 edition of this text contained a chapter on the relational model, and that chapter was reviewed by E. F. Codd.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To understand the history and development of database processing Classification: Concept 49) dBase was the first PC-based DBMS to implement true relational algebra on a PC. Answer: FALSE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Difficult LO: To understand the history and development of database processing Classification: Concept 50) Paradox is the only major survivor of the "bloodbath of PC DBMS products."

Answer: FALSE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To understand the history and development of database processing Classification: Concept 51) Business organizations have resisted adopting object-oriented database systems because the cost of purchasing OODBMS packages is prohibitively high.

Answer: FALSE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To understand the history and development of database processing Classification: Concept 52) Bill Gates has said that "XML is the lingua-franca of the Internet Age." Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To understand the history and development of database processing Classification: Concept 53) XML Web services allow database processing to be shared across the Internet.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To understand the importance of databases in Internet Web applications and smartphone apps Classification: Concept

9 ..

54) The NoSQL movement should really be called a NoRelational movement.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To understand the history and development of database processing Classification: Application 55) Twitter and Facebook use NoSQL databases.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To understand the importance of databases in Internet Web applications and smartphone apps Classification: Concept 56) The purpose of a database is to ________.

A) help people keep track of things B) store data in tables C) create tables of rows and columns D) maintain data on different things in different tables Answer: A AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To understand the nature and characteristics of databases Classification: Concept 57) A database stores ________.

A) data B) relationships C) applications D) Both A and B are correct Answer: D AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To understand the nature and characteristics of databases Classification: Application

10 ..

58) Which of the following statements is true about Web 2.0?

A) It requires the Android Operating System.

B) It allows users to add content to Web sites.

C) Twitter and Facebook are examples of Web 2.0 sites.

D) Both B and C are correct Answer: D AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To understand the importance of databases in Internet Web applications and smartphone apps Classification: Concept 59) A sales contact manager used by a salesperson is an example of a(n) ________.

A) single-user database application B) multiuser database application C) e-commerce database application D) data mining application Answer: A AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To survey some important and interesting database applications Classification: Concept 60) A Customer Resource Management (CRM) system is an example of a(n) ________.

A) single-user database application B) multiuser database application C) e-commerce database application D) digital dashboard Answer: B AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To survey some important and interesting database applications Classification: Concept 61) An online drugstore such as Drugstore.com is an example of a(n) ________.

A) single-user database application B) multiuser database application C) e-commerce database application D) enterprise resource planning system Answer: C AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To survey some important and interesting database applications Classification: Concept

11 ..

62) The industry standard supported by all major DBMSs that allows tables to be joined together is called ________.

A) Sequential Query Language (SQL) B) Structured Question Language (SQL) C) Structured Query Language (SQL) D) Standard Question Language (SQL) Answer: C AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To describe the components of a Microsoft Access database system and explain the functions they perform Classification: Concept 63) A program whose job is to create, process and administer databases is called a ________.

A) Database Modeling System B) Database Management System C) Data Business Model System D) Relational Model Manager Answer: B AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To define the term database management system (DBMS) and describe the functions of a DBMS Classification: Concept 64) Microsoft Access includes ________.

A) a DBMS B) an application generator C) a Web server D) Both A and B are correct Answer: D AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To describe the components of a Microsoft Access database system and explain the functions they perform Classification: Application

12 ..

65) Microsoft Access may use which of the following DBMS engines?

A) ADE B) SQL Server C) Oracle D) Both A and B are correct Answer: D AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To describe the components of a Microsoft Access database system and explain the functions they perform Classification: Concept 66) Which of the following is not an XML Web service standard?

A) SOAP B) WSDL C) Ethernet D) UDDI Answer: C AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To understand the importance of databases in Internet Web applications and smartphone apps Classification: Concept 67) Which of the following statements is not true for an enterprise-class database system?

A) The database application(s) interact(s) with the DBMS. B) The database application(s) directly access(es) the database data.

C) The DBMS accesses the database data.

D) The application generates SQL statements.

Answer: B AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To describe the components of an enterprise-class database system and explain the functions they perform Classification: Application 68) Which of the following database systems is not enterprise-class?

A) Microsoft SQL Server B) Microsoft Access C) Oracle Database D) IBM DB2 Answer: B AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To describe the components of an enterprise-class database system and explain the functions they perform Classification: Concept 13 ..

69) In an enterprise-class database system, reports are created by ________.

A) the user B) the database application C) the database management system (DBMS) D) the database Answer: B AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To describe the components of an enterprise-class database system and explain the functions they perform Classification: Concept 70) Which of the following statements is not true about client-server architecture?

A) The client initiates a request.

B) The server is usually a tablet or smartphone.

C) The server usually runs the DBMS on it.

D) Most Web applications are supported by client-server.

Answer: B AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To understand the importance of databases in Internet Web applications and smartphone apps Classification: Concept 71) In database systems, the DBMS enforces rules about which data can be written in certain columns. The rules are known as ________.

A) data insertion control B) data modification control C) concurrency control D) referential integrity constraints Answer: D AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To define the term database management system (DBMS) and describe the functions of a DBMS Classification: Concept

14 ..

72) In database systems, the DBMS enforces rules about which user can perform which action when. The rules are known as ________.

A) referential integrity constraints B) data modification control C) data reading control D) concurrency control Answer: D AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Difficult LO: To define the term database management system (DBMS) and describe the functions of a DBMS Classification: Concept 73) A database is considered self-describing because ________.

A) all the users' data is in one place B) it reduces data duplication C) it contains a description of its own structure D) it contains a listing of all the programs that use it Answer: C AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To understand the nature and characteristics of databases Classification: Concept 74) A database consists of integrated tables, which store ________.

A) reports B) data and relationships among the data C) forms D) Both A and C are correct Answer: B AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To understand the nature and characteristics of databases Classification: Concept 75) Which of the following statements is not true for primary keys in a relational database system?

A) They can be used to create relationships between tables.

B) They must contain numeric data.

C) They uniquely identify a row in a table.

D) They can be part of relational integrity constraints.

Answer: B AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To gain a general understanding of tables and relationships Classification: Concept 15 ..

76) This database component is used to maintain database accuracy and enforce data constraints.

A) Tables B) Metadata C) Triggers D) Stored procedures Answer: C AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To understand the nature and characteristics of databases Classification: Concept 77) This database component can be used as part of applications and for administration tasks.

A) Tables B) Metadata C) Triggers D) Stored procedures Answer: D AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To understand the nature and characteristics of databases Classification: Concept 78) A database designed using spreadsheets from the Sales department is a database being designed ________.

A) from existing data B) as a new systems development project C) as a redesign of an existing database D) as a NoSQL database Answer: A AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To define and understand database design from existing data Classification: Application 79) A database designed to implement requirements for a reporting application needed by the Sales department is a database being designed ________.

A) from existing non-database data B) as a new systems development project C) as a redesign of an existing database D) Both A and B are correct Answer: B AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To define and understand database design as new systems development Classification: Application

16 ..

80) A database designed to combine two databases used by the Sales department is a database being designed ________.

A) from existing data B) as a new systems development project C) as a redesign of an existing database D) Both A and B are correct Answer: C AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To define and understand database design in database redesign Classification: Application 81) Database professionals use ________ as specific data sources for studies and analyses.

A) data marts B) normalization C) data models D) entity-relationship data modeling Answer: A AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To define and understand database design from existing data Classification: Concept 82) Database professionals use a set of principles called ________ to guide and assess database design.

A) database extraction B) normalization C) data models D) entity-relationship data modeling Answer: B AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To define and understand database design from existing data Classification: Concept 83) A very popular development technique used by database professionals for database design is known as ________.

A) database extraction B) normalization C) data models D) entity-relationship data modeling Answer: D AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To define and understand database design as new systems development Classification: Concept 17 ..

84) A very popular development technique used by database professionals to adopt a database design to a new or changing requirement is known as ________.

A) normalization B) data models C) entity-relationship data modeling D) database migration Answer: D AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Difficult LO: To define and understand database design in database redesign Classification: Concept 85) The predecessor(s) of database processing was (were) ________.

A) file managers B) hierarchical models C) network models D) the relational data model Answer: A AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To understand the history and development of database processing Classification: Concept 86) Which statement is not true about the relational model?

A) It was first proposed in 1970.

B) It was developed by E. F. Codd.

C) It was developed at Oracle.

D) It resulted in the DBMS product DB2.

Answer: C AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To understand the history and development of database processing Classification: Concept 87) Modern microcomputer personal DBMS products ________.

A) are supplied by several well-established manufacturers B) were essentially made obsolete by Microsoft Access C) have poor response time D) are not true DBMS products Answer: B AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To understand the history and development of database processing Classification: Concept

18 ..

88) Business organizations have resisted adopting object-oriented database management systems because ________.

A) the cost of purchasing OODBMS packages is prohibitively high B) the cost of converting data from relational databases to OODBMSs is too high C) most large organizations have older applications that are not based on object oriented programming D) Both B and C are correct Answer: D AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To understand the history and development of database processing Classification: Concept 89) For database development, the most important Web-related technology to emerge in recent years is ________.

A) FTP B) HTTP C) XML D) OODBMS Answer: C AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To understand the importance of databases in Internet Web applications and smartphone apps Classification: Concept 90) For database development, a challenge to the relational model and the use of SQL is known as ________.

A) the Web services movement B) the NoSQL movement C) the SOAP movement D) the XML movement Answer: B AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To understand the history and development of database processing Classification: Concept

19 ..

91) What is the purpose of a database, and how does the database accomplish this purpose?

Answer: The purpose of a database is to help people keep track of things. It accomplishes this purpose by storing data in tables. Each table has rows and columns, similar to a spreadsheet. A database usually has multiple tables in order to keep track of different but related things. For example, we might have a CUSTOMER table to keep track of customers and a PRODUCT table to keep track of the things we sell. Each row in each table holds data about a particular instance, i.e., one customer or one product. The database also stores the links between the tables, so that we can track which customers bought which products (note: this will require an additional table if one customer can buy more than one product and one product can be sold to more than one customer).

AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To understand the nature and characteristics of databases Classification: Application 92) What are the four components of a database system?

Answer: The four components in a database system are: the user, the database application, the database management system (DBMS) and the database. The user interacts with the database application, which interacts with the DBMS, which controls the database. The functions of the database application include creating and processing forms, creating and transmitting queries and creating and processing reports. The DBMS creates databases, tables and supporting structures, manages database data, enforces rules and provides security. The database stores the user data, the database metadata, indexes, triggers, stored procedures and application metadata.

AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To understand the nature and characteristics of databases Classification: Application 93) Briefly describe the function of an application program in a database system.

Answer: The application program is responsible for creating and processing forms. The application displays the form to the user, allows the user to complete the data entry, evaluates the form to determine which data management tasks need to be performed, and transmits the appropriate requests to the DBMS. The application creates and transmits queries. The queries are requests for data that are created in a language like SQL, and transmitted to the DBMS to have the requested data returned to the application program. The application also creates and processes reports. The query to retrieve the necessary data for the report is sent to the DBMS. When the DBMS returns the needed data, the application manipulates it as necessary to create the requested report. The application program also applies application logic to control the manipulation of data in accordance with the business rules. Finally, the application program is responsible for providing control. Control must be exercised to allow the users to make choices for functions and tasks as appropriate for their jobs. Also, control must be exercised to manage the activities of the DBMS. AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To understand the nature and characteristics of databases Classification: Application 20 ..

94) What components are included in a database?

Answer: The database contains user data, metadata, indexes and other overhead data, and application metadata. User data is the data from the user's environment that they want to track.

Metadata is data about the structure of the database. Indexes and other overhead data are structures that the database uses to improve performance. Finally, the application metadata is data about forms, reports, and other application components that some databases, particularly those created with desktop DBMS products, store with the database.

AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To define the term database and describe what is contained within the database Classification: Application 95) Why do we say a database is self-describing and why is this an advantage?

Answer: A database is considered self-describing because it contains a description of its own structure within the database itself. This description is called the metadata, and it is stored in specialized tables in relational databases. The advantage is that the database is self-documenting, and that a knowledgeable user or a database designer can easily access the metadata. All DBMS vendors provide tools to access the metadata within their products.

AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To define the term metadata and provide examples of metadata Classification: Concept 96) What is metadata and how does it relate to the definition of a database?

Answer: Metadata is data about the structure of the database itself. This includes data about the names of all the tables in the database, the names of all the columns in each of the tables, the data type of each column in each table, the properties of the tables and the columns, etc. Metadata accounts for the self-describing aspect of the definition of a database as a "self-describing collection of integrated tables."

AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To define the term metadata and provide examples of metadata Classification: Concept

21 ..

97) Briefly describe the function of the DBMS in a database system.

Answer: The DBMS creates the database and the tables and structures within it. The DBMS also reads and updates the database data. It receives requests from application programs to perform data maintenance tasks. These requests are translated into actions that are performed on the database. In addition to maintaining the user data within the database, the DBMS also maintains the database structures. The DBMS also enforces any rules that have been defined to govern the values of the data, such as data type requirements and referential integrity constraints. The DBMS controls concurrency issues, which deal with the unwanted interruption of one user's work by another user's work. As the only point of entry into the database, the DBMS also provides security for the database to restrict users' access to only the data that they have authority to read or modify. Finally, the DBMS is responsible for the creation of backup copies of the database data and for restoring the database in case a recovery is required.

AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To understand the nature and characteristics of databases Classification: Application 98) What are referential integrity constraints? Give an example.

Answer: A referential integrity constraint is a rule that restricts certain actions on the database data. A referential integrity constraint is used to ensure that the values in a field in one table have matching tables in a corresponding field in another table. These constraints are enforced by the DBMS, which will not allow changes to the values of the database that would result in violations of this rule. For example, a database has an EMPLOYEE table and a VEHICLE table that are used to store data on employees and the vehicles that they are assigned to drive. The EMPLOYEE table has a column called EmployeeID that is used to distinguish one employee record from another. The VEHICLE table also has an EmployeeID column that is used to associate a vehicle with the appropriate employee. A referential integrity constraint could be used to prevent a vehicle from being assigned to an employee with an EmployeeID that does not appear in the EMPLOYEE table by requiring that all values in EmployeeID in the VEHICLE table have a matching value in EmployeeID in the EMPLOYEE table.

AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Difficult LO: To gain a general understanding of tables and relationships Classification: Application 99) What are the three types of database design situations?

Answer: Database designs can be based on (1) existing data, (2) new systems development and (3) database redesign. Database designs from existing data may be based on data in spreadsheets or other data tables, or on data extracted from other databases. New systems development gathers user requirements for needed applications and designs a database to meet those requirements.

Database redesign may be needed to migrate existing databases to a newer DBMS, or to integrate multiple existing databases.

AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To define and understand database design from existing data Classification: Concept 22 ..

100) Briefly describe the history of database processing.

Answer: The predecessor of database processing was file processing, where data were maintained on magnetic tape. Database processing as we know it today became possible with the availability of direct access disk storage in the 1960s. Using this storage, both the hierarchical data model and then the network data model were developed. In 1970, E. F. Codd of IBM proposed the relational model, which is the standard model used today. Current DBMSs such as DB2, Oracle and SQL Server are based on the relational model. The appearance of microcomputer-based DBMSs in the 1980s led to a "bloodbath" from which Microsoft Access emerged as the dominant PC workstation DBMS. More recent events include the introduction of object-oriented DBMSs (OODBMSs), and the development of tools such as XML to allow the use of database systems over the Internet.

AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Difficult LO: To understand the history and development of database processing Classification: Application

23 ..

Database Processing, 14e (Kroenke) Chapter 2: Introduction to Structured Query Language 1) Business Intelligence (BI) systems typically store their data in data warehouses.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To understand the use of extracted data sets in business intelligence (BI) systems Classification: Concept 2) An ad-hoc SQL query is typically written within an application program.

Answer: FALSE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To understand the use of ad-hoc queries in business intelligence (BI) systems Classification: Concept 3) SQL stands for Standard Query Language.

Answer: FALSE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To understand the history and significance of Structured Query Language (SQL) Classification: Concept 4) SQL includes a data definition language, a data manipulation language, and SQL/Persistent stored modules.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To understand the history and significance of Structured Query Language (SQL) Classification: Concept 5) SQL is only a data manipulation language (DML).

Answer: FALSE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Difficult LO: To understand the history and significance of Structured Query Language (SQL) Classification: Concept 6) The American National Standards Institute (ANSI) maintains the standards for SQL. Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Difficult LO: To understand the history and significance of Structured Query Language (SQL) Classification: Concept

1 ..

7) SQL was developed by IBM in the late 1970s.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To understand the history and significance of Structured Query Language (SQL) Classification: Concept 8) SQL is not a complete programming language. Rather it is a data sublanguage.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To understand the history and significance of Structured Query Language (SQL) Classification: Concept 9) In addition to being a data sublanguage, SQL is also a programming language, like Java or C#.

Answer: FALSE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To understand the history and significance of Structured Query Language (SQL) Classification: Concept 10) SQL commands can be embedded in application programs.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Difficult LO: To understand the history and significance of Structured Query Language (SQL) Classification: Concept 11) SQL, although very popular, has never become a national standard.

Answer: FALSE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To understand the history and significance of Structured Query Language (SQL) Classification: Concept 12) The SQL keyword SELECT is used to specify the columns to be listed in the query results.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To understand the SQL SELECT/FROM/WHERE framework as the basis for database queries Classification: Concept

2 ..

13) The SQL keyword WHERE is used to specify the table(s) that contain(s) the data to be retrieved.

Answer: FALSE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To understand the SQL SELECT/FROM/WHERE framework as the basis for database queries Classification: Concept 14) The SQL keyword FROM is used to specify the table to be used.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To understand the SQL SELECT/FROM/WHERE framework as the basis for database queries Classification: Concept 15) SQL can only query a single table.

Answer: FALSE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To understand the SQL SELECT/FROM/WHERE framework as the basis for database queries Classification: Concept 16) SQL statements end with a colon.

Answer: FALSE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To understand the SQL SELECT/FROM/WHERE framework as the basis for database queries Classification: Concept 17) The columns to be obtained by an SQL command are listed after the FROM keyword.

Answer: FALSE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To understand the SQL SELECT/FROM/WHERE framework as the basis for database queries Classification: Concept 18) To remove duplicate rows from the result of a query, specify the SQL DISTINCT keyword.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Difficult LO: To create SQL queries that use the SQL DISTINCT, TOP, and TOP PERCENT keywords Classification: Concept 3 ..

19) To obtain all columns, use an asterisk (*) wildcard character instead of listing all the column names.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To understand the SQL SELECT/FROM/WHERE framework as the basis for database queries Classification: Concept 20) The SQL WHERE clause contains the condition that specifies which rows are to be selected.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To understand the SQL SELECT/FROM/WHERE framework as the basis for database queries Classification: Concept 21) The result of an SQL SELECT operation can contain duplicate rows.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To understand the SQL SELECT/FROM/WHERE framework as the basis for database queries Classification: Concept 22) To have SQL automatically eliminate duplicate rows from a result, use the keyword DISTINCT with the FROM keyword.

Answer: FALSE AACSB: Information Technology; Application of Knowledge Difficulty: Difficult LO: To create SQL queries that use the SQL DISTINCT, TOP, and TOP PERCENT keywords Classification: Concept 23) An asterisk (*) following the SELECT verb means that all columns are to be displayed.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To understand the SQL SELECT/FROM/WHERE framework as the basis for database queries Classification: Concept

4 ..

24) The WHERE clause contains the condition that specifies which columns are to be selected.

Answer: FALSE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To understand the SQL SELECT/FROM/WHERE framework as the basis for database queries Classification: Concept 25) The rows of the result table can be sorted by the values in one or more columns.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To create SQL queries that use the SQL SELECT, FROM, WHERE, ORDER BY, GROUP BY, and HAVING clauses Classification: Concept 26) Sorting is specified by the use of the SORT BY phrase.

Answer: FALSE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To create SQL queries that use the SQL SELECT, FROM, WHERE, ORDER BY, GROUP BY, and HAVING clauses Classification: Concept 27) To sort the rows of the result table, the ORDER BY clause is specified.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To create SQL queries that use the SQL SELECT, FROM, WHERE, ORDER BY, GROUP BY, and HAVING clauses Classification: Concept 28) Columns can be sorted in descending sequence by using the SQL DESC keyword.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To create SQL queries that use the SQL SELECT, FROM, WHERE, ORDER BY, GROUP BY, and HAVING clauses Classification: Concept 29) A WHERE clause can contain only one condition.

Answer: FALSE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To understand the SQL SELECT/FROM/WHERE framework as the basis for database queries Classification: Concept 5 ..

30) When two conditions must both be true for the rows to be selected, the conditions are separated by the SQL AND keyword.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology; Application of Knowledge Difficulty: Easy LO: To create SQL queries that use the SQL logical operators including AND, OR, and NOT Classification: Concept 31) To refer to a set of values needed for a condition, use the SQL IN operator.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology; Application of Knowledge Difficulty: Difficult LO: To create SQL queries that use the SQL comparison operators including BETWEEN, LIKE, IN, and IS NULL Classification: Concept 32) To exclude one or more values using a condition, the SQL OUT keyword must be used.

Answer: FALSE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Difficult LO: To create SQL queries that use the SQL comparison operators including BETWEEN, LIKE, IN, and IS NULL Classification: Concept 33) To refer to a set of values in a condition, the values are placed inside parentheses ( ) and separated by commas.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Difficult LO: To create SQL queries that use the SQL comparison operators including BETWEEN, LIKE, IN, and IS NULL Classification: Concept 34) The condition in WHERE clauses can refer to a set of values by using the IN operator.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology; Application of Knowledge Difficulty: Moderate LO: To create SQL queries that use the SQL comparison operators including BETWEEN, LIKE, IN, and IS NULL Classification: Concept

6 ..

35) The SQL keyword LIKE is used in SQL expressions to select partial string values.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology; Application of Knowledge Difficulty: Moderate LO: To create SQL queries that use the SQL comparison operators including BETWEEN, LIKE, IN, and IS NULL Classification: Concept 36) The SQL wildcard character "%" represents a series of one or more unspecified characters.

Answer: FALSE AACSB: Information Technology; Application of Knowledge Difficulty: Difficult LO: To create SQL queries that use the SQL comparison operators including BETWEEN, LIKE, IN, and IS NULL Classification: Concept 37) The SQL wildcard character "#" indicates a single, unspecified character in a specific location in an SQL query.

Answer: FALSE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Difficult LO: To create SQL queries that use the SQL comparison operators including BETWEEN, LIKE, IN, and IS NULL Classification: Concept 38) The Microsoft Access wildcard character "*" (asterisk) indicates a sequence of one or more unspecified characters in a Microsoft Access SQL query.

Answer: FALSE AACSB: Information Technology; Application of Knowledge Difficulty: Difficult LO: To create SQL queries that use the SQL comparison operators including BETWEEN, LIKE, IN, and IS NULL Classification: Concept 39) The Microsoft Access wildcard character "_" (underscore) indicates a single, unspecified character in a specific location in a Microsoft Access SQL query.

Answer: FALSE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Difficult LO: To create SQL queries that use the SQL comparison operators including BETWEEN, LIKE, IN, and IS NULL Classification: Concept

7 ..

40) The SQL built-in function ADDUP totals values in numeric columns.

Answer: FALSE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To create SQL queries that use the SQL built-in aggregate functions of SUM, COUNT, MIN, MAX, and AVG with and without the SQL GROUP BY clause Classification: Concept 41) The SQL built-in function AVG computes the average of values in numeric columns.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology; Application of Knowledge Difficulty: Easy LO: To create SQL queries that use the SQL built-in aggregate functions of SUM, COUNT, MIN, MAX, and AVG with and without the SQL GROUP BY clause Classification: Concept 42) The SQL built-in function MOST obtains the largest value in a numeric column.

Answer: FALSE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To create SQL queries that use the SQL built-in aggregate functions of SUM, COUNT, MIN, MAX, and AVG with and without the SQL GROUP BY clause Classification: Concept 43) The SQL built-in function MIN obtains the smallest value in a numeric column.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology; Application of Knowledge Difficulty: Easy LO: To create SQL queries that use the SQL built-in aggregate functions of SUM, COUNT, MIN, MAX, and AVG with and without the SQL GROUP BY clause Classification: Concept 44) The SQL built-in function COUNT computes the number of rows in a query.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology; Application of Knowledge Difficulty: Easy LO: To create SQL queries that use the SQL built-in aggregate functions of SUM, COUNT, MIN, MAX, and AVG with and without the SQL GROUP BY clause Classification: Concept 45) The built-in function SUM can be used with any column.

Answer: FALSE AACSB: Information Technology; Application of Knowledge Difficulty: Moderate LO: To create SQL queries that use the SQL built-in aggregate functions of SUM, COUNT, MIN, MAX, and AVG with and without the SQL GROUP BY clause Classification: Concept 8 ..

46) The clause SELECT COUNT (*) results in a table with a single row and a single column.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology; Application of Knowledge Difficulty: Moderate LO: To create SQL queries that use the SQL built-in aggregate functions of SUM, COUNT, MIN, MAX, and AVG with and without the SQL GROUP BY clause Classification: Concept 47) Arithmetic in SQL statements is limited to the operations provided by the built-in functions.

Answer: FALSE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To create SQL queries to retrieve data from a single table Classification: Concept 48) The SQL keyword GROUP BY instructs the DBMS to group together those rows that have the same value in a column.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To create SQL queries that use the SQL SELECT, FROM, WHERE, ORDER BY, GROUP BY, and HAVING clauses Classification: Concept 49) A WHERE clause can contain another SELECT statement enclosed in parentheses.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology; Application of Knowledge Difficulty: Easy LO: To create SQL queries that retrieve data from a single table while restricting the data based upon data in another table (subquery) Classification: Concept 50) A SELECT statement used in a WHERE clause is called a subquery.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To create SQL queries that retrieve data from a single table while restricting the data based upon data in another table (subquery) Classification: Concept

9 ..

51) A nested SELECT statement (one that appears within the WHERE clause of another SQL statement) is called a subquery and must be enclosed in parentheses.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology; Application of Knowledge Difficulty: Moderate LO: To create SQL queries that retrieve data from a single table while restricting the data based upon data in another table (subquery) Classification: Concept 52) Only two tables can be queried by using a subquery.

Answer: FALSE AACSB: Information Technology; Application of Knowledge Difficulty: Moderate LO: To create SQL queries that retrieve data from a single table while restricting the data based upon data in another table (subquery) Classification: Concept 53) An alternative to combining tables by a subquery is to use a join.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To understand the SQL SELECT/FROM/WHERE framework as the basis for database queries Classification: Concept 54) When people use the term join they normally mean an equijoin.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To create SQL queries that retrieve data from multiple tables using the SQL join and JOIN ON operations Classification: Concept 55) Two or more tables are joined by giving the table names in the WHERE clause and specifying the equality of the respective column names as a condition in the GROUP BY clause.

Answer: FALSE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Difficult LO: To create SQL queries that retrieve data from multiple tables using the SQL join and JOIN ON operations Classification: Concept

10 ..

56) The names of tables to be joined in an SQL query are listed in the FROM clause.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To create SQL queries that retrieve data from multiple tables using the SQL join and JOIN ON operations Classification: Concept 57) In an SQL query, a join operation is achieved by specifying the equality of the respective column names as a condition in the WHERE clause.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology; Application of Knowledge Difficulty: Moderate LO: To create SQL queries that retrieve data from multiple tables using the SQL join and JOIN ON operations Classification: Concept 58) Every subquery can be alternatively expressed by a join.

Answer: FALSE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To understand the SQL SELECT/FROM/WHERE framework as the basis for database queries Classification: Concept 59) While many subqueries can be alternatively written as joins, correlated subqueries do work that cannot be duplicated as a join.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Difficult LO: To understand the SQL SELECT/FROM/WHERE framework as the basis for database queries Classification: Concept 60) The SQL syntax JOIN . . . ON can be used as an alternate way of writing an SQL join statement.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To create SQL queries that retrieve data from multiple tables using the SQL join and JOIN ON operations Classification: Concept

11 ..

61) Joins that show only matching rows from the joined tables in their results are called inner joins.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Difficult LO: To create SQL queries that retrieve data from multiple tables using the SQL join and JOIN ON operations Classification: Concept 62) Joins that show the matching rows from the joined tables plus unmatched rows from one other table in their results are called outer joins.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To create SQL queries that retrieve data from multiple tables using the SQL OUTER JOIN operation Classification: Concept 63) Outer joins can be either up joins or down joins.

Answer: FALSE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To create SQL queries that retrieve data from multiple tables using the SQL OUTER JOIN operation Classification: Concept 64) The UNION of two relations A and B consists of all rows that are either in relation A or in relation B or both.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To create SQL queries that retrieve data from multiple tables using SQL set operators UNION, INTERSECT, and EXCEPT Classification: Concept 65) The INTERSECT of two relations A and B consists of all rows that are in relation B but are not in relation A. Answer: FALSE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To create SQL queries that retrieve data from multiple tables using SQL set operators UNION, INTERSECT, and EXCEPT Classification: Concept

12 ..

66) A database extracted from the operational database for BI purposes typically ________.

A) is an exact copy of the operational database B) contains only the metadata from the operational database C) combines all the data from the operational database into one large table D) contains just part of the operational database Answer: D AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Difficult LO: To understand the use of extracted data sets in business intelligence (BI) systems Classification: Concept 67) An ad-hoc query is ________.

A) a question about the data that requires a program to be written B) a question that can be answered from the database using SQL C) a question that can be answered only by combining several SQL queries D) never useful in Business Intelligence scenarios Answer: B AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To understand the use of ad-hoc queries in business intelligence (BI) systems Classification: Concept 68) SQL is a ________.

A) data sublanguage B) data manipulation language C) data definition language D) programming language Answer: A AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To understand the history and significance of Structured Query Language (SQL) Classification: Concept 69) When making an SQL query, we are using SQL as a(n) ________.

A) DDL B) DML C) embedded language D) SET Answer: B AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To understand the history and significance of Structured Query Language (SQL) Classification: Concept

13 ..

70) In an SQL query, which SQL keyword actually begins the query?

A) EXISTS B) FROM C) SELECT D) WHERE Answer: C AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To understand the SQL SELECT/FROM/WHERE framework as the basis for database queries Classification: Concept 71) In an SQL query, which SQL keyword is used to specify the table(s) to be used?

A) EXISTS B) FROM C) SELECT D) WHERE Answer: B AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To understand the SQL SELECT/FROM/WHERE framework as the basis for database queries Classification: Concept 72) In an SQL query, which SQL keyword must be used to remove duplicate rows from the result table?

A) DELETE B) DISTINCT C) UNIQUE D) KEY Answer: B AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Difficult LO: To create SQL queries that use the SQL DISTINCT, TOP, and TOP PERCENT keywords Classification: Concept 73) In an SQL query, which of the following symbols is used by ANSI SQL to represent all the columns in a single table?

A) _ (underscore) B) ? (question mark) C) * (asterisk) D) % (percent) Answer: C AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To create SQL queries to retrieve data from a single table Classification: Concept 14 ..

74) In an SQL query, which SQL keyword is used to state the condition that specifies which rows are to be selected?

A) SET B) FROM C) SELECT D) WHERE Answer: D AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To create SQL queries to retrieve data from a single table Classification: Concept 75) In an SQL query, which SQL keyword is used to link two conditions that both must be true for the rows to be selected?

A) AND B) EXISTS C) OR D) IN Answer: A AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To create SQL queries that use the SQL logical operators including AND, OR, and NOT Classification: Concept 76) In an SQL query, which SQL keyword is used to determine if a column value is equal to any one of a set of values?

A) AND B) EXISTS C) OR D) IN Answer: D AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To create SQL queries that use the SQL comparison operators including BETWEEN, LIKE, IN, and IS NULL Classification: Concept

15 ..

77) In an SQL query, which of the following symbols is used by ANSI SQL to represent a single unspecified character?

A) _ (underscore) B) ? (question mark) C) * (asterisk) D) % (percent) Answer: A AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Difficult LO: To create SQL queries that use the SQL comparison operators including BETWEEN, LIKE, IN, and IS NULL Classification: Concept 78) In an SQL query, which of the following symbols is used by Microsoft Access to represent a single unspecified character?

A) _ (underscore) B) ? (question mark) C) * (asterisk) D) % (percent) Answer: B AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Difficult LO: To create SQL queries that use the SQL comparison operators including BETWEEN, LIKE, IN, and IS NULL Classification: Concept 79) In an SQL query, which SQL keyword is used to sort the result table by the values in one or more columns?

A) GROUP BY B) ORDER BY C) SELECT D) SORT BY Answer: B AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To create SQL queries that use the SQL SELECT, FROM, WHERE, ORDER BY, GROUP BY, and HAVING clauses Classification: Concept

16 ..

80) Given a table with the structure: EMPLOYEE (EmpNo, Name, Salary, HireDate), which of the following would find all employees whose name begins with the letter "S" using standard SQL? A) SELECT * FROM EMPLOYEE WHERE Name IN ['S']; B) SELECT EmpNo FROM EMPLOYEE WHERE Name LIKE 'S'; C) SELECT * FROM Name WHERE EMPLOYEE LIKE 'S*'; D) SELECT * FROM EMPLOYEE WHERE Name LIKE 'S%'; Answer: D AACSB: Information Technology; Analytical Thinking Difficulty: Difficult LO: To create SQL queries that use the SQL comparison operators including BETWEEN, LIKE, IN, and IS NULL Classification: Application 81) Given a table with the structure: EMPLOYEE (EmpNo, Name, Salary, HireDate), which of the following would find all employees whose name begins with the letter "S" using Microsoft Access?

A) SELECT * FROM EMPLOYEE WHERE Name IN ['S']; B) SELECT EmpNo FROM EMPLOYEE WHERE Name LIKE 'S'; C) SELECT * FROM EMPLOYEE WHERE Name LIKE 'S*'; D) SELECT * FROM EMPLOYEE WHERE Name LIKE 'S%'; Answer: C AACSB: Information Technology; Analytical Thinking Difficulty: Difficult LO: To create SQL queries that use the SQL comparison operators including BETWEEN, LIKE, IN, and IS NULL Classification: Application

17 ..

82) In an SQL query, which built-in function is used to total numeric columns?

A) AVG B) COUNT C) MAX D) SUM Answer: D AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To create SQL queries that use the SQL built-in aggregate functions of SUM, COUNT, MIN, MAX, and AVG with and without the SQL GROUP BY clause Classification: Concept 83) In an SQL query, which built-in function is used to compute the average value of numeric columns?

A) AVG B) MEAN C) MAX D) SUM Answer: A AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To create SQL queries that use the SQL built-in aggregate functions of SUM, COUNT, MIN, MAX, and AVG with and without the SQL GROUP BY clause Classification: Concept 84) In an SQL query, which built-in function is used to obtain the largest value of numeric columns?

A) AVG B) COUNT C) MAX D) MIN Answer: C AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To create SQL queries that use the SQL built-in aggregate functions of SUM, COUNT, MIN, MAX, and AVG with and without the SQL GROUP BY clause Classification: Concept

18 ..

85) In an SQL query, which built-in function is used to obtain the smallest value of numeric columns?

A) AVG B) COUNT C) MAX D) MIN Answer: D AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To create SQL queries that use the SQL built-in aggregate functions of SUM, COUNT, MIN, MAX, and AVG with and without the SQL GROUP BY clause Classification: Concept 86) In an SQL query, the built-in functions SUM and AVG work with columns containing data of which of the following data types?

A) Integer B) Numeric C) Char D) Both A and B are correct Answer: D AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Difficult LO: To create SQL queries that use the SQL built-in aggregate functions of SUM, COUNT, MIN, MAX, and AVG with and without the SQL GROUP BY clause Classification: Concept 87) In an SQL query, which built-in function is used to compute the number of rows in a table?

A) AVG B) COUNT C) MAX D) SUM Answer: B AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To create SQL queries that use the SQL built-in aggregate functions of SUM, COUNT, MIN, MAX, and AVG with and without the SQL GROUP BY clause Classification: Concept

19 ..

88) Assuming the "Quantity" column of an ORDER table contains integer data, what does COUNT(Quantity) compute?

A) The number of rows in the ORDER table B) The number of non-zero values in the Quantity column C) The number of distinct values in the Quantity column D) The number of non-null values in the Quantity column Answer: D AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Difficult LO: To create SQL queries that use the SQL built-in aggregate functions of SUM, COUNT, MIN, MAX, and AVG with and without the SQL GROUP BY clause Classification: Concept 89) In an SQL query, which SQL keyword is used with built-in functions to group together rows that have the same value in a specified column or columns?

A) GROUP BY B) ORDER BY C) SELECT D) SORT BY Answer: A AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To create SQL queries that use the SQL built-in aggregate functions of SUM, COUNT, MIN, MAX, and AVG with and without the SQL GROUP BY clause Classification: Concept 90) In an SQL query, which SQL keyword is used with GROUP BY to select groups meeting specified criteria?

A) AND B) WHERE C) HAVING D) IN Answer: C AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To create SQL queries that use the SQL SELECT, FROM, WHERE, ORDER BY, GROUP BY, and HAVING clauses Classification: Concept

20 ..

91) Given a table with the structure: EMPLOYEE (EmpNo, Name, Salary, HireDate), which of the following is not a valid ANSI SQL command?

A) SELECT * FROM EMPLOYEE WHERE Name LIKE 'Ja%'; B) SELECT COUNT(*) FROM EMPLOYEE WHERE Salary < 30000; C) SELECT HireDate, COUNT(*) FROM EMPLOYEE GROUP BY HireDate; D) SELECT HireDate, COUNT(*) FROM EMPLOYEE WHERE Salary < 30000; Answer: D AACSB: Information Technology; Analytical Thinking Difficulty: Difficult LO: To create SQL queries that use the SQL SELECT, FROM, WHERE, ORDER BY, GROUP BY, and HAVING clauses Classification: Application

21 ..

92) Based on the tables below, which of the following ANSI SQL commands would return the average customer balance grouped by SalesRepNo? GENERAL SALES DATABASE: SALESREP SalesRepNo 654 734 345 434 CUSTOMER CustNo 9870 8590 7840 4870

RepName Jones Smith Chen Johnson

CustName Winston Gonzales Harris Miles

HireDate 01/02/2005 02/03/2007 01/25/2004 11/23/2004

Balance 500 350 800 100

SalesRepNo 345 434 654 345

A) SELECT AVG (Balance) FROM CUSTOMER WHERE SalesRepNo; B) SELECT AVG (Balance) FROM CUSTOMER GROUP BY SalesRepNo; C) SELECT AVG (Balance) FROM CUSTOMER, SALESREP WHERE SALESREP.SalesRepNo = CUSTOMER.SalesRepNo; D) SELECT AVG (Balance) FROM CUSTOMER ORDER BY SalesRepNo; Answer: B AACSB: Information Technology; Analytical Thinking Difficulty: Difficult LO: To create SQL queries that use the SQL built-in aggregate functions of SUM, COUNT, MIN, MAX, and AVG with and without the SQL GROUP BY clause Classification: Application

22 ..

93) Based on the tables below, which of the following commands in ANSI SQL would return only the name of the sales representative and the name of the customer for each customer that has a balance greater than 400?

GENERAL SALES DATABASE: SALESREP SalesRepNo 654 734 345 434 CUSTOMER CustNo 9870 8590 7840 4870

RepName Jones Smith Chen Johnson

CustName Winston Gonzales Harris Miles

HireDate 01/02/2005 02/03/2007 01/25/2004 11/23/2004

Balance 500 350 800 100

SalesRepNo 345 434 654 345

A) SELECT * FROM SALESREP, CUSTOMER WHERE Balance > 400; B) SELECT DISTINCT RepName, CustName FROM SALESREP, CUSTOMER WHERE Balance > 400; C) SELECT * FROM SALESREP, CUSTOMER WHERE SALESREP.SalesRepNo = CUSTOMER.SalesRepNo AND Balance > 400; D) SELECT RepName, CustName FROM SALESREP, CUSTOMER WHERE SALESREP.SalesRepNo = CUSTOMER.SalesRepNo AND Balance > 400; Answer: D AACSB: Information Technology; Analytical Thinking Difficulty: Difficult LO: To create SQL queries that retrieve data from multiple tables using the SQL join and JOIN ON operations Classification: Application

23 ..

94) In an SQL query, which SQL keyword is used to implement a subquery?

A) GROUP BY B) HAVING C) ORDER BY D) SELECT Answer: D AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Difficult LO: To create SQL queries that retrieve data from a single table while restricting the data based upon data in another table (subquery) Classification: Concept 95) When one SQL query is embedded in another SQL query, this is referred to as a ________.

A) subquery B) join C) WHERE Query D) subset query Answer: A AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To create SQL queries that retrieve data from a single table while restricting the data based upon data in another table (subquery) Classification: Concept 96) When one SQL query is embedded in another SQL query to simulate a join, the second SQL query is embedded in the ________ of the first query.

A) SELECT B) FROM C) WHERE D) HAVING Answer: C AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To create SQL queries that retrieve data from a single table while restricting the data based upon data in another table (subquery) Classification: Concept

24 ..

97) When one SQL query is embedded in another SQL query, the top level SQL query can still contain an SQL ________ clause.

A) FROM or SORT BY B) UNIQUE IN C) GROUP BY D) WHERE IN Answer: C AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To create SQL queries that retrieve data from a single table while restricting the data based upon data in another table (subquery) Classification: Concept 98) In an SQL query, which SQL keyword is used to specify the names of tables to be joined?

A) FROM B) HAVING C) JOIN D) WHERE Answer: A AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To create SQL queries that retrieve data from multiple tables using the SQL join and JOIN ON operations Classification: Concept 99) In an SQL query, which SQL keyword is used to specify the column names to be used in a join?

A) FROM B) JOIN C) SELECT D) WHERE Answer: D AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To create SQL queries that retrieve data from multiple tables using the SQL join and JOIN ON operations Classification: Concept

25 ..

100) Regarding the interchangeability of subqueries and joins, ________.

A) a join can always be used as an alternative to a subquery, and a subquery can always be used as an alternative to a join B) a join can sometimes be used as an alternative to a subquery, and a subquery can sometimes be used as an alternative to a join C) a join can always be used as an alternative to a subquery, and a subquery can sometimes be used as an alternative to a join D) a join can sometimes be used as an alternative to a subquery, and a subquery can always be used as an alternative to a join Answer: B AACSB: Information Technology; Analytical Thinking Difficulty: Difficult LO: To create SQL queries that retrieve data from multiple tables using the SQL join and JOIN ON operations; To create SQL queries that retrieve data from a single table while restricting the data based upon data in another table (subquery) Classification: Synthesis 101) In an SQL query of two tables, which SQL keyword indicates that we want data from all the rows of one table to be included in the result, even if the row does not correspond to any data in the other table?

A) LEFT JOIN B) RIGHT JOIN C) INCLUDE D) Both A and B are correct Answer: D AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To create SQL queries that retrieve data from multiple tables using the SQL OUTER JOIN operation Classification: Concept 102) Suppose tables EMPLOYEE and CUSTOMER both store address information, and you want to send a letter to all employees and customers of your company to make a major announcement. Which SQL keyword would you most likely use here?

A) INTERSECT B) UNION C) UNION ALL D) JOIN Answer: B AACSB: Information Technology; Application of Knowledge Difficulty: Moderate LO: To create SQL queries that retrieve data from multiple tables using SQL set operators UNION, INTERSECT, and EXCEPT Classification: Application

26 ..

103) Suppose your company stores EMPLOYEE and CUSTOMER data in separate tables. If you want to find all employees who are also customers, which SQL keyword would you most likely use?

A) INTERSECT B) UNION C) EXCEPT D) UNION ALL Answer: A AACSB: Information Technology; Application of Knowledge Difficulty: Moderate LO: To create SQL queries that retrieve data from multiple tables using SQL set operators UNION, INTERSECT, and EXCEPT Classification: Application 104) Suppose your company stores EMPLOYEE and CUSTOMER data in separate tables. If you want to find all customers who are not also employees, which SQL keyword would you most likely use?

A) INTERSECT B) UNION C) EXCEPT D) UNION ALL Answer: C AACSB: Information Technology; Application of Knowledge Difficulty: Moderate LO: To create SQL queries that retrieve data from multiple tables using SQL set operators UNION, INTERSECT, and EXCEPT Classification: Application 105) What is SQL? Answer: Structured Query Language (SQL) is used to create and use databases, tables, and relationships. SQL is divided into two categories: SQL statements for database definition and SQL statements for database processing (querying and updating). The database definition commands are referred to as a data definition language (DDL), and the database query and update commands are referred to as a data manipulation language (DML). SQL was developed

by IBM, and is endorsed as a national standard by the American National Standards Institute (ANSI). Although a newer standard, SQL3, exists, the most widely implemented version of SQL is the ANSI SQL-92 standard. SQL is not a full-featured programming language, but rather it is considered to be a data sublanguage.

AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To understand the history and significance of Structured Query Language (SQL) Classification: Concept

27 ..

106) Explain why it is important to learn SQL. Answer: Most modern DBMS products support SQL as a standardized data language. These products usually provide graphical tools to perform the tasks associated with SQL, but there are some tasks that cannot be performed using these graphical tools. SQL is text-oriented, and SQL code must be written in order to embed SQL commands within program applications.

AACSB: Information Technology; Reflective Thinking Difficulty: Easy LO: To understand the history and significance of Structured Query Language (SQL) Classification: Concept 107) Briefly describe subqueries and joins. Explain when each is not an acceptable alternative for the other.

Answer: Subqueries and joins are both methods for retrieving data from multiple tables.

Subqueries involve nesting one SELECT statement within another. The nested SELECT is used as part of a condition in the WHERE clause of the first SELECT statement. The nested SELECT statement can return a set of records from one table, which are then used in a logical operator within the parent SELECT query. A join combines records from each table into concatenated records containing the fields of both tables. The records are concatenated based on matching values in similar columns in the two tables. Subqueries cannot be used in situations where the results to be displayed include attributes from more than one table. Joins cannot be used as an alternative to a correlated subquery.

AACSB: Information Technology; Analytical Thinking Difficulty: Difficult LO: To create SQL queries that retrieve data from a single table while restricting the data based upon data in another table (subquery); To create SQL queries that retrieve data from multiple tables using the SQL join and JOIN ON operations Classification: Synthesis

28 ..

108) The following database will be used in this question: GENERAL SALES DATABASE: SALESREP SalesRepNo 654 734 345 434 CUSTOMER CustNo 9870 8590 7840 4870

RepName Jones Smith Chen Johnson

CustName Winston Gonzales Harris Miles

HireDate 01/02/2005 02/03/2007 01/25/2004 11/23/2004

Balance 500 350 800 100

SalesRepNo 345 434 654 345

Explain the use of the of SQL keyword SELECT. Include an example based on the CUSTOMER table in the General Sales database.

Answer: The SQL keyword SELECT forms the basis for all SQL querying. Although SELECT technically specifies columns to be used in a query, it is always the first SQL keyword or command in an SQL phrase that includes at least the SQL keyword FROM and often the SQL keyword WHERE. The SQL keyword FROM is used to specify which tables are used in the query, while the SQL keyword WHERE is used to specify conditions or constraints imposed on the query. For example, SELECT * FROM CUSTOMER WHERE CustNo = 8590; is a query that returns all information in the table CUSTOMER about the customer whose customer number is 8590.

AACSB: Information Technology; Application of Knowledge Difficulty: Easy LO: To create SQL queries to retrieve data from a single table Classification: Application

29 ..

109) The following database will be used in this question: GENERAL SALES DATABASE: SALESREP SalesRepNo 654 734 345 434 CUSTOMER CustNo 9870 8590 7840 4870

RepName Jones Smith Chen Johnson

CustName Winston Gonzales Harris Miles

HireDate 01/02/2005 02/03/2007 01/25/2004 11/23/2004

Balance 500 350 800 100

SalesRepNo 345 434 654 345

Explain the use of the SQL keyword LIKE. Include an example based on the CUSTOMER table from the General Sales database; use at least one wildcard.

Answer: The LIKE keyword is used in the WHERE clause of an SQL query to select rows based on partial values. Through the use of wildcard characters that can represent one or more unspecified characters, the LIKE operator can search for a given string of characters within a column value. The ANSI wildcard "%" represents zero or more unspecified characters, and the wildcard " " (underscore) represents any single unspecified character. For example, SELECT * FROM CUSTOMER WHERE CustName LIKE 'H%'; is a query that returns all information in the table CUSTOMER about customers whose CustName starts with the letter H. AACSB: Information Technology; Application of Knowledge Difficulty: Moderate LO: To create SQL queries that use the SQL comparison operators including BETWEEN, LIKE, IN, and IS NULL Classification: Application

30 ..

110) The following database will be used in this question: GENERAL SALES DATABASE: SALESREP SalesRepNo 654 734 345 434 CUSTOMER CustNo 9870 8590 7840 4870

RepName Jones Smith Chen Johnson

CustName Winston Gonzales Harris Miles

HireDate 01/02/2005 02/03/2007 01/25/2004 11/23/2004

Balance 500 350 800 100

SalesRepNo 345 434 654 345

Explain the use of the GROUP BY keyword. Include an example based on the CUSTOMER table from the General Sales database.

Answer: The GROUP BY keyword is used in conjunction with the built-in functions of SQL. The GROUP BY keyword is given a column that records are to be grouped on. Records in the result table are then collected into groups based on the value of the grouping column. The builtin function is then performed on the records of each group separately. For example, SELECT AVG(Balance) FROM CUSTOMER GROUP BY SalesRepNo; is a query that returns the average balance of all customers associated with a specific sales representative.

AACSB: Information Technology; Application of Knowledge Difficulty: Moderate LO: To create SQL queries that use the SQL built-in aggregate functions of SUM, COUNT, MIN, MAX, and AVG with and without the SQL GROUP BY clause Classification: Application

31 ..

111) Given the table CUSTOMER(CustID, Name, PhoneNumber, AccountBalance), write the standard SQL query to retrieve the Name and PhoneNumber of customers with a balance greater than 50.

Answer: SELECT Name, PhoneNumber FROM CUSTOMER WHERE AccountBalance > 50; AACSB: Information Technology; Application of Knowledge Difficulty: Moderate LO: To create SQL queries to retrieve data from a single table Classification: Application 112) Given the table CUSTOMER(CustID, Name, PhoneNumber, AccountBalance), write the standard SQL query to retrieve the Name and PhoneNumber of customers whose name begins with 'S'.

Answer: SELECT Name, PhoneNumber FROM CUSTOMER WHERE Name LIKE 'S%'; AACSB: Information Technology; Application of Knowledge Difficulty: Moderate LO: To create SQL queries that use the SQL comparison operators including BETWEEN, LIKE, IN, and IS NULL Classification: Application 113) What are SQL Built-in Functions?

Answer: SQL Built-in Functions are functions that manipulate the results of an SQL SELECT statement. The built-in functions for standard SQL are COUNT, SUM, AVG, MAX, and MIN. The COUNT function counts the number of rows in the result. The SUM function totals the values in a number-oriented field. The AVG function calculates the mean of the values in a number-oriented field. The MAX function determines the highest value, and the MIN function determines the lowest value, in a number-oriented field or any other field whose values can be compared using "<".

AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To create SQL queries that use the SQL built-in aggregate functions of SUM, COUNT, MIN, MAX, and AVG with and without the SQL GROUP BY clause Classification: Concept

32 ..

114) Distinguish between the HAVING clause and the WHERE clause.

Answer: The HAVING clause and the WHERE clause differ in that the WHERE clause is used to identify rows that satisfy a stated condition. The HAVING clause is used to identify groups, which have been created by the GROUP BY clause, that satisfy a stated condition. In cases when the WHERE clause and the HAVING clause are both allowed to appear in the same SELECT statement, the WHERE clause is implemented to execute before the HAVING clause.

AACSB: Information Technology; Analytical Thinking Difficulty: Difficult LO: To create SQL queries that use the SQL SELECT, FROM, WHERE, ORDER BY, GROUP BY, and HAVING clauses Classification: Concept

33 ..

Database Processing, 14e (Kroenke) Chapter 3: The Relational Model and Normalization 1) All relations are tables, but not all tables are relations.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To understand basic relational terminology Classification: Concept 2) A relation is a table that has special restrictions on it.

Answer: FALSE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To understand the characteristics of relations Classification: Concept 3) A characteristic of a relation is that the cells of the relation hold a single value.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To understand the characteristics of relations Classification: Concept 4) A characteristic of a relation is that the rows of a relation may hold identical values.

Answer: FALSE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To understand the characteristics of relations Classification: Concept 5) A relation is a table composed of columns and rows.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To understand the characteristics of relations Classification: Concept 6) In relational terms as defined by E.F. Codd, a row is called a tuple.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To understand alternative terminology used in describing the relational model Classification: Concept

1 ..

7) In relational terms as defined by E.F. Codd, a column is called an attribute.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To understand alternative terminology used in describing the relational model Classification: Concept 8) The columns of a relation are sometimes called tuples.

Answer: FALSE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To understand alternative terminology used in describing the relational model Classification: Concept 9) A tuple is a group of one or more columns that uniquely identifies a row.

Answer: FALSE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To understand alternative terminology used in describing the relational model Classification: Concept 10) A functional dependency is a relationship between attributes such that if we know the value of one attribute, we can determine the value of the other attribute.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To be able to identify functional dependencies, determinants, and dependent attributes Classification: Concept 11) If by knowing the value of A we can find the value of B, then we would say that B is functionally dependent on A. Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To be able to identify functional dependencies, determinants, and dependent attributes Classification: Concept 12) In functional dependencies, the attribute whose value is known or given is referred to as the determinant.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To be able to identify functional dependencies, determinants, and dependent attributes Classification: Concept

2 ..

13) Attribute Y is functionally dependent on attribute X if the value of attribute X determines the value of Y. Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To be able to identify functional dependencies, determinants, and dependent attributes Classification: Concept 14) The functional dependency noted as A → B means that the value of A can be determined from the value of B. Answer: FALSE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To be able to identify functional dependencies, determinants, and dependent attributes Classification: Concept 15) In the functional dependency shown as A → B, B is the determinant.

Answer: FALSE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To be able to identify functional dependencies, determinants, and dependent attributes Classification: Concept 16) Functional dependencies can involve groups of attributes.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To be able to identify functional dependencies, determinants, and dependent attributes Classification: Concept 17) Given the functional dependency (A, B) → C, the attributes (A, B) are referred to as a composite determinant.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To be able to identify functional dependencies, determinants, and dependent attributes Classification: Concept 18) Given the functional dependency A → (B, C), then it is true that A → B and A → C. Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To be able to identify functional dependencies, determinants, and dependent attributes Classification: Concept

3 ..

19) Given the functional dependency (A, B) → C, then it is true that A → C and B → C. Answer: FALSE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To be able to identify functional dependencies, determinants, and dependent attributes Classification: Concept 20) Given the functional dependency A → B, then it is necessarily true that B → A. Answer: FALSE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To be able to identify functional dependencies, determinants, and dependent attributes Classification: Concept 21) A determinant of a functional dependency may or may not be unique in a relation.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To be able to identify functional dependencies, determinants, and dependent attributes Classification: Concept 22) A key is a combination of one or more columns that is used to identify particular rows in a relation.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To identify primary, candidate, and composite keys Classification: Concept 23) A row can be uniquely identified by a key.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To identify primary, candidate, and composite keys Classification: Concept 24) A combination key is a group of attributes that uniquely identifies a row.

Answer: FALSE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To identify primary, candidate, and composite keys Classification: Concept

4 ..

25) A key can be composed of a group of attributes taken together.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To identify primary, candidate, and composite keys Classification: Concept 26) It is possible to have a relation that does not have a key.

Answer: FALSE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Difficult LO: To identify primary, candidate, and composite keys Classification: Concept 27) A candidate key is one of a group of keys that may serve as the primary key in a relation.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To identify primary, candidate, and composite keys Classification: Concept 28) A relation can have only one candidate key.

Answer: FALSE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To identify primary, candidate, and composite keys Classification: Concept 29) A primary key is a candidate key that has been selected to uniquely identify rows in a relation.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To identify primary, candidate, and composite keys Classification: Concept 30) A surrogate key is an artificial column that is added to a relation to be its primary key.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To identify primary, candidate, and composite keys Classification: Concept

5 ..

31) Surrogate keys usually slow performance.

Answer: FALSE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To identify primary, candidate, and composite keys Classification: Concept 32) Surrogate keys are normally not shown on forms or reports.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To identify primary, candidate, and composite keys Classification: Concept 33) A foreign key is one or more columns in one relation that also is the primary key in another table.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To identify primary, candidate, and composite keys Classification: Concept 34) A referential integrity constraint is used to make sure the values of a foreign key match a valid value of a primary key.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To identify primary, candidate, and composite keys Classification: Concept 35) A constraint that requires an instance of an entity to exist in one relation before it can be referenced in another relation is called an insertion anomaly.

Answer: FALSE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Difficult LO: To identify primary, candidate, and composite keys Classification: Concept 36) A referential integrity constraint limits the values of a foreign key.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To identify primary, candidate, and composite keys Classification: Concept

6 ..

37) If a table meets the minimum definition of a relation, it has an effective or appropriate structure.

Answer: FALSE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To be able to identify possible insertion, deletion, and update anomalies in a relation Classification: Concept 38) Undesirable consequences of changing the data in a relation are called modification anomalies.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To be able to identify possible insertion, deletion, and update anomalies in a relation Classification: Concept 39) A deletion anomaly exists when deleting data about one entity results in the loss of data about another entity.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To be able to identify possible insertion, deletion, and update anomalies in a relation Classification: Concept 40) Relations are classified into normal forms based on the types of modification anomalies that they are vulnerable to.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To be able to identify possible insertion, deletion, and update anomalies in a relation Classification: Concept 41) Any table that meets the definition of a relation is said to be in first normal form (1NF).

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To be able to place a relation into BCNF normal form Classification: Concept 42) Any table that meets the definition of a relation is in 2NF. Answer: FALSE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To be able to place a relation into BCNF normal form Classification: Concept

7 ..

43) A relation is in 2NF if and only if it is in 1NF and all non-key attributes are determined by the entire primary key.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To be able to place a relation into BCNF normal form Classification: Concept 44) A relation is in 3NF if and only if it is in 2NF and there are no non-key attributes determined by another non-key attribute.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To be able to place a relation into BCNF normal form Classification: Concept 45) The condition that a non-key attribute determines another non-key attribute is known as transitive dependency.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Difficult LO: To be able to place a relation into BCNF normal form Classification: Concept 46) An attribute is considered to be a non-key attribute when it is a non-prime attribute, which means that the attribute is not contained in any candidate key.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Difficult LO: To be able to place a relation into BCNF normal form Classification: Concept 47) Candidate keys are called interlocking candidate keys when they share one or more attributes.

Answer: FALSE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Difficult LO: To be able to place a relation into BCNF normal form Classification: Concept 48) A relation is in Boyce-Codd Normal Form (BCNF) if and only if it is in 3NF and every determinant is a candidate key.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To be able to place a relation into BCNF normal form Classification: Concept 8 ..

49) A defining requirement for Boyce-Codd Normal Form (BCNF) is that every candidate key must be a determinant.

Answer: FALSE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To be able to place a relation into BCNF normal form Classification: Concept 50) Every time we break up a relation during the normalization process, we may have to create a referential integrity constraint.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To be able to place a relation into BCNF normal form Classification: Concept 51) The essence of normalization is taking a relation that is not in BCNF and breaking it into multiple relations such that each one is in BCNF. Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To be able to place a relation into BCNF normal form Classification: Concept 52) When designing or normalizing relations, each relation should have only one theme.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To be able to identify possible insertion, deletion, and update anomalies in a relation Classification: Concept 53) A multivalued dependency exists when a determinant is matched to a set of values.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To be able to identify multivalued dependencies Classification: Concept 54) The multivalued dependency noted as A → → B, means that the value of A determines a set of values of B. Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To be able to identify multivalued dependencies Classification: Concept 9 ..

55) A relation is in 4NF when multivalued dependencies are isolated in their own relation.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To be able to identify multivalued dependencies Classification: Concept 56) A relation is in 4NF if it is in BCNF and it has no multivalued dependencies.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To be able to identify multivalued dependencies Classification: Concept 57) Domain/key normal form requires that every constraint be a logical consequence of the definition of domains and keys.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To understand the special importance of domain/key normal form Classification: Concept 58) A relation that is in domain/key normal form is assured to be free from all anomalies.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To understand the special importance of domain/key normal form Classification: Concept 59) Which of the following is not true about a relation?

A) Has rows containing data about an entity B) Has columns containing data about attributes of the entity C) Has cells that hold only a single value D) Can have two identical rows Answer: D AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To understand the characteristics of relations Classification: Concept

10 ..

60) Which of the following is true for a relation?

A) Entities in a column vary as to kind.

B) The order of the columns is important.

C) The order of the rows is unimportant.

D) More than one column can use the same name.

Answer: C AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To understand the characteristics of relations Classification: Concept 61) A relation is also known as a(n) ________.

A) table B) tuple C) relationship D) attribute Answer: A AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To understand alternative terminology used in describing the relational model Classification: Concept 62) A tuple is also known as a ________.

A) table B) relation C) row D) field Answer: C AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To understand alternative terminology used in describing the relational model Classification: Concept 63) An attribute is also known as a ________.

A) table B) relation C) row D) field Answer: D AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To understand alternative terminology used in describing the relational model Classification: Concept

11 ..

64) Saying that two entities are functionally dependent means that ________.

A) the entities are always connected by a mathematical equation B) for one of the entities, if we are given the value of that entity, we can determine the value of one other entity C) for both of the entities, if we are given the value of one entity, we can determine the value of the other entity D) the functional dependency will have to be removed through normalization Answer: B AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To be able to identify functional dependencies, determinants, and dependent attributes Classification: Concept 65) Given the functional dependency A → (B, C), A is a(n) ________.

A) independent variable B) dependent variable C) determinant D) composite determinant Answer: C AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To be able to identify functional dependencies, determinants, and dependent attributes Classification: Concept 66) Given the functional dependency (A, B) → C, (A, B) is a ________.

A) dependent variable B) determinant C) composite determinant D) Both B and C are correct Answer: D AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To be able to identify functional dependencies, determinants, and dependent attributes Classification: Concept 67) Given the functional dependency (A, B) → C, then ________.

A) A and B together → C B) A → C C) B → A D) Both A and B are correct Answer: A AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To be able to identify functional dependencies, determinants, and dependent attributes Classification: Concept

12 ..

68) Which of the following is NOT true about the functional dependency A → (X, Y)?

A) X is functionally dependent on A. B) A determines Y. C) X and Y together determine A. D) X and Y are functionally dependent on A. Answer: C AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To be able to identify functional dependencies, determinants, and dependent attributes Classification: Concept 69) Which of the following is true about the functional dependency (A, B) → (C, D)?

A) A is the determinant of C. B) A and B together are determined by C and D together.

C) A and B together determine D. D) C and D together determine A. Answer: C AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Difficult LO: To be able to identify functional dependencies, determinants, and dependent attributes Classification: Concept 70) The only reason(s) for having relations is to ________.

A) store instances of functional dependencies B) store equation components C) store equation results D) Both B and C are correct Answer: A AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To be able to identify functional dependencies, determinants, and dependent attributes Classification: Concept 71) A combination of one or more columns used to identify particular rows in a relation is a ________.

A) record B) field C) key D) tuple Answer: C AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To identify primary, candidate, and composite keys Classification: Concept

13 ..

72) A combination of two or more columns used to identify particular rows in a relation is a ________.

A) record B) composite key C) foreign key D) surrogate key Answer: B AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To identify primary, candidate, and composite keys Classification: Concept 73) A determinant that determines all the other columns in a relation is a ________.

A) record B) surrogate key C) foreign key D) candidate key Answer: D AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To identify primary, candidate, and composite keys Classification: Concept 74) When designing a database, one of the candidate keys in a relation is selected as the ________.

A) composite key B) primary key C) foreign key D) surrogate key Answer: B AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To identify primary, candidate, and composite keys Classification: Concept 75) An artificial column added to a relation to serve as the primary key is a ________.

A) composite key B) candidate key C) foreign key D) surrogate key Answer: D AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To identify primary, candidate, and composite keys Classification: Concept

14 ..

76) A key consisting of one or more columns that is a primary key in another relation is a ________.

A) composite key B) candidate key C) foreign key D) surrogate key Answer: C AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To identify primary, candidate, and composite keys Classification: Concept 77) Referential integrity constraints are used to limit the possible values of a ________.

A) composite key B) candidate key C) foreign key D) surrogate key Answer: C AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To identify primary, candidate, and composite keys Classification: Concept 78) A ________ is used to limit the possible values of a foreign key.

A) composite key B) surrogate key C) functional dependency D) referential integrity constraint Answer: D AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To identify primary, candidate, and composite keys Classification: Concept 79) Having to enter facts about two entities when we want to enter facts about only one is an example of ________.

A) insertion anomaly B) update anomaly C) deletion anomaly D) normalization anomaly Answer: A AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To be able to identify possible insertion, deletion, and update anomalies in a relation Classification: Concept

15 ..

80) If the removal of facts about one entity results in the unintentional loss of data about another entity, this is referred to as a(n) ________.

A) normalization anomaly B) insertion anomaly C) update anomaly D) deletion anomaly Answer: D AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To be able to identify possible insertion, deletion, and update anomalies in a relation Classification: Concept 81) Suppose that you need to update one value of the column SalesCost in a relation. The way the relation is constructed, this value actually needs to be changed in three different rows.

However, you only change the value in two of the rows. You have just created a(n) ________.

A) normalization anomaly B) insertion anomaly C) update anomaly D) deletion anomaly Answer: C AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To be able to identify possible insertion, deletion, and update anomalies in a relation Classification: Concept 82) A table that meets the definition of a relation is in ________.

A) First Normal Form B) Second Normal Form C) Third Normal Form D) Boyce-Codd Normal Form Answer: A AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To be able to identify possible insertion, deletion, and update anomalies in a relation Classification: Concept 83) A relation is in second normal form (2NF) if and only if it is in 1NF and ________.

A) all non-key attributes are determined by the entire primary key B) there are no non-key attributes determined by another non-key attribute C) every attribute is a candidate key D) every candidate key is a determinant Answer: A AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To be able to place a relation into BCNF normal form Classification: Concept 16 ..

84) A relation is in third normal form (3NF) if and only if it is in 2NF and ________.

A) all non-key attributes are determined by the entire primary key B) there are no non-key attributes determined by another non-key attribute C) every attribute is a candidate key D) every candidate key is a determinant Answer: B AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To be able to place a relation into BCNF normal form Classification: Concept 85) A relation is in Boyce-Codd normal form (BCNF) if and only if it is in 3NF and ________.

A) all non-key attributes are determined by the entire primary key B) there are no non-key attributes determined by another non-key attribute C) every attribute is a candidate key D) every determinant is a candidate key Answer: D AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To be able to place a relation into BCNF normal form Classification: Concept 86) If a table is designed so that every determinant is a candidate key, then that relation is in ________.

A) First Normal Form B) Second Normal Form C) Third Normal Form D) Boyce-Codd Normal Form Answer: D AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To be able to place a relation into BCNF normal form Classification: Concept 87) If a relation is in BCNF, and each multivalued dependency has been moved to a relation of its own, then the first relation is in ________.

A) Third Normal Form B) Boyce-Codd Normal Form C) Fourth Normal Form D) Domain/key normal form Answer: C AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To be able to place a relation in fourth normal form Classification: Concept

17 ..

88) A relation is in fourth normal form if it is in BCNF and it has no ________.

A) transitive dependencies B) multivalued dependencies C) partial dependencies D) deletion dependencies Answer: B AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To be able to place a relation in fourth normal form Classification: Concept 89) A relation is in domain/key normal form if ________.

A) every key of the relation is a logical consequence of the definition of constraints and determinants B) every key of the relation is a logical consequence of the definition of constraints and domains C) every constraint on the relation is a logical consequence of the definition of keys and determinants D) every constraint on the relation is a logical consequence of the definition of keys and domains Answer: D AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To understand the special importance of domain/key normal form Classification: Concept 90) In general, each relation should have ________.

A) one and only one theme B) one or more themes C) exactly two themes D) one or two themes Answer: A AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To understand the characteristics of relations Classification: Concept

18 ..

91) What is a functional dependency? Give an example not used in the text.

Answer: We say that a functional dependency exists when the value of one or more attributes determines the value of another attribute. For example, suppose we have a six-sided die numbered and colored as follows: Number 1 2 3 4 5 6

Color Red Blue White Green Green Green

In this case, Number functionally determines Color, written as Number → Color. Then, if we know the Number is 3, we know the Color is White. Note that the reverse is not true—Color does not determine Number since if we are given the Color Green the number could be 4, 5, or 6.

The attribute on the left-hand side of the dependency is called the "determinant." Thus, Number is a determinant. Although equations can be expressed as functional dependencies [as when the equation TotalCost = NumberSold * ItemCost is written as the functional dependency (NumberSold, ItemCost) → TotalCost] functional dependencies are not equations. Also note that a determinant can have more than one attribute [as does (NumberSold, ItemCost) in the last example] and when it does it is called a composite determinant.

AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To be able to identify functional dependencies, determinants, and dependent attributes Classification: Application 92) Describe the requirements that a table must meet to qualify as a relation.

Answer: In order for a table to meet the requirements of a relation, it must satisfy certain conditions. First, the rows contain data about an entity or some portion of the entity. Second, the columns contain data that represent attributes of the entity. Third, each column must contain the same kind of data for all rows. Fifth, each column must have a unique name. Sixth, the cells must contain single values—no group or array values are allowed. Seventh, the order of the columns and the rows is insignificant. Finally, the rows must be unique.

AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To understand the characteristics of relations Classification: Concept

19 ..

93) Explain the terms relation, tuple, and attribute.

Answer: The terms relation, tuple, and attribute are used primarily by database theoreticians.

These terms are synonymous with the terms table, row, and column, respectively, in regards to a relational database. They are also equivalent to the terms file, record, and field, which tend to be used by many traditional data processing professionals.

AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To understand alternative terminology used in describing the relational model Classification: Concept 94) Distinguish between the primary key and a candidate key.

Answer: Both the primary key and a candidate key can uniquely identify the rows in a table. The primary key is the candidate key that is chosen by the database designer, working with the users, to uniquely identify rows and to represent relationships. Although any candidate key could, by definition, be selected to act as the primary key, the choice of primary key is often based on design decisions such as the amount of foreign key data that would be generated.

AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To identify primary, candidate, and composite keys Classification: Concept 95) Briefly describe the various tasks of the primary key.

Answer: The primary key is used for four primary tasks. First, it is used to uniquely identify the rows in a table. Second, it is used to represent rows in relationships. Third, most DBMS products use the values of the primary key to organize the storage of the relation. Finally, primary keys are used in indexes and other structures to improve performance for search operations.

AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To identify primary, candidate, and composite keys Classification: Concept 96) Explain the relationships among primary keys and functional dependencies.

Answer: Relations store instances of functional dependencies in their rows. All primary keys represent a functional dependency, since each primary key functionally determines the entire row. Since the primary key determines the entire row, if a primary key were duplicated in a relation, then the entire row would have to be duplicated. Since a relation can contain no duplicate rows, the primary key must be unique.

AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Difficult LO: To be able to identify functional dependencies, determinants, and dependent attributes Classification: Synthesis

20 ..

97) Explain the concept of a foreign key.

Answer: To implement a relationship within a relational database, the primary key of one relation is placed as an attribute in another relation. This attribute is called a foreign key in the second relation because it is the primary key of a relation that is foreign to the table in which the field resides.

AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To identify primary, candidate, and composite keys Classification: Concept 98) Explain the concept of a surrogate key.

Answer: A surrogate key is an artificial key that is created to act as the primary key for a relation. The surrogate key is a unique, numeric value that is appended to the relation. Surrogate keys are used in situations when no suitable primary key exists within the user data, or when all available primary keys within the data are too cumbersome for an efficient design. Surrogate key values have no meaning to the users and are normally hidden on all forms, reports, and displays.

Most DBMS products have the ability to automatically generate values for surrogate keys as needed.

AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To identify primary, candidate, and composite keys Classification: Concept 99) Explain the essence of normalization that is implemented through the use of normal forms.

Answer: The essence of normalization is to create relations that contain data on a single theme, and for each row in a relation to contain all the data about that theme for a given entity. This essence is implemented in the normal forms by taking a relation that contains data on more than one theme and splitting it into multiple relations that each contains data on a single theme. The different normal forms protect against the occurrence of modification anomalies. In practice, making sure all relations are in Boyce-Codd Normal Form (BCNF), or in Fourth Normal Form (4NF) if multivalued dependencies are found, insures high reliability of the database.

AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Difficult LO: To be able to place a relation into BCNF normal form Classification: Application

21 ..

100) Explain the steps in the process of putting a relation straight into Boyce-Codd Normal Form (BCNF).

Answer: The steps are: (1) Identify all functional dependencies in the relation.

(2) Identify every candidate key in the relation.

(3) Check to see if all determinants are candidate keys. a. If so, the relation is in BCNF-STOP. b. If not, then: i. Move the columns of the functional dependency of the determinant that is not a candidate key to a new relation. ii. Make the determinant of that functional dependency the primary key of the new relation. iii. Leave a copy of the determinant in the original relation as a foreign key. iv. Create a referential integrity constraint between the relations.

NOTE: If there is more than one functional dependency that needs to be moved, move the functional dependency with the most columns first.

(4) Repeat step (3) until you reach STOP. AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To be able to place a relation into BCNF normal form Classification: Application

22 ..

Database Processing, 14e (Kroenke) Chapter 4: Database Design Using Normalization 1) When you are given a set of tables and asked to create a database to store their data, the first step is to assess the tables' structure and content.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology; Application of Knowledge Difficulty: Easy LO: To use SQL to assess table structure Classification: Concept 2) The first step in assessing table structure is to count rows and examine columns.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology; Application of Knowledge Difficulty: Moderate LO: To use SQL to assess table structure Classification: Concept 3) To count the number of rows in a table, use the SQL construct COUNT(ROWS).

Answer: FALSE AACSB: Information Technology; Application of Knowledge Difficulty: Moderate LO: To use SQL to assess table structure Classification: Concept 4) To determine the number and type of columns in a table, use the SQL construct COUNT(*).

Answer: FALSE AACSB: Information Technology; Application of Knowledge Difficulty: Easy LO: To use SQL to assess table structure Classification: Concept 5) To limit the number of rows retrieved from a table, use the SQL TOP keyword.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology; Application of Knowledge Difficulty: Easy LO: To use SQL to assess table structure Classification: Concept 6) When examining data values as a part of assessing table structure, you should try to determine two types of dependencies: functional dependencies and multivalued dependencies.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To use SQL to assess table structure Classification: Concept 1 ..

7) When examining data values as a part of assessing table structure, you should try to determine three types of keys: the primary key, any candidate keys, and any foreign keys.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology; Application of Knowledge Difficulty: Moderate LO: To use SQL to assess table structure Classification: Concept 8) The second step in assessing table structure is to examine data values and determine dependencies and keys.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology; Application of Knowledge Difficulty: Moderate LO: To use SQL to assess table structure Classification: Concept 9) When examining data values as a part of assessing table structure, you should try to determine functional dependencies.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology; Application of Knowledge Difficulty: Easy LO: To use SQL to assess table structure Classification: Concept 10) When examining data values as a part of assessing table structure, you should try to determine multivalued dependencies.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology; Application of Knowledge Difficulty: Easy LO: To use SQL to assess table structure Classification: Concept 11) When examining data values as a part of assessing table structure, you should try to determine the table's primary key.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology; Application of Knowledge Difficulty: Easy LO: To use SQL to assess table structure Classification: Synthesis 12) When examining data values as a part of assessing table structure, there is no need to try to determine candidate keys other than the table's primary key.

Answer: FALSE AACSB: Information Technology; Application of Knowledge Difficulty: Easy LO: To use SQL to assess table structure Classification: Concept 2 ..

13) When examining data values as a part of assessing table structure, there is no need to try to determine foreign keys.

Answer: FALSE AACSB: Information Technology; Application of Knowledge Difficulty: Easy LO: To use SQL to assess table structure Classification: Concept 14) The third step in assessing table structure is to check the validity of presumed referential integrity constraints.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology; Application of Knowledge Difficulty: Moderate LO: To use SQL to assess table structure Classification: Concept 15) The elimination of modification anomalies and the reduction of duplicated data are advantages of normalization.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Difficult LO: To understand the advantages and disadvantages of normalization Classification: Concept 16) Database design varies depending on whether you're building an updatable database or a read-only database.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To design updatable databases to store data received from another source Classification: Concept 17) Normalization eliminates modification anomalies and data duplication.

Answer: FALSE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Difficult LO: To understand the advantages and disadvantages of normalization Classification: Concept 18) The presence of one or more foreign keys in a relation means that we cannot eliminate duplicated data in that table.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology; Analytical Thinking Difficulty: Moderate LO: To understand the advantages and disadvantages of normalization Classification: Concept 3 ..

19) Normalization requires applications to use more complex SQL since they will need to write subqueries and joins to recombine data stored in separate relations.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology; Analytical Thinking Difficulty: Moderate LO: To understand the advantages and disadvantages of normalization Classification: Concept 20) Relations are sometimes left unnormalized to improve performance.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology; Analytical Thinking Difficulty: Difficult LO: To understand the advantages and disadvantages of normalization Classification: Concept 21) Relations in BCNF have no modification anomalies in regard to functional dependencies.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To understand the advantages and disadvantages of normalization Classification: Concept 22) A defining requirement for BCNF is that every determinant must be a candidate key.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To understand the advantages and disadvantages of normalization Classification: Concept 23) The SQL INSERT statement can be used to populate normalized tables.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology; Application of Knowledge Difficulty: Moderate LO: To understand the advantages and disadvantages of normalization Classification: Concept 24) The SQL DELETE TABLE statement can be used to remove unneeded tables after the normalized tables are created and populated.

Answer: FALSE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To understand the advantages and disadvantages of normalization Classification: Concept

4 ..

25) SQL statements that can be used to create referential integrity statements for normalized tables are created during the normalization process.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To understand the advantages and disadvantages of normalization Classification: Concept 26) United States ZIP codes are a classic example of unneeded normalization.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology; Analytical Thinking Difficulty: Moderate LO: To understand the advantages and disadvantages of normalization Classification: Concept 27) Multivalued dependencies create anomalies so serious that multivalued dependencies must always be eliminated.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To understand the advantages and disadvantages of normalization Classification: Concept 28) Writing SQL subqueries and joins against normalized tables is simple compared to the code that must be written to handle anomalies from multivalued dependencies.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To understand the advantages and disadvantages of normalization Classification: Concept 29) To eliminate multivalued dependencies, normalize your tables so that they are all in BCNF. Answer: FALSE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Difficult LO: To understand the advantages and disadvantages of normalization Classification: Concept 30) Creating a read-only database is a job often given to beginning database professionals.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To design read-only databases to store data from updatable databases Classification: Concept

5 ..

31) Read-only databases are often updated.

Answer: FALSE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To design read-only databases to store data from updatable databases Classification: Concept 32) Design guidelines and priorities are the same whether you're working with an updatable database or a read-only database.

Answer: FALSE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To design read-only databases to store data from updatable databases; To design updatable databases to store data received from another source Classification: Concept 33) Normalization is an advantage for a read-only database.

Answer: FALSE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To design read-only databases to store data from updatable databases; To understand the advantages and disadvantages of normalization Classification: Concept 34) Denormalization is the process of joining previously normalized tables back together.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To understand denormalization Classification: Concept 35) Denormalization reduces the complexity of the SQL statements needed in an application to read required data.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To understand denormalization Classification: Concept 36) Denormalization is simple—join the data together and store it in a table.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To understand denormalization Classification: Concept

6 ..

37) Read-only databases seldom use more than one copy of a set of the same data.

Answer: FALSE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To understand denormalization Classification: Concept 38) Read-only databases often use several copies of a set of the same data, where each copy is modified for a specific use.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To understand denormalization Classification: Concept 39) Multivalued dependencies show up under a different name as the multivalued, multicolumn problem.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To recognize and be able to correct common design problems: The multivalue, multicolumn problem Classification: Concept 40) The multivalued, multicolumn problem occurs when a set of columns are used to store data that should actually be in one column.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To recognize and be able to correct common design problems: The multivalue, multicolumn problem Classification: Concept 41) One situation created by the multivalued, multicolumn problem is that the maximum number of data values for an attribute is limited.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To recognize and be able to correct common design problems: The multivalue, multicolumn problem Classification: Concept

7 ..

42) If you have a table with a set of columns named "Child01", "Child02" and "Child03", the table is likely to have the multivalued, multicolumn problem.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology; Application of Knowledge Difficulty: Easy LO: To recognize and be able to correct common design problems: The multivalue, multicolumn problem Classification: Application 43) When you are creating a database from existing data, you will have only minor problems with inconsistent values.

Answer: FALSE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To recognize and be able to correct common design problems: The inconsistent values problem Classification: Concept 44) An inconsistent values problem is created when different users have coded the same data entries differently.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To recognize and be able to correct common design problems: The inconsistent values problem Classification: Concept 45) The problem of misspelled data entries is an entirely different problem than the inconsistent values problem.

Answer: FALSE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To recognize and be able to correct common design problems: The inconsistent values problem Classification: Concept 46) You are creating a BOAT table using existing data from multiple sources, and you find that you have "power boat blue", "boat, power, blue" and "blue power boat" as data values for the same column. This is an example of the inconsistent values problem.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology; Application of Knowledge Difficulty: Easy LO: To recognize and be able to correct common design problems: The inconsistent values problem Classification: Application

8 ..

47) A missing value is called a null value.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To recognize and be able to correct common design problems: The missing values problem Classification: Concept 48) Null values are a problem because they are ambiguous.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To recognize and be able to correct common design problems: The missing values problem Classification: Concept 49) A null value in a column may indicate that there is no appropriate value for that attribute.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To recognize and be able to correct common design problems: The missing values problem Classification: Concept 50) A null value in a column may indicate that there is an appropriate value for that attribute, but it is unknown.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To recognize and be able to correct common design problems: The missing values problem Classification: Concept 51) A null value in a column may indicate that there is an appropriate value for that attribute, and although the value is known, no one has entered the value into the database.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To recognize and be able to correct common design problems: The missing values problem Classification: Concept 52) Most DBMS products will let you define a primary key on a column that contains null values.

Answer: FALSE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To recognize and be able to correct common design problems: The missing values problem Classification: Concept

9 ..

53) The SQL IS NULL keyword can be used to count the number of nulls in a column.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To recognize and be able to correct common design problems: The missing values problem Classification: Concept 54) General-purpose remarks columns rarely contain important data.

Answer: FALSE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To recognize and be able to correct common design problems: The general-purpose remarks column problem Classification: Concept 55) The problem with a general-purpose remarks column is that the data it contains are likely to be verbal, inconsistent, and stored in a verbose manner.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To recognize and be able to correct common design problems: The general-purpose remarks column problem Classification: Concept 56) If you see a column name Notes, it is likely that this is a general-purpose remarks column.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To recognize and be able to correct common design problems: The general-purpose remarks column problem Classification: Concept 57) When you are given a set of tables and asked to create a database to store their data, the first step is to ________.

A) assess the existing tables' structure and content B) design the database structure C) create one or more new tables D) move the data into the new database Answer: A AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To use SQL to assess table structure Classification: Concept

10 ..

58) The first step in assessing table structure includes ________.

A) counting rows B) examining columns C) examining data values D) Both A and B are correct Answer: D AACSB: Information Technology; Application of Knowledge Difficulty: Moderate LO: To use SQL to assess table structure Classification: Concept 59) The second step in assessing table structure includes ________.

A) counting rows B) examining columns C) examining data values D) A and B Answer: C AACSB: Information Technology; Application of Knowledge Difficulty: Moderate LO: To use SQL to assess table structure Classification: Concept 60) During the second step of assessing table structure, you are trying to determine ________.

A) multivalued dependencies B) data types C) missing values D) subqueries Answer: A AACSB: Information Technology; Application of Knowledge Difficulty: Moderate LO: To use SQL to assess table structure Classification: Concept 61) During the second step of assessing table structure, you are trying to determine ________.

A) relationships B) candidate keys C) updatability D) efficiency Answer: B AACSB: Information Technology; Application of Knowledge Difficulty: Moderate LO: To use SQL to assess table structure Classification: Concept

11 ..

62) To count the number of rows in a table, use the SQL construct ________.

A) SELECT * B) SELECT TOP n * C) SELECT COUNT(TOP n) D) SELECT COUNT(*) Answer: D AACSB: Information Technology; Application of Knowledge Difficulty: Difficult LO: To use SQL to assess table structure Classification: Concept 63) The SQL function COUNT ________.

A) counts the number of columns in a table B) counts the number of rows in a table C) counts the number of tables in a database D) counts the number of updates to a database Answer: B AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To use SQL to assess table structure Classification: Concept 64) To limit the number of rows retrieved from a table, use the SQL construct ________.

A) SELECT * B) SELECT TOP n * C) SELECT COUNT(TOP n) D) SELECT COUNT(*) Answer: B AACSB: Information Technology; Application of Knowledge Difficulty: Moderate LO: To use SQL to assess table structure Classification: Concept 65) The SQL keyword TOP ________.

A) limits the number of columns retrieved from a table B) limits the number of rows retrieved from a table C) limits the number of tables retrieved from a database D) A and C Answer: B AACSB: Information Technology; Application of Knowledge Difficulty: Moderate LO: To use SQL to assess table structure Classification: Concept

12 ..

66) You have been given two tables, CUSTOMER and SALE. You want to check the referential integrity constraint: SALE.CustomerNumber must exist in CUSTOMER.CustomerNumber You run the following SQL query: SELECT CustomerNumber FROM SALE WHERE CustomerNumber NOT IN (SELECT CustomerNumber FROM CUSTOMER); What is shown in the results of this query?

A) All values of CustomerNumber that match the constraint.

B) All values of CustomerNumber that violate the constraint.

C) All values of CustomerNumber where SALE.CustomerNumber = CUSTOMER.CustomerNumber.

D) All values of Customer number that are in CUSTOMER but not in SALE. Answer: B AACSB: Information Technology; Application of Knowledge Difficulty: Difficult LO: To use SQL to assess table structure Classification: Application 67) The advantages of normalization include ________.

A) the elimination of modification anomalies B) the elimination of duplicated data C) more complex SQL for multitable subqueries and joins D) simpler SQL queries Answer: A AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Difficult LO: To understand the advantages and disadvantages of normalization Classification: Concept 68) The disadvantages of normalization include ________.

A) the elimination of modification anomalies B) the elimination of duplicated data C) more complex SQL for multitable subqueries and joins D) Both A and B are correct Answer: C AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To understand the advantages and disadvantages of normalization Classification: Concept 13 ..

69) The presence of one or more foreign keys in a relation prevents ________.

A) the elimination of modification anomalies B) the elimination of duplicated data C) more complex SQL for multitable subqueries and joins D) Both A and B are correct Answer: B AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Difficult LO: To understand the advantages and disadvantages of normalization Classification: Concept 70) Anomalies caused by functional dependencies can be eliminated by putting tables into ________.

A) 1NF B) 2NF C) 3NF D) BCNF Answer: D AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To understand the advantages and disadvantages of normalization Classification: Concept 71) The defining characteristic of BCNF is that a table is in BCNF if ________.

A) all rows are unique B) all columns are consistent C) the primary key is a candidate key D) all determinants are candidate keys Answer: D AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Difficult LO: To understand the advantages and disadvantages of normalization Classification: Concept 72) A classic example of unneeded normalization is when we are dealing with ________.

A) ZIP codes B) sales orders and line items C) association patterns D) multivalued dependencies Answer: A AACSB: Information Technology; Application of Knowledge Difficulty: Moderate LO: To understand the advantages and disadvantages of normalization Classification: Concept

14 ..

73) Unlike the anomalies from functional dependencies, the anomalies from ________ are so serious that they should always be eliminated.

A) general purpose remarks columns B) sales orders and line items C) association patterns D) multivalued dependencies Answer: D AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To understand the advantages and disadvantages of normalization Classification: Concept 74) Read-only databases are used for ________.

A) updating B) querying C) data entry D) user account management Answer: B AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To design read-only databases to store data from updatable databases Classification: Concept 75) For a number of reasons, ________ is not often an advantage for a read-only database.

A) updating B) normalization C) denormalization D) Both A and B are correct Answer: B AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To design read-only databases to store data from updatable databases Classification: Concept 76) ________ is the process of joining two or more tables and storing the result as a single table.

A) Querying B) Normalization C) Denormalization D) Updating Answer: C AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To understand denormalization Classification: Concept

15 ..

77) An advantage of denormalization is ________.

A) faster updating B) faster querying C) faster copying of data D) faster design Answer: B AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Difficult LO: To understand denormalization Classification: Concept 78) A table with columns PhoneNumber01, PhoneNumber02, and PhoneNumber03 is likely to have ________.

A) the multivalue, multicolumn problem B) the inconsistent values problem C) the missing values problem D) the general-purpose remarks column problem Answer: A AACSB: Information Technology; Application of Knowledge Difficulty: Easy LO: To recognize and be able to correct common design problems: The multivalue, multicolumn problem Classification: Application 79) A form of multivalued dependency is found in ________.

A) the multivalued, multicolumn problem B) the inconsistent values problem C) the missing values problem D) the general-purpose remarks column problem Answer: A AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To recognize and be able to correct common design problems: The multivalue, multicolumn problem Classification: Concept

16 ..

80) When a table is created using existing data from multiple sources, you are likely to find that the different sources code data in slightly different ways. This is an example of ________.

A) the multivalued, multicolumn problem B) the inconsistent values problem C) the missing values problem D) the general-purpose remarks column problem Answer: B AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To recognize and be able to correct common design problems: The inconsistent values problem Classification: Concept 81) You are creating a PRODUCT table using existing data from multiple sources. Examining the data, you find that you have "large red hat", "large hat, red", "red hat large" and "hat, large, red." This is an example of ________.

A) the multivalue, multicolumn problem B) the inconsistent values problem C) the missing values problem D) the general-purpose remarks column problem Answer: B AACSB: Information Technology; Application of Knowledge Difficulty: Easy LO: To recognize and be able to correct common design problems: The inconsistent values problem Classification: Application 82) The problem of misspelled data entries is really the same as ________.

A) the multivalue, multicolumn problem B) the inconsistent values problem C) the missing values problem D) the general-purpose remarks column problem Answer: B AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To recognize and be able to correct common design problems: The inconsistent values problem Classification: Concept

17 ..

83) When a table is created using existing data from multiple sources, you are likely to find that some data values have never been provided because the values are not known. This is an example of ________.

A) the multivalued, multicolumn problem B) the inconsistent values problem C) the missing values problem D) the general-purpose remarks column problem Answer: C AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To recognize and be able to correct common design problems: The missing values problem Classification: Concept 84) When a table is created using existing data, you are likely to find that some data values have never been provided because any value there would be inappropriate. This is an example of ________.

A) the multivalued, multicolumn problem B) the inconsistent values problem C) the missing values problem D) the general-purpose remarks column problem Answer: C AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To recognize and be able to correct common design problems: The missing values problem Classification: Concept 85) Reviewing the work done on a table that was created using existing data from multiple sources, you are likely to find that some data values that were provided were never entered into the table. This is an example of ________.

A) the multivalued, multicolumn problem B) the inconsistent values problem C) the missing values problem D) the general-purpose remarks column problem Answer: C AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To recognize and be able to correct common design problems: The missing values problem Classification: Concept

18 ..

86) A missing value is called a(n) ________.

A) empty value B) null value C) missing value D) deleted value Answer: B AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To recognize and be able to correct common design problems: The missing values problem Classification: Concept 87) A null value can indicate which of the following conditions?

A) The value is incorrect.

B) The value is appropriate but unknown.

C) The value has been updated.

D) The value can never be changed.

Answer: B AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To recognize and be able to correct common design problems: The missing values problem Classification: Concept 88) To check for null values in a column in a table, use the SQL phrase ________.

A) IS B) IS NOT C) IS NULL D) COUNT(NULL) Answer: C AACSB: Information Technology; Application of Knowledge Difficulty: Moderate LO: To recognize and be able to correct common design problems: The missing values problem Classification: Concept 89) The SQL keyword IS NULL can be used to help ________.

A) count the number of columns in a table B) count the number of rows in a table C) count the number of null values in a column D) count the number of values in a column Answer: C AACSB: Information Technology; Application of Knowledge Difficulty: Moderate LO: To recognize and be able to correct common design problems: The missing values problem Classification: Concept

19 ..

90) Reviewing the work done on a table that was created using existing data from multiple sources, you find that a column named Remarks has been included, and it is populated with inconsistent and verbose verbal data. This is an example of ________.

A) the multivalued, multicolumn problem B) the inconsistent values problem C) the missing values problem D) the general-purpose remarks column problem Answer: D AACSB: Information Technology; Application of Knowledge Difficulty: Easy LO: To recognize and be able to correct common design problems: The general-purpose remarks column problem Classification: Concept 91) Describe the steps in assessing table structure when you are given a set of tables and asked to construct a new database to store the existing data.

Answer: First, you should count the number of rows in the tables and determine the type of data stored in each column. Second, you should analyze the existing data values and work with users to determine (1) multivalued dependencies, (2) functional dependencies, (3) candidate keys, (4) primary keys and (5) foreign keys. Finally, you should check the validity of the possible referential integrity constraints.

AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To use SQL to assess table structure Classification: Concept 92) When accessing table structure, how do you determine how many rows are in a table?

Answer: To determine how many rows are in a table, use a SELECT query that contains the SQL COUNT(*) function. This function will return the number of rows in the table.

AACSB: Information Technology; Application of Knowledge Difficulty: Easy LO: To use SQL to assess table structure Classification: Application 93) When assessing table structure, how do you determine the number and types of columns in a table?

Answer: To determine the number and types of how many rows are in a table, use a SELECT query that contains the SQL * expression. This expression will return all the columns in the table, and the data types can be determined by examining the values in each column.

AACSB: Information Technology; Application of Knowledge Difficulty: Easy LO: To use SQL to assess table structure Classification: Application

20 ..

94) When accessing table structure, and determining the number and types of columns in a table, how can you control how many rows are returned?

Answer: When determining the number and types of how many rows are in a table, use a SELECT query that contains the SQL SELECT TOP ## expression, where ## is the number of rows that you want returned. This function will return only the number of rows specified by the TOP expression, which can make a table with a large number of rows manageable.

AACSB: Information Technology; Application of Knowledge Difficulty: Easy LO: To use SQL to assess table structure Classification: Application 95) What are the advantages and disadvantages of normalization?

Answer: The advantages of normalization are that it (1) eliminates modification anomalies and (2) reduces duplicated data. Reducing duplicated data will eliminate data integrity problems and save file space. The disadvantages of normalization are that it (1) will require application developers to write more complicated SQL statements for multitable subqueries and joins, and (2) may slow down the applications running against the database.

AACSB: Information Technology; Analytical Thinking Difficulty: Moderate LO: To understand the advantages and disadvantages of normalization Classification: Synthesis 96) Explain denormalization, and why it may be appropriate to denormalize a set of tables.

Answer: Denormalization is the process of taking a normalized set of relations and converting them into a smaller set of relations that is in a lower normal form and thus vulnerable to a greater number of anomalies. While the fully normalized set of relations is more desirable from a theoretical perspective, it does have some disadvantages. The greater the number of relations in the database, the more work that is required by the database whenever data must be retrieved from multiple relations to reconstruct the users' view of the data. In some circumstances, the anomalies introduced by denormalizing a data model may be considered an acceptable cost for the performance improvement from reducing the overhead work performed by the database.

AACSB: Information Technology; Analytical Thinking Difficulty: Moderate LO: To understand denormalization Classification: Application

21 ..

97) What is the multivalue, multicolumn problem, and why is it a problem? Include an example.

Answer: The multivalue, multicolumn problem occurs when a table uses multiple columns to store multiple values of an attribute. For example, a database of dog owners might have a table with the structure: DOG_OWNER (OwnerID, LastName, FirstName, DogName01, DogName02, DogName03) This is a problem because (1) the number of DogNames is fixed, and (2) this structure creates query problems. In fact, this structure is another form of the multivalued dependency, and requires a similar solution: a DOG table should be created to store the DogNames and with a foreign key to link the dogs to their owner.

AACSB: Information Technology; Application of Knowledge Difficulty: Moderate LO: To understand denormalization Classification: Application 98) What are inconsistent values, and why are they a problem?

Answer: Inconsistent values are different forms of the same data value. For example, in a database of dog owners and their dogs, we might find a border collie listed as "b. collie", "collie, border", and "border collie". This will create query problems. For example, a query for "border collie" will not return the dogs listed in the other formats. Or, alternatively, we would have to write a query that includes all possible (or at least known) variations of "border collie," and that would be a real pain.

AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To recognize and be able to correct common design problems: The inconsistent values problem Classification: Concept 99) What are null values, and why are they a problem?

Answer: A null value is a missing value, a value that has never been input into a cell in a table.

Null values are a problem because they are ambiguous. A null value can represent three different conditions: (1) the value is inappropriate, (2) the value is appropriate but unknown, or (3) the value is appropriate and known but not entered into the database.

AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To recognize and be able to correct common design problems: The missing values problem Classification: Concept

22 ..

100) What are general-purpose remarks columns, and why are they a problem?

Answer: General-purpose remarks columns are columns in a table with labels such as "Remarks", "Comments", or "Notes". They are a problem because these columns often contain important data that is stored in an inconsistent, verbal, and verbose way. Further, they may contain multiple data items.

AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To recognize and be able to correct common design problems: The general-purpose remarks column problem Classification: Concept

23 ..

Database Processing, 14e (Kroenke) Chapter 5: Data Modeling with the Entity-Relationship Model 1) A data model is a plan for a database design.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To understand the two-phase data modeling/database design process Classification: Concept 2) The method of constructing data models used in the text is the extended entity-relationship (ER) model.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To understand the two-phase data modeling/database design process Classification: Concept 3) An entity is something that users want to track.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To be able to determine entities, attributes, and relationships Classification: Concept 4) Entities of a given type are grouped into entity classes.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To be able to determine entities, attributes, and relationships Classification: Concept 5) An entity class is described by the structure of the entities in that class.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To understand entity-relationship (E-R) diagrams Classification: Concept 6) An entity instance is an occurrence of a particular entity.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To understand entity-relationship (E-R) diagrams Classification: Concept

1 ..

7) An entity instance of an entity class is the representation of a particular entity and is described by the values of the attributes of the entity.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Difficult LO: To understand entity-relationship (E-R) diagrams Classification: Concept 8) An identifier of an entity instance is one or more attributes that name or identify entity instances.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To be able to create entity identifiers Classification: Concept 9) A compound identifier is an identifier consisting of two or more attributes.

Answer: FALSE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To be able to create entity identifiers Classification: Concept 10) In E-R modeling, an attribute describes the characteristics of an entity.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To be able to determine entities, attributes, and relationships Classification: Concept 11) In E-R modeling, entities within an entity class may have different attributes.

Answer: FALSE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To understand entity-relationship (E-R) diagrams Classification: Concept 12) An identifier of an entity instance must consist of one and only one attribute.

Answer: FALSE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To be able to create entity identifiers Classification: Concept

2 ..

13) A composite identifier is defined as a composite attribute that is an identifier.

Answer: FALSE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Difficult LO: To be able to create entity identifiers Classification: Concept 14) An identifier serves the same role for a table that a key does for an entity.

Answer: FALSE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To be able to create entity identifiers Classification: Concept 15) Entities can be associated with one another in relationships.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To understand entity-relationship (E-R) diagrams Classification: Concept 16) The degree of a relationship is the number of entity classes in the relationship.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To be able to determine entities, attributes, and relationships Classification: Concept 17) A binary relationship is a relationship between two or more entities.

Answer: FALSE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To be able to determine entities, attributes, and relationships Classification: Concept 18) Relationships of degree two are referred to as binary relationships.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To understand entity-relationship (E-R) diagrams Classification: Concept

3 ..

19) E-R modeling recognizes both relationship classes and relationship instances.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To understand entity-relationship (E-R) diagrams Classification: Concept 20) In today's E-R models, attributes of relationships are still used.

Answer: FALSE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To understand entity-relationship (E-R) diagrams Classification: Concept 21) A single relationship class involves only one entity class.

Answer: FALSE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Difficult LO: To be able to determine entities, attributes, and relationships Classification: Concept 22) A binary relationship is a relationship based on numerical entity instance identifiers.

Answer: FALSE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To understand entity-relationship (E-R) diagrams Classification: Concept 23) The degree of a relationship is expressed as the relationship's maximum cardinality.

Answer: FALSE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Difficult LO: To understand entity-relationship (E-R) diagrams Classification: Concept 24) When transforming a data model into a relational design, relationships of all degrees are treated as combinations of binary relationships.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology; Application of Knowledge Difficulty: Moderate LO: To understand the two-phase data modeling/database design process Classification: Concept

4 ..

25) The principal difference between an entity and a table is that you can express a relationship between entities without using foreign keys.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To understand the two-phase data modeling/database design process Classification: Concept 26) When designing a database, first identify the entities, then determine the attributes, and finally create the relationships.

Answer: FALSE AACSB: Information Technology; Application of Knowledge Difficulty: Difficult LO: To be able to determine entities, attributes, and relationships Classification: Concept 27) The notation 1:N shows a relationship's maximum cardinalities.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To be able to determine minimum and maximum cardinalities Classification: Concept 28) Relationships are classified by their cardinality.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To be able to determine minimum and maximum cardinalities Classification: Concept 29) A relationship's maximum cardinality indicates the maximum number of entities that can participate in the relationship.

Answer: FALSE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Difficult LO: To be able to determine minimum and maximum cardinalities Classification: Concept 30) In an E-R model, the three types of maximum cardinality are 1:1, 1:N, and N:M. Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To be able to determine minimum and maximum cardinalities Classification: Concept

5 ..

31) In a 1:N relationship, the term parent refers to the N side of the relationship.

Answer: FALSE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To be able to determine minimum and maximum cardinalities Classification: Concept 32) In a 1:N relationship, the parent entity is on the one side of the relationship, and the child entity is on the many side of the relationship.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To be able to determine minimum and maximum cardinalities Classification: Concept 33) An entity's minimum cardinality in a relationship indicates the number of entity instances that must participate in the relationship.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To be able to determine minimum and maximum cardinalities Classification: Concept 34) An entity's minimum cardinality in a relationship indicates whether or not an entity must participate in the relationship.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To be able to determine minimum and maximum cardinalities Classification: Concept 35) In an E-R model, the three types of minimum cardinality are mandatory, optional, and indeterminate.

Answer: FALSE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To be able to determine minimum and maximum cardinalities Classification: Concept 36) An entity that represents something that can exist on its own is called a strong entity.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To be able to determine entities, attributes, and relationships Classification: Concept

6 ..

37) E-R models use an identifying relationship to connect entities that are ID-dependent.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To understand and be able to use ID-dependent and other weak entities Classification: Concept 38) An ID-dependent entity is an entity whose identifier includes the identifier of another entity.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To understand and be able to use ID-dependent and other weak entities Classification: Concept 39) ID-dependent entities are associated by a nonidentifying relationship.

Answer: FALSE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To understand and be able to use ID-dependent and other weak entities Classification: Concept 40) A weak entity is an entity that cannot exist in the database without (and is logically dependent upon) another type of entity also existing in the database.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Difficult LO: To understand and be able to use ID-dependent and other weak entities Classification: Concept 41) ID-dependent entities are a common type of weak entity.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To understand and be able to use ID-dependent and other weak entities Classification: Concept 42) All weak entities must have a minimum cardinality of 1 on the entity on which it depends.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To understand and be able to use ID-dependent and other weak entities Classification: Concept

7 ..

43) Subtype entities contain, apart from the identifier, only attributes that do not appear in the supertype.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To understand and be able to use supertype/subtype entities Classification: Concept 44) An attribute that determines which subtype is appropriate is called a discriminator.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To understand and be able to use supertype/subtype entities Classification: Concept 45) An exclusive subtype pattern has one supertype entity that relates to one or more subtype entities.

Answer: FALSE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To understand and be able to use supertype/subtype entities Classification: Concept 46) Entities with an IS-A relationship should have the same identifier.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To understand and be able to use supertype/subtype entities Classification: Concept 47) One example of a database design using an ID-dependent relationship is the association pattern.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To understand and be able to use the ID-dependent association pattern Classification: Concept 48) One example of a database design using a strong relationship is the multivalued attribute pattern.

Answer: FALSE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Difficult LO: To understand and be able to use the ID-dependent multivalued attribute pattern Classification: Concept

8 ..

49) One example of a database design using an ID-dependent relationship is the archetype/instance pattern.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To understand and be able to use the ID-dependent archetype/instance pattern Classification: Concept 50) Data modelers agree that weak, non-ID-dependent entities exist and are important.

Answer: FALSE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To understand and be able to use ID-dependent and other weak entities Classification: Concept 51) Entities containing multivalued attributes are often represented using subtypes.

Answer: FALSE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Difficult LO: To understand and be able to use supertype/subtype entities Classification: Concept 52) The supremetype entity contains the attributes that are common to all subtypes.

Answer: FALSE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To understand and be able to use supertype/subtype entities Classification: Concept 53) An attribute that determines which subtype is appropriate is called a discriminator.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To understand and be able to use supertype/subtype entities Classification: Concept 54) Subtypes can be exclusive or inclusive.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To understand and be able to use supertype/subtype entities Classification: Concept

9 ..

55) Relationships between supertypes and subtypes are called IS-A relationships.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To understand and be able to use supertype/subtype entities Classification: Concept 56) Relationships among instances of a single entity class are called redundant relationships.

Answer: FALSE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To understand and be able to use recursive patterns Classification: Concept 57) There are three types of recursive relationships: 1:1, 1:N, and N:M. Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To understand and be able to use recursive patterns Classification: Concept 58) Recursive relationships only exist for one-to-one relationships.

Answer: FALSE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To understand and be able to use recursive patterns Classification: Concept 59) Which of the following is not a good reason for designing a data model?

A) It's easier to change things in the data model than it is in the actual DBMS. B) The data model provides a simplified view of the database that can be shown to people who don't need to see all the details.

C) Creating a data model will help you understand the application area better.

D) The data model can be discarded after the database is operational.

Answer: D AACSB: Information Technology; Analytical Thinking Difficulty: Moderate LO: To understand the purpose of the data modeling process Classification: Concept

10 ..

60) Which of the following is not a key element of an E-R model?

A) Relationships B) Entities C) Objects D) Attributes Answer: C AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To understand entity-relationship (E-R) diagrams Classification: Concept 61) Entities of a given type are grouped into an ________.

A) entity class B) entity relationship C) entity instance D) entity attribute Answer: A AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To understand entity-relationship (E-R) diagrams Classification: Concept 62) An occurrence of a particular entity is called an ________.

A) entity class B) entity relationship C) entity instance D) entity attribute Answer: C AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To understand entity-relationship (E-R) diagrams Classification: Concept 63) The characteristics of a thing are described by its ________.

A) identifiers B) entities C) objects D) attributes Answer: D AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To be able to determine entities, attributes, and relationships Classification: Concept

11 ..

64) Attributes may be ________.

A) complete B) optional C) multivalued D) required Answer: C AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To be able to determine entities, attributes, and relationships Classification: Concept 65) An identifier may be ________.

A) composite B) optional C) a relationship D) minimal Answer: A AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To be able to create entity identifiers Classification: Concept 66) A composite attribute is an attribute that ________.

A) is multivalued B) describes a characteristic of the relationship C) consists of a group of attributes D) is calculated at run-time Answer: C AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To be able to determine entities, attributes, and relationships Classification: Concept 67) For a relationship to be considered a binary relationship it must satisfy which of the following conditions?

A) It must involve exactly two entity classes.

B) It must have a maximum cardinality of 1:1.

C) It must have a maximum cardinality of 1:N. D) Both A and B are correct Answer: A AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Difficult LO: To be able to determine entities, attributes, and relationships Classification: Concept

12 ..

68) Which of the following is not a common variant of the E-R model?

A) IE Crow's Foot B) IDEF1X C) UML D) Object-oriented Answer: D AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To understand variations of the E-R model Classification: Concept 69) Maximum cardinality refers to ________.

A) the most instances of one entity class that can be involved in a relationship instance with another entity class B) the minimum number of entity classes involved in a relationship C) whether or not an instance of one entity class is required to be related to an instance of another entity class D) whether or not an entity is a weak entity Answer: A AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To be able to determine minimum and maximum cardinalities Classification: Concept

70) You are given an E-R diagram with two entities, ORDER and CUSTOMER, as shown above, and are asked to draw the relationship between them. If a given customer can place only one order and a given order can be placed by at most one customer, which of the following should be indicated in the relationship symbol between the two entities?

A) N:M B) 1:1 C) 1:N D) N:1 Answer: B AACSB: Information Technology; Application of Knowledge Difficulty: Moderate LO: To be able to determine minimum and maximum cardinalities; To understand and be able to use strong entity patterns Classification: Application

13 ..

71) You are given an E-R diagram with two entities, ORDER and CUSTOMER, as shown above, and are asked to draw the relationship between them. If a given customer can place many orders and a given order can be placed by at most one customer, which of the following should be indicated in the relationship symbol between the two entities?

A) N:M B) 1:1 C) 1:N D) N:1 Answer: D AACSB: Information Technology; Application of Knowledge Difficulty: Difficult LO: To be able to determine minimum and maximum cardinalities; To understand and be able to use strong entity patterns Classification: Application 72) You are given an E-R diagram with two entities, ORDER and CUSTOMER, as shown above, and are asked to draw the relationship between them. If a given customer can place many orders and a given order can be placed by one or more customers, which of the following should be indicated in the relationship symbol between the two entities?

A) N:M B) 1:1 C) 1:N D) N:1 Answer: A AACSB: Information Technology; Application of Knowledge Difficulty: Moderate LO: To be able to determine minimum and maximum cardinalities; To understand and be able to use strong entity patterns Classification: Application 73) Minimum cardinality refers to ________.

A) the most instances of one entity class that can be involved in a relationship with one instance of another entity class B) the minimum number of entity classes involved in a relationship C) whether or not an instance of one entity class is required to be related to an instance of another entity class D) whether or not an entity is a weak entity Answer: C AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To be able to determine minimum and maximum cardinalities Classification: Concept

14 ..

74) In a minimum cardinality, minimums are generally stated as ________.

A) 0 or 1 B) 1 or N C) M or N D) one or many Answer: A AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To be able to determine minimum and maximum cardinalities Classification: Concept 75) A hash mark across the relationship line near an entity indicates ________.

A) a maximum cardinality of "zero" B) a maximum cardinality of "one" C) a minimum cardinality of "optional" D) a minimum cardinality of "required" Answer: D AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To be able to determine minimum and maximum cardinalities Classification: Concept 76) A circle across the relationship line near an entity indicates ________.

A) a maximum cardinality of "zero" B) a maximum cardinality of "one" C) a minimum cardinality of "optional" D) a minimum cardinality of "required" Answer: C AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To be able to determine minimum and maximum cardinalities Classification: Concept

15 ..

77) You are given an E-R diagram with two entities, ORDER and CUSTOMER, as shown above. What does the symbol next to the ORDER entity indicate?

A) A maximum cardinality of "zero" B) A maximum cardinality of "one" C) A minimum cardinality of "optional" D) A minimum cardinality of "required" Answer: C AACSB: Information Technology; Application of Knowledge Difficulty: Moderate LO: To be able to determine minimum and maximum cardinalities; To understand and be able to use strong entity patterns Classification: Application 78) You are given an E-R diagram with two entities, ORDER and CUSTOMER, as shown above. What does the symbol next to the CUSTOMER entity indicate?

A) A maximum cardinality of "zero" B) A maximum cardinality of "one" C) A minimum cardinality of "optional" D) A minimum cardinality of "required" Answer: D AACSB: Information Technology; Application of Knowledge Difficulty: Moderate LO: To be able to determine minimum and maximum cardinalities; To understand and be able to use strong entity patterns Classification: Application 79) An entity whose identifier includes the identifier of another entity is a(n) ________.

A) strong entity B) weak entity C) optional entity D) required entity Answer: B AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To understand and be able to use ID-dependent and other weak entities; To be able to create entity identifiers Classification: Concept

16 ..

80) An entity whose existence depends on the presence of another entity but whose identifier does not include the identifier of the other entity is a(n) ________.

A) strong entity B) weak entity C) ID-dependent entity D) subtype entity Answer: B AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Difficult LO: To understand and be able to use ID-dependent and other weak entities Classification: Concept 81) Which of the following is considered to be a weak entity?

A) A subtype entity B) The archetype in an archetype/instance pattern C) The association entity in an association pattern D) The parent entity in a parent-child relationship Answer: C AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Difficult LO: To understand and be able to use ID-dependent and other weak entities Classification: Concept 82) An entity that holds specialized attributes that distinguish it from one or more other similar entities is a ________.

A) supertype B) subtype C) discriminator D) parent Answer: B AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To understand and be able to use supertype/subtype entities Classification: Concept 83) Which of the following is not true about subtype entities?

A) Subtypes may be exclusive.

B) The supertype and subtypes will have the same identifier.

C) Subtypes are used to avoid a situation in which some attributes are required to be null.

D) All subtypes of a supertype must have the same attributes.

Answer: D AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Difficult LO: To understand and be able to use supertype/subtype entities Classification: Concept

17 ..

84) An attribute that determines which subtype should be used is a(n) ________.

A) supertype B) subtype C) discriminator D) identifier Answer: C AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To understand and be able to use supertype/subtype entities Classification: Concept 85) Discriminators can be ________.

A) attributes B) entities C) relationships D) subtypes Answer: A AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To understand and be able to use supertype/subtype entities Classification: Concept 86) Supertype/subtype entities are said to have a(n) ________ relationship.

A) HAS-A B) IS-A C) recursive D) redundant Answer: B AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To understand and be able to use supertype/subtype entities Classification: Concept 87) To represent an association pattern in an E-R model, ________.

A) create a new ID-dependent entity with a 1:1 relationship to one other entity B) create a new weak, but not ID-dependent entity with a 1:1 relationship to one other entity C) create a new strong entity with a 1:1 relationship to one other entity D) create a new ID-dependent entity with a N:1 relationships to two parent entities Answer: D AACSB: Information Technology; Application of Knowledge Difficulty: Difficult LO: To understand and be able to use the ID-dependent association pattern Classification: Concept

18 ..

88) To represent a multivalued attribute in an E-R model, ________.

A) create a new ID-dependent entity with a 1:N relationship B) create a new weak, but not ID-dependent entity with a 1:N relationship C) create a new strong entity with a 1:1 relationship D) create a new ID-dependent entity with a 1:1 relationship Answer: A AACSB: Information Technology; Application of Knowledge Difficulty: Difficult LO: To understand and be able to use the ID-dependent association pattern Classification: Concept 89) To represent an archetype/instance pattern in an E-R model, ________.

A) create a new ID-dependent entity with a 1:N relationship B) create a new weak, but not ID-dependent entity with a 1:N relationship C) create a new strong entity with a 1:1 relationship D) create a new ID-dependent entity with a 1:1 relationship Answer: A AACSB: Information Technology; Application of Knowledge Difficulty: Difficult LO: To understand and be able to use the ID-dependent association pattern Classification: Concept 90) A line-item pattern must involve what kind of entity?

A) Strong entity B) Supertype entity C) Weak entity with one identifying relationship D) Weak entity with two identifying relationships Answer: C AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To understand and be able to use the line-item pattern Classification: Concept 91) A for-use-by pattern must involve what kind of entity?

A) Strong entity B) Supertype entity C) Weak entity with one identifying relationship D) Weak entity with two identifying relationships Answer: B AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To understand and be able to use the for-use-by pattern Classification: Concept

19 ..

92) When an entity has a relationship to itself, we have a(n) ________.

A) supertype/subtype relationship B) archetype/instance relationship C) recursive relationship D) Both A and C are correct Answer: C AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To understand and be able to use recursive patterns Classification: Concept 93) Recursive relationships can have all of the following maximum cardinalities except ________.

A) 1:1 B) 1:N C) N:M D) M:M Answer: D AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To understand and be able to use recursive patterns Classification: Concept 94) Suppose you have created a data model for an airline based on a variety of forms, reports, user interviews, data sources, etc. Your client comes forward with a new desired report that includes passenger weights and a relationship between passengers and employees, neither of which is in your E-R diagram. You should ________.

A) create a new, separate E-R diagram with just the new information B) add the relationship and the weight attribute to the existing data model C) add the relationship but not the weight attribute D) add the weight attribute but not the relationship Answer: B AACSB: Information Technology; Application of Knowledge Difficulty: Moderate LO: To understand the iterative nature of the data modeling process Classification: Application

20 ..

95) Describe and discuss the main elements of the Entity-Relationship (E-R) model. Include an example.

Answer: The E-R model is basically made up of entities, attributes and relationships. Entities represent the things people want to keep track of, such as customers and products. Each "thing" is presented by an entity or entity class—in this case CUSTOMER and PRODUCT. Individual members of each entity class are called entity instances—for example CUSTOMER John Smith and PRODUCT Canned Tomato Soup. Each entity is described by a set of attributes. For example, a CUSTOMER will have a CustomerNumber, a LastName and a FirstName, while a PRODUCT will have a ProductNumber and a Description. These, of course, have specific values for each entity instance. Finally, the entities are connected by relationships. There are relationship classes between entity classes and relationship instances between entity instances.

For example, in general a CUSTOMER buys a PRODUCT, and a PRODUCT is sold to a CUSTOMER. Specifically, CUSTOMER John Smith buys a PRODUCT Canned Tomato Soup.

AACSB: Information Technology; Application of Knowledge Difficulty: Moderate LO: To be able to determine entities, attributes, and relationships Classification: Application 96) Distinguish between an entity class and an entity instance.

Answer: An entity class is the collection of all entities of a given type. The entity class is described by the structure of the entities in that class. An entity instance is a representation of a particular entity within the entity class. The entity instance is described by the values of the attributes of the entity. An entity class, then, is a collection containing many entity instances.

AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To understand entity-relationship (E-R) diagrams Classification: Concept 97) What is meant by the degree of a relationship?

Answer: In the E-R model, the degree of a relationship indicates how many entity classes are participating in the relationship. If two entity classes are in the relationship, then the relationship is said to be of degree two and is called a binary relationship. If three entity classes are in the relationship, then the relationship is said to be of degree three and is called a ternary relationship.

So, for example, if we have the entity classes CUSTOMER and PRODUCT in a relationship, then they will have a relationship of degree two—a binary relationship.

AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To understand entity-relationship (E-R) diagrams Classification: Concept

21 ..

98) What is meant by the cardinality of a relationship?

Answer: In the E-R model, there are two types of cardinality—the maximum cardinality and the minimum cardinality. The maximum cardinality is the maximum number of entity instances that can participate in a relationship instance. There are three types of maximum cardinality: one-toone (1:1), one-to-many (1:N) and many-to-many (N:M). The minimum cardinality is the minimum number of entity instances that must participate in a relationship instance. This number is generally zero (0) or one (1). If the number is zero, then participation by that entity instance is optional (O)—it does not have to be in a relationship with an instance of the other entity. If the number is one, then participation by that entity instance is mandatory (M)—it must participate in a relationship with an instance of the other entity. In a binary relationship there are four (4) possible sets of minimum cardinalities—(O-O), (O-M), (M-O) and (M-M).

AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Difficult LO: To be able to determine minimum and maximum cardinalities Classification: Concept 99) How is maximum cardinality expressed in IE Crow's Foot E-R diagrams?

Answer: The Crow's Foot E-R diagram notation uses a hash mark to indicate a maximum cardinality of one and a crow's foot to indicate a maximum cardinality of many. Each symbol is placed immediately next to the rectangle symbolizing an entity. These symbols are combined in various forms to signify 1:1, 1:N and N:M relationships.

AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To understand entity-relationship (E-R) diagrams Classification: Concept 100) How is minimum cardinality expressed in IE Crow's Foot E-R diagrams?

Answer: The Crow's Foot E-R diagram notation uses a circle to indicate a minimum cardinality of zero (or "optional") and a hash mark to indicate a minimum cardinality of one (or "mandatory"). Each symbol is placed on the relationship line just beyond the symbol indicating maximum cardinality.

AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To understand entity-relationship (E-R) diagrams Classification: Concept 101) Distinguish between entity identifiers and keys.

Answer: An entity identifier is an attribute or group of attributes that is used to name or identify instances of an entity class. Unlike a key in the relational model, an entity identifier is more of a logical concept. It is simply an attribute that the users think of as distinguishing between entity instances in their environment.

AACSB: Information Technology; Analytical Thinking Difficulty: Easy LO: To be able to create entity identifiers Classification: Concept

22 ..

102) What is an ID-Dependent entity? Include an example.

Answer: There are some entities that cannot be completely identified without being associated with another entity that provides additional identifying information. A common example is an apartment, where just the apartment number by itself (for example, the number 12) does not tell you which apartment is being described—you have to know which building the apartment is in.

Thus the entity APARTMENT needs to be associated with the entity BUILDING. In fact, the entity APARTMENT needs to include the identifier of BUILDING in the identifier of APARTMENT for the identifier of APARTMENT to be complete. An entity that requires the inclusion of another entity's identifier as part of its own composite identifier is called an IDDependent entity.

AACSB: Information Technology; Application of Knowledge Difficulty: Moderate LO: To be able to determine entities, attributes, and relationships Classification: Application 103) Explain the ambiguity in the broad definition of a weak entity.

Answer: The broad definition of a weak entity includes any entity that relies on another entity for its existence in the database. This is ambiguous since this definition can apply to any entity that is involved in a relationship with a minimum cardinality of 1. If the minimum cardinality is 1, then an entity instance in that entity class cannot exist in the database unless there is a related entity instance in the associated entity class. The more restrictive definition of a weak entity indicates that an entity is weak if it logically depends on the other entity for its existence.

AACSB: Information Technology; Analytical Thinking Difficulty: Difficult LO: To understand and be able to use ID-dependent and other weak entities Classification: Concept 104) What are supertype and subtype entities? Include an example.

Answer: When instances of an entity can be categorized into different types with each type sharing some common characteristics while having certain characteristics that are unique to each type, the common attributes can be separated from the unique ones. This is represented in E-R diagrams through the use of supertype and subtype entities. The supertype entity class contains the attributes that are common to all of the subtypes. The subtype entity classes represent the different types, or categories, of the supertype. Only the attributes that are unique to a given subtype tend to be listed as the attributes of that subtype. Each subtype has a relationship with the supertype. All subtypes should have the same identifier as the supertype since they represent different perspectives of the same thing. As an example, consider VEHICLE (VIN, year, make) as a supertype, with subtypes CAR (VIN, model, seatingCapacity) and MOTORCYCLE (VIN, horsepower). All vehicles have VINs, a year, and a make. CARs additionally have a model and a seating capacity and MOTORCYCLES additionally have a horsepower rating.

AACSB: Information Technology; Application of Knowledge Difficulty: Moderate LO: To understand and be able to use supertype/subtype entities Classification: Application

23 ..

Database Processing, 14e (Kroenke) Chapter 6: Transforming Data Models into Database Designs 1) The first step in the database design process is to create tables and columns from entities and attributes.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To understand how to transform data models into database designs Classification: Concept 2) When creating a relational database design from E-R diagrams, first create a relation for each relationship.

Answer: FALSE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To understand how to transform data models into database designs Classification: Concept 3) Each entity in the extended E-R model is represented as a table in the relational database design.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To understand how to transform data models into database designs Classification: Concept 4) An entity needs to be examined according to normalization criteria before creating a table from it in the relational database design.

Answer: FALSE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To understand how to transform data models into database designs Classification: Concept 5) When creating a table in the relational database design from an entity in the extended E-R model, the attributes of the entity become the rows of the table.

Answer: FALSE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To understand how to transform data models into database designs Classification: Concept

1 ..

6) By default, the identifier of the entity becomes the foreign key of the corresponding table.

Answer: FALSE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To be able to identify primary keys and understand when to use a surrogate key Classification: Concept 7) The ideal primary key is short, numeric, and fixed.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To be able to identify primary keys and understand when to use a surrogate key Classification: Concept 8) A surrogate key is appropriate when the primary key of a table contains a lengthy text field.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To be able to identify primary keys and understand when to use a surrogate key Classification: Concept 9) One of the important properties of an attribute is whether or not it is required.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To be able to identify primary keys and understand when to use a surrogate key Classification: Concept 10) A surrogate key is a unique, system-supplied identifier used as the primary key of a table.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To be able to identify primary keys and understand when to use a surrogate key Classification: Concept 11) The values of a surrogate key have no meaning to the users.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To be able to identify primary keys and understand when to use a surrogate key Classification: Concept

2 ..

12) A surrogate key should be considered when the key contains a lengthy text field.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To be able to identify primary keys and understand when to use a surrogate key Classification: Concept 13) Whether or not an attribute is required is determined during the database modeling phase.

Answer: FALSE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To understand how to transform data models into database designs Classification: Application 14) A null value is an attribute value that has been set to zero.

Answer: FALSE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To understand how to transform data models into database designs Classification: Concept 15) Data types are consistent across all DBMS products.

Answer: FALSE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To understand how to transform data models into database designs Classification: Concept 16) A default value is the value the user enters into the row the first time the user enters data.

Answer: FALSE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To understand how to transform data models into database designs Classification: Concept 17) A data constraint is a limitation on data values.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To understand how to transform data models into database designs Classification: Concept

3 ..

18) The last step in creating a table is to verify table normalization.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To understand how to transform data models into database designs Classification: Concept 19) One of the important properties of a column is whether or not it can have a NULL value.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To understand how to transform data models into database designs Classification: Concept 20) A foreign key is a key that does not belong in any table.

Answer: FALSE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To understand how to transform data models into database designs Classification: Concept 21) In a relational database design, all relationships are expressed by creating a foreign key.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To understand how to transform data models into database designs Classification: Concept 22) When the key of one table is placed into a second table to represent a relationship, the key is called a relational key in the second table.

Answer: FALSE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To understand how to transform data models into database designs Classification: Concept 23) To represent a 1:1 binary relationship in a relational database design, the key of one table is placed into the second table.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To be able to represent ID-dependent, 1:1, 1:N, and N:M relationships as tables Classification: Concept

4 ..

24) When placing a foreign key for a 1:1 relationship, the key of either table can be used as the foreign key in the other table.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To be able to represent ID-dependent, 1:1, 1:N, and N:M relationships as tables Classification: Concept 25) In a 1:1 relationship, the foreign key is defined as an alternate key to make the DBMS enforce uniqueness.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To be able to represent ID-dependent, 1:1, 1:N, and N:M relationships as tables Classification: Concept 26) In a 1:N relationship, the term parent refers to the table on the "many" side of the relationship.

Answer: FALSE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To be able to represent ID-dependent, 1:1, 1:N, and N:M relationships as tables Classification: Concept 27) In 1:N relationships, the table on the "one" side is called the parent.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To be able to represent ID-dependent, 1:1, 1:N, and N:M relationships as tables Classification: Concept 28) In representing a 1:N relationship in a relational database design, the key of the table representing the parent entity is placed as a foreign key in the table representing the child entity.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To be able to represent ID-dependent, 1:1, 1:N, and N:M relationships as tables Classification: Concept 29) In representing a 1:N relationship in a relational database design, the key of the table representing the entity on the "many" side is placed as a foreign key in the table representing the entity on the "one" side of the relationship.

Answer: FALSE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Difficult LO: To be able to represent ID-dependent, 1:1, 1:N, and N:M relationships as tables Classification: Concept 5 ..

30) To represent a 1:N relationship in a relational database design, an intersection table is created.

Answer: FALSE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To be able to represent ID-dependent, 1:1, 1:N, and N:M relationships as tables Classification: Concept 31) In 1:N relationships, the table on the "many" side is called the child.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To be able to represent ID-dependent, 1:1, 1:N, and N:M relationships as tables Classification: Concept 32) To represent a one-to-many relationship in a relational database design, the key of the child table is placed as a foreign key into the other table.

Answer: FALSE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To be able to represent ID-dependent, 1:1, 1:N, and N:M relationships as tables Classification: Concept 33) To represent an N:M relationship in a relational database design, a table is created to represent the relationship itself.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To be able to represent ID-dependent, 1:1, 1:N, and N:M relationships as tables Classification: Concept 34) To represent an N:M relationship in a relational database design, an intersection table is created.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To be able to represent ID-dependent, 1:1, 1:N, and N:M relationships as tables Classification: Concept 35) To represent an N:M relationship in a relational database design, in essence it is reduced to two 1:N relationships.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To be able to represent ID-dependent, 1:1, 1:N, and N:M relationships as tables Classification: Concept 6 ..

36) A key of an intersection table is always the combination of the keys of both parents.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To be able to represent ID-dependent, 1:1, 1:N, and N:M relationships as tables Classification: Concept 37) In many-to-many relationships in a relational database design, the primary keys of both tables are joined into a composite primary key in the intersection table.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To be able to represent ID-dependent, 1:1, 1:N, and N:M relationships as tables Classification: Concept 38) An intersection table is always ID-dependent on both of its parent tables.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To be able to represent ID-dependent, 1:1, 1:N, and N:M relationships as tables Classification: Concept 39) An intersection table can have additional attributes besides the keys of its parent tables.

Answer: FALSE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To be able to represent ID-dependent, 1:1, 1:N, and N:M relationships as tables Classification: Concept 40) Like all ID-dependent relationships, the parents of an association table are required.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To be able to represent ID-dependent, 1:1, 1:N, and N:M relationships as tables Classification: Concept 41) Association tables sometimes connect more than two entities.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To be able to represent ID-dependent, 1:1, 1:N, and N:M relationships as tables Classification: Concept

7 ..

42) An ID-dependent table can be used to represent multivalued attributes.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To be able to represent ID-dependent, 1:1, 1:N, and N:M relationships as tables Classification: Concept 43) All identifying relationships are 1:N. Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Difficult LO: To be able to represent ID-dependent, 1:1, 1:N, and N:M relationships as tables Classification: Concept 44) When creating a table for an ID-dependent entity, both the key of the parent and the key of the entity itself must appear in the table.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To be able to represent ID-dependent, 1:1, 1:N, and N:M relationships as tables Classification: Concept 45) The design transformation for all IS-A relationships can be summarized by the phrase "place the key of the parent table in the child table."

Answer: FALSE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Difficult LO: To be able to represent supertype/subtypes as tables Classification: Concept 46) When transforming an ID-dependent E-R data model relationship into a relational database design where the child entity is designed to use a surrogate key, the relationship changes to a weak but not ID-dependent relationship.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To be able to represent weak entities as tables Classification: Concept 47) When transforming supertype/subtype entities into a relational database design, an entity is created for the supertype only.

Answer: FALSE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To be able to represent supertype/subtypes as tables Classification: Concept 8 ..

48) When transforming supertype/subtype entities into a relational database design, the key of the supertype table is placed into the subtype table typically as the key.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Difficult LO: To be able to represent supertype/subtypes as tables Classification: Concept 49) To represent an IS-A relationship in a relational database design, the IS-A relationship must be converted into a HAS-A relationship.

Answer: FALSE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Difficult LO: To be able to represent supertype/subtypes as tables Classification: Application 50) Discriminator attributes can be represented in relational designs.

Answer: FALSE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To be able to represent supertype/subtypes as tables Classification: Concept 51) When transforming supertype/subtype entities into a relational database design, all of the attributes for the supertype table are placed into the subtype relations.

Answer: FALSE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To be able to represent supertype/subtypes as tables Classification: Concept 52) When transforming an extended E-R model into a relational database design, recursive relationships are treated fundamentally the same as other HAS-A relationships.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To be able to represent recursive relationships as tables Classification: Concept 53) Recursive M:N relationships are represented with an intersection table that shows pairs of related rows from a single table.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To be able to represent recursive relationships as tables Classification: Concept 9 ..

54) Referential integrity constraints should disallow adding a new row to a child table when the foreign key does not match a primary key value in the parent table.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To understand the use of referential integrity constraints Classification: Concept 55) A referential integrity constraint policy that insures that foreign key values in a table are correctly maintained when there is a change to the primary key value in the parent table is called cascading insertions.

Answer: FALSE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To understand the use of referential integrity constraints Classification: Concept 56) A referential integrity constraint policy that insures that all rows containing a particular foreign key value in a table are eliminated from the table when the row containing the corresponding primary key value in a parent table is eliminated from the database is called cascading deletes.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To understand the use of referential integrity constraints Classification: Concept 57) When the parent entity is required (M) in a relationship, every row of the child table must have a valid, non-null value of the foreign key.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To be able to implement referential integrity actions required by minimum cardinalities Classification: Concept 58) Cascading deletions are generally not used with relationships between strong entities.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To be able to implement referential integrity actions required by minimum cardinalities Classification: Concept

10 ..

59) Cascading deletions are generally not used with relationships for weak child entities.

Answer: FALSE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To be able to implement referential integrity actions required by minimum cardinalities Classification: Concept 60) If the parent is required, then a new child row must be created with a valid foreign key value.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To be able to implement referential integrity actions required by minimum cardinalities Classification: Concept 61) When the parent entity has a surrogate key, the enforcement actions are the same for both parent and child.

Answer: FALSE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Difficult LO: To be able to implement referential integrity actions required by minimum cardinalities Classification: Concept 62) When the child entity is required (M) in a relationship, there needs to be at least one child row for each parent row at all times.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To be able to implement referential integrity actions required by minimum cardinalities Classification: Concept 63) It is easy to enforce the referential integrity actions for M-M relationships.

Answer: FALSE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To be able to implement referential integrity actions required by minimum cardinalities Classification: Concept 64) Which of the following is not a step in the database design process?

A) Create tables and columns from entities and attributes B) Select primary keys C) Represent relationships D) Create constraints and triggers Answer: D AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To understand how to transform data models into database designs Classification: Concept 11 ..

65) The first step in transforming an extended E-R model into a relational database design is to ________.

A) create a table for each relationship B) evaluate the entities against the normalization criteria C) create a table for each entity D) remove any recursive relationships Answer: C AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To understand how to transform data models into database designs Classification: Concept 66) Each attribute of an entity becomes a(n) ________ of a table.

A) column B) primary key C) foreign key D) alternate key Answer: A AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To understand how to transform data models into database designs Classification: Concept 67) The identifier of the entity becomes the ________ of the corresponding table.

A) primary key B) foreign key C) supertype D) subtype Answer: A AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To be able to identify primary keys and understand when to use a surrogate key Classification: Concept 68) Which of the following is not true for an ideal primary key?

A) a composite of several long attributes B) numeric C) fixed D) short Answer: A AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To be able to identify primary keys and understand when to use a surrogate key Classification: Concept

12 ..

69) A surrogate key should be considered when ________.

A) A relationship is N:M B) A composite key is required C) The key contains a lengthy text field D) The key contains a number Answer: C AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To be able to identify primary keys and understand when to use a surrogate key Classification: Concept 70) Which of the following is not true about surrogate keys?

A) They are identifiers that are supplied by the system, not the users.

B) They have no meaning to the users.

C) They are non-unique within a table.

D) They can be problematic when combining databases.

Answer: C AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To be able to identify primary keys and understand when to use a surrogate key Classification: Concept 71) Which of the following is not true about a NULL attribute?

A) On insertion, entering the data for that field is optional.

B) It is an important property of an attribute.

C) It must have a default value specified.

D) A primary key can't be NULL. Answer: C AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To understand how to transform data models into database designs Classification: Concept 72) In a relational database design, all relationships are expressed by ________.

A) creating a primary key B) creating a foreign key C) creating a supertype D) creating a subtype Answer: B AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To understand how to transform data models into database designs Classification: Concept

13 ..

73) When representing a 1:1 relationship in a relational database design, ________.

A) the key of each table must be placed as foreign keys into the other B) the key of either table may be placed as a foreign key into the other C) the key of both tables must be the same D) the intersection table gets the key from both relations Answer: B AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To understand how to transform data models into database designs Classification: Concept 74) To represent a one-to-many relationship in a relational database design, ________.

A) the key of the child is placed as a foreign key into the parent B) the key of the parent is placed as a foreign key into the child C) an intersection table must be created D) the key of the table on the "many" side is placed in the table on the "one" side Answer: B AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To be able to represent ID-dependent, 1:1, 1:N, and N:M relationships as tables Classification: Concept 75) When representing a one-to-many relationship in a relational database design, ________.

A) the parent is always on the one side of the "one-to-many" relationship B) the child is always on the one side of the "one-to-many" relationship C) either parent or child can be on the one side of the "one-to-many" relationship, and the choice is arbitrary D) either parent or child can be on the one side of the "one-to-many" relationship, and special criteria indicate which table should be on the one side Answer: A AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To be able to represent ID-dependent, 1:1, 1:N, and N:M relationships as tables Classification: Concept 76) Many-to-many relationships are represented by ________.

A) two tables with an M:N relationship B) two tables with a 1:N relationship C) an intersection table which has M:N relationships with the two tables D) an intersection table which has 1:N relationships with the two tables Answer: D AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To be able to represent ID-dependent, 1:1, 1:N, and N:M relationships as tables Classification: Concept

14 ..

77) In many-to-many relationships in a relational database design, ________.

A) the key of the child is placed as a foreign key into the parent B) the key of the parent is placed as a foreign key into the child C) the keys of both tables are placed in a third table D) the keys of both entity tables are placed in each other Answer: C AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To be able to represent ID-dependent, 1:1, 1:N, and N:M relationships as tables Classification: Concept 78) In many-to-many relationships between strong entities in a relational database design, which of the following is not true?

A) The intersection table is ID-dependent on one of the parents B) The intersection table is ID-dependent on both of the parents C) The relationships from the intersection table to the parent tables are identifying relationships D) The maximum cardinality to the intersection table is always N Answer: A AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Difficult LO: To be able to represent ID-dependent, 1:1, 1:N, and N:M relationships as tables Classification: Concept 79) In relational database design, ID-dependent entities are not used to ________.

A) represent N:M relationships B) handle associative relationships C) represent relationships where the child identifier does not include the key of the parent D) handle archetype/instance relationships Answer: C AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Difficult LO: To be able to represent ID-dependent, 1:1, 1:N, and N:M relationships as tables Classification: Concept 80) When transforming an E-R data model into a relational database design, the key of the parent entity should be placed as part of the primary key into the child entity ________.

A) when the child entity is ID-dependent B) when the child entity is non-ID-dependent C) when the child entity has a 1:1 relationship with the parent entity D) when the child entity has a 1:N relationship with the parent entity Answer: A AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To be able to represent ID-dependent, 1:1, 1:N, and N:M relationships as tables Classification: Concept

15 ..

81) When transforming an ID-dependent E-R data model relationship into a relational database design and the parent entity has a surrogate primary key and the child entity has a data identifier, then the primary key of the child table should be ________.

A) the parent's surrogate key + the child's data key B) the parent's surrogate key + a surrogate key in the child C) either A or B will work, but method A is preferable D) either A or B will work, but method B is preferable Answer: D AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Difficult LO: To be able to represent ID-dependent, 1:1, 1:N, and N:M relationships as tables Classification: Concept 82) Which of the following is not true about N:M recursive relationships?

A) Both foreign keys in the intersection table refer to the same table.

B) Since it is a recursive relationship, an intersection table is not needed.

C) The foreign keys in the intersection table can't refer to the same attribute in the parent table.

D) Both B and C are correct.

Answer: D AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To be able to represent recursive relationships as tables Classification: Concept 83) Which of the following is not true about representing subtypes in a relational database design?

A) One table is created for the supertype and one for each subtype.

B) All of the attributes of the supertype are added to the subtype relations.

C) The key of the supertype is made the key of the subtypes.

D) An instance of the supertype may be related to one instance each of several subtypes.

Answer: B AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To be able to represent supertype/subtypes as tables Classification: Concept 84) In a supertype-subtype structure, discriminator attributes ________.

A) are easily represented in a relational design B) cannot be represented in a relational design C) require application logic to determine which subtypes correspond to a specific supertype instance D) Both B and C are correct Answer: D AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Difficult LO: To be able to represent supertype/subtypes as tables Classification: Concept 16 ..

85) Which of the following is not true of recursive relationships?

A) When the recursive relationship is M:N, an intersection table is created.

B) The rows of a single table can play two different roles.

C) Recursive relationships can be 1:1, 1:N, or M:N relationships.

D) When the relationship is 1:N, a new table must be defined to represent the relationship.

Answer: D AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To be able to represent supertype/subtypes as tables Classification: Concept 86) Which of the following is not true of MUST constraint?

A) It may be needed in ternary relationships to enforce special business rules.

B) It can be expressed directly in a relational model.

C) It must be enforced by program code.

D) It requires that one entity be combined with another entity.

Answer: B AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Difficult LO: To be able to represent ternary relationships as tables Classification: Concept 87) The binary constraint MUST NOT indicates that ________.

A) a specific binary relationship must not be included in a ternary relationship B) a table includes values that must not occur in a binary relationship C) a table includes values that must not occur in a ternary relationship D) a binary relationship includes value combinations that must not occur in a ternary relationship Answer: D AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To be able to represent ternary relationships as tables Classification: Concept 88) The binary constraint MUST COVER indicates that ________.

A) a specific binary relationship must be included in a ternary relationship B) a binary relationship includes a set of value combinations that must all occur in a ternary relationship C) a table includes values that must occur in a binary relationship D) a table includes values that must occur in a ternary relationship Answer: B AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To be able to represent ternary relationships as tables Classification: Concept

17 ..

89) For the M-O (parent mandatory, child optional) case, what action(s) should be taken to ensure minimum cardinality is maintained?

A) Define referential integrity constraint from child to parent B) Make foreign key NOT NULL C) Will require trigger or other application code D) Both A and B are correct Answer: D AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To be able to implement referential integrity actions required by minimum cardinalities Classification: Concept 90) A referential integrity constraint policy that insures that foreign key values in a table are correctly maintained when there is a change to the primary key value in the parent table is called ________.

A) incremental updates B) incremental deletes C) cascading updates D) cascading deletes Answer: C AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To be able to implement referential integrity actions required by minimum cardinalities Classification: Concept 91) A referential integrity constraint policy that insures that all rows containing a particular foreign key value in a table are eliminated from the table when the row containing the corresponding primary key value in a parent table is eliminated from the database is called ________.

A) incremental updates B) incremental deletes C) cascading updates D) cascading deletes Answer: D AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To be able to implement referential integrity actions required by minimum cardinalities Classification: Concept

18 ..

92) A referential integrity constraint policy that guarantees that a row in a parent table always has a required entry in a child table ________.

A) is known as a minimum cardinality enforcement action B) needs to be documented by the database development team C) is enforced in most DBMS products D) Both A and B are correct Answer: D AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Difficult LO: To be able to implement referential integrity actions required by minimum cardinalities Classification: Concept 93) When transforming an ID-dependent E-R data model relationship into a relational database design, the referential integrity constraints should allow ________.

A) parent updates to cascade B) child updates to cascade C) child deletes to cascade D) Both A and B are correct Answer: A AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To be able to implement referential integrity actions required by minimum cardinalities Classification: Concept 94) Briefly describe the process of converting an extended E-R model into a relational database design.

Answer: To convert an extended E-R model into a relational database design, first tables and columns must be defined for each entity attribute. The attributes of the entity are represented as the columns of the table. Primary keys are then selected for each table, after which the relationships between the entities are represented through the creation of foreign keys. Next, constraints are specified. Finally the normalization is verified.

AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To understand how to transform data models into database designs Classification: Concept 95) Explain the pragmatic reason for using surrogate keys.

Answer: Primary keys are commonly included in indexes, and are used to identify records to be retrieved by users. The ideal primary key is short, numeric and fixed. When the primary key contains a lengthy text field, this creates a large amount of duplicated data that must be frequently manipulated. For these reasons, it is often practical to use a surrogate key that is generated by the system and is relatively small and easy to manipulate.

AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To be able to identify primary keys and understand when to use a surrogate key Classification: Concept 19 ..

96) How are one-to-one recursive relationships addressed using the relational model?

Answer: One-to-one recursive relationships are addressed just the same as one-to-one nonrecursive relationships. The only difference is that both of the related entity instances are in the same entity class. The key of either instance is placed in the other instance as a foreign key.

In the case of a recursive relationship, this means that a new attribute is added to the entity class with a recursive relationship. For each instance, this new attribute will contain the value of the key attribute of the instance that is related.

AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To be able to represent recursive relationships as tables Classification: Concept 97) Explain the representation of a one-to-many strong entity relationship in a relational database design.

Answer: One-to-many relationships are represented by placing the primary key of the table on the one side of the relationship into the table on the many side of the relationship as a foreign key. The term parent refers to the table on the one side of a 1:N relationship, and the term child refers to the table on the many side of the 1:N relationship. Therefore, the rule for representing a one-to-many relationship can be summarized as "Place the key of the parent table in the child table as a foreign key."

AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To be able to represent ID-dependent, 1:1, 1:N, and N:M relationships as tables Classification: Concept 98) Explain the representation of a many-to-many strong entity relationship in a relational database design.

Answer: Many-to-many relationships cannot be directly represented in a relational database design. Therefore, many-to-many relationships are essentially broken into two one-to-many relationships by creating an intersection table that represents the relationship itself. The intersection table takes its key as a combination of the keys of the two original, or parent, entities. Each of the parent entities has a one-to-many relationship with the intersection table that is represented by placing the keys of the parents into the intersection table.

AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To be able to represent ID-dependent, 1:1, 1:N, and N:M relationships as tables Classification: Concept

20 ..

99) What is an association relationship and how does it differ from an N:M relationship?

Answer: An association relationship is very similar to an N:M relationship except that the intersection table has attributes of its own. This means that in addition to the foreign key fields linking to the two strong entities, there is at least one additional field in what would otherwise be called the intersection table but is now an association table. For example, intersection table ENROLLMENT for STUDENT and CLASS showing student enrollment in each class would normally have two columns: StudentID and ClassID. However, we can turn this intersection table into an association table by adding the column Grade, which records each student's grade in each class.

AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To be able to represent ID-dependent, 1:1, 1:N, and N:M relationships as tables Classification: Application 100) What are MUST NOT and MUST COVER constraints?

Answer: Both MUST NOT and MUST COVER constraints occur when working with three tables in a ternary relationship. When a MUST NOT constraint occurs, it indicates that one binary relationship of two of the tables contains combinations of values that are not allowed to occur in the ternary relationship. When a MUST COVER constraint occurs, it indicates that one binary relationship of two of the tables contains combinations of values that must all appear in the ternary relationship.

AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Difficult LO: To be able to represent ternary relationships as tables Classification: Concept 101) Write the database table design to represent the data model below, including tables, the proper placement of the foreign key, and referential integrity constraint.

Answer: STUDENT (StudentID, StuName, StuMajor, StuPhone, AdvisorID) ADVISOR (AdvisorID, AdvName, AdvOffice, AdvPhone) AdvisorID in STUDENT must exist in AdvisorID in ADVISOR. AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To be able to represent ID-dependent, 1:1, 1:N, and N:M relationships as tables Classification: Concept

21 ..

102) What are the four sets of minimum cardinalities that can be present in a 1:N binary relationship?

Answer: If we use the labels "Parent" and "Child" to represent, respectively, the one and many side of a 1:N relationship, we can then consider whether the parent and child must participate in the relationship. If one must participate, it is mandatory (M). If one does not have to participate it is optional (O). The four possible sets of minimum cardinalities are therefore: Parent optional and Child optional (O-O) Parent mandatory and Child optional (M-O) Parent optional and Child mandatory (O-M) Parent mandatory and Child mandatory (M-M) AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To be able to implement referential integrity actions required by minimum cardinalities Classification: Concept 103) Using the VRG database as an example, briefly describe what a final database design consists of.

Answer: The obvious part of the database design is the ER drawing itself, for example as shown for VRG in Figure 6-39. However, this needs to be accompanied by a summary of the database design relationships as shown in Figure 6-40. This document summarizes the cardinalities of relationships. For each relationship, we need a set of actions to enforce the minimum cardinalities. These can be based on Figures 6-28(a) and 6-28(b), the examples for VRG are shown in Figures 6-41 and 6-42. Finally, we need a set of column characteristics for each table, as shown in Figure 6-43 for VRG. AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Difficult LO: To understand how to transform data models into database designs Classification: Application

22 ..

Database Processing, 14e (Kroenke) Chapter 7: SQL for Database Construction and Application Processing 1) The SQL CREATE TABLE statement is used to name a new table and describe the table's columns.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To create and manage table structures using SQL statements Classification: Concept 2) The SQL keyword CONSTRAINT is used to define one of several types of constraints.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To create and execute SQL constraints Classification: Concept 3) The SQL keyword PRIMARY KEY is used to designate the column(s) that are the primary key for the table.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To create and execute SQL constraints Classification: Concept 4) The SQL keyword CONSTRAINT is used to limit column values to specific values.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To create and execute SQL constraints Classification: Concept 5) The SQL keyword CONSTRAINT can be used in conjunction with the SQL keywords PRIMARY KEY and FOREIGN KEY. Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To create and execute SQL constraints Classification: Concept

1 ..

6) One advantage of using the CONSTRAINT command to define a primary key is that the database designer controls the name of the constraint.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Difficult LO: To create and execute SQL constraints Classification: Concept 7) The SQL keyword UNIQUE is used to define alternate keys.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To create and execute SQL constraints Classification: Concept 8) If the table PRODUCT has a column PRICE, and PRICE has the data type Numeric (8,2), the value 98765 stored in that field will be displayed by the DBMS as 98765.00.

Answer: FALSE AACSB: Information Technology; Application of Knowledge Difficulty: Difficult LO: To create and manage table structures using SQL statements Classification: Application 9) If the table ITEM has a column WEIGHT, and WEIGHT has the data type Numeric (4,2), the value 4321 will be displayed by the DBMS as 43.21.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology; Application of Knowledge Difficulty: Moderate LO: To create and manage table structures using SQL statements Classification: Application 10) The SQL keyword CHECK is used to limit column values to specific values.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To create and execute SQL constraints Classification: Concept 11) The SQL keyword MODIFY is used to change the structure, properties or constraints of a table.

Answer: FALSE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To create and manage table structures using SQL statements Classification: Concept

2 ..

12) Data values to be added to a table are specified by using the SQL VALUES clause.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To create and manage table structures using SQL statements Classification: Concept 13) The SQL keyword DELETE is used to delete a table's structure.

Answer: FALSE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To create and manage table structures using SQL statements Classification: Concept 14) When the correct SQL command is used to delete a table's structure, the command can only be used with a table that has already had its data removed.

Answer: FALSE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Difficult LO: To create and manage table structures using SQL statements Classification: Concept 15) One or more rows can be added to a table by using the SQL INSERT statement.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To create and manage table structures using SQL statements Classification: Concept 16) Unless it is being used to copy data from one table to another, the SQL INSERT statement can be used to insert only a single row into a table.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Difficult LO: To create and manage table structures using SQL statements Classification: Concept 17) Rows in a table can be changed by using the SQL UPDATE statement.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To create and manage table structures using SQL statements Classification: Concept

3 ..

18) The SQL SET keyword is used to specify a new value when changing a column value.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Difficult LO: To create and manage table structures using SQL statements Classification: Concept 19) The SQL keyword MODIFY is used to change a column value.

Answer: FALSE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To create and manage table structures using SQL statements Classification: Concept 20) Rows can be removed from a table by using the SQL DELETE statement.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To create and manage table structures using SQL statements Classification: Concept 21) An SQL virtual table is called a view.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To understand several uses for SQL views Classification: Concept 22) The SQL command CREATE USER VIEW is used to create a virtual table.

Answer: FALSE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To use SQL statements to create, use, and manage views Classification: Concept 23) SQL views are constructed from SELECT statements.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To use SQL statements to create, use, and manage views Classification: Concept

4 ..

24) According to the SQL-92 standard, statements used to construct views cannot contain the WHERE clause.

Answer: FALSE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To use SQL statements to create, use, and manage views Classification: Concept 25) The SQL command SELECT is used to retrieve view instances.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To use SQL statements to create, use, and manage views Classification: Concept 26) The values in an SQL view are not always changeable through the view itself.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To understand several uses for SQL views Classification: Concept 27) SQL views can be used to hide columns.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To understand several uses for SQL views Classification: Concept 28) SQL views can be used to provide a level of insulation between data processed by applications and the data actually stored in the database tables.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To understand several uses for SQL views Classification: Concept 29) If the values in an SQL view are changeable through the view itself, the SQL command UPDATE is used to change the values.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To use SQL statements to create, use, and manage views Classification: Concept

5 ..

30) The values in an SQL view are always changeable through the view itself.

Answer: FALSE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To understand several uses for SQL views Classification: Concept 31) SQL views are updatable when the view is based on a single table with no computed columns, and all non-null columns are present in the view.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Difficult LO: To understand several uses for SQL views Classification: Concept 32) Because SQL statements are table-oriented, whereas programs are variable-oriented, the results of SQL statements used in programs are treated as pseudofiles.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To understand how SQL is used in application programming Classification: Concept 33) A set of SQL statements stored in an application written in a standard programming language is called embedded SQL. Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To understand how SQL is used in application programming Classification: Concept 34) Because SQL statements are table-oriented, whereas programs are variable-oriented, the results of SQL statements used in programs are accessed using an SQL cursor.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To understand how SQL is used in application programming Classification: Concept 35) A stored program that is attached to a table or view is called a stored procedure.

Answer: FALSE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To understand how to create and use stored procedures Classification: Concept

6 ..

36) SQL triggers use the ANSI SQL keywords BEFORE, INSTEAD OF, and AFTER. Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To understand how to create and use triggers Classification: Concept 37) SQL triggers can be used with SQL operations INSERT, UPDATE, and DELETE. Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To understand how to create and use triggers Classification: Concept 38) SQL triggers can be used when the DBMS receives an INSERT request.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To understand how to create and use triggers Classification: Concept 39) SQL triggers are used for providing default values, validity checking, updating views, and performing referential integrity actions.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To understand how SQL is used in application programming Classification: Concept 40) The Oracle DBMS supports the SQL BEFORE trigger.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To understand how to create and use triggers Classification: Concept 41) The SQL Server DBMS supports the SQL BEFORE trigger.

Answer: FALSE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To understand how to create and use triggers Classification: Concept

7 ..

42) SQL triggers can be used when the DBMS receives an update request.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To understand how to create and use triggers Classification: Concept 43) To set a column value to an initial value that is selected according to some complicated business logic, you would use the SQL DEFAULT constraint with the CREATE TABLE command.

Answer: FALSE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Difficult LO: To create and execute SQL constraints Classification: Concept 44) SQL triggers are created using the SQL ADD TRIGGER statement.

Answer: FALSE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Difficult LO: To understand how to create and use triggers Classification: Concept 45) If the values in an SQL view are not changeable through the view itself, you may still be able to update the view by using unique application logic. In this case, the specific logic is placed in an INSTEAD OF trigger.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Difficult LO: To understand how to create and use triggers Classification: Concept 46) If a trigger is being written to enforce referential integrity actions, you cannot use an INSTEAD OF trigger.

Answer: FALSE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Difficult LO: To understand how to create and use triggers Classification: Concept 47) When a trigger is fired, the DBMS makes the appropriate data available to the trigger code.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To understand how to create and use triggers Classification: Concept 8 ..

48) A stored program that is stored within the database and compiled when used is called a trigger.

Answer: FALSE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To understand SQL/Persistent Stored Modules (SQL/PSM) Classification: Concept 49) Stored procedures have the advantage of greater security, decreased network traffic, SQL optimized by the DBMS compiler, and code sharing.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To understand SQL/Persistent Stored Modules (SQL/PSM) Classification: Concept 50) Unlike application code, stored procedures are never distributed to the client computers.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To understand how SQL is used in application programming Classification: Concept 51) Because SQL stored procedures allow and encourage code sharing among developers, stored procedures give database application developers the advantages of less work, standardized processing, and specialization among developers.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To understand how SQL is used in application programming Classification: Concept 52) Which SQL keyword is used to name a new table and describe the table's columns?

A) SET B) CREATE C) SELECT D) ALTER Answer: B AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To create and manage table structures using SQL statements Classification: Concept

9 ..

53) If the table PRODUCT has a column PRICE that has the data type Numeric (8,2), the value 12345 will be displayed by the DBMS as ________.

A) 123.45 B) 12345 C) 12345.00 D) 123450.00 Answer: A AACSB: Information Technology; Application of Knowledge Difficulty: Moderate LO: To create and manage table structures using SQL statements Classification: Application 54) Which SQL keyword is used to impose restrictions on a table, data or relationship?

A) SET B) CREATE C) SELECT D) CONSTRAINT Answer: D AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To create and execute SQL constraints Classification: Concept 55) One advantage of using the CONSTRAINT phrase to define a primary key is that the database designer controls the ________.

A) name of the table B) name of the foreign key field C) name of the constraint D) name of the primary key field Answer: C AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Difficult LO: To create and execute SQL constraints Classification: Concept

10 ..

56) Which of the following illustrates the authors' preferred style of defining a primary key?

A) CREATE TABLE CUSTOMER ( CustomerID Integer Primary Key LastName Char(35) Not Null First Name Char(25) Null ); B) CREATE TABLE CUSTOMER ( CustomerID Integer Not Null LastName Char(35) Not Null First Name Char(25) Null CONSTRAINT CustomerPK PRIMARY KEY (CustomerID) ); C) CREATE TABLE CUSTOMER ( CustomerID Integer Not Null LastName Char(35) Not Null First Name Char(25) Null ); ALTER TABLE CUSTOMER ADD CONSTRAINT CustomerPK PRIMARY KEY (CustomerID); D) Both B and C are correct Answer: B AACSB: Information Technology; Application of Knowledge Difficulty: Difficult LO: To create and execute SQL constraints Classification: Application 57) Given the SQL statement CREATE TABLE SALESREP ( SalesRepNo int NOT NULL, RepName char(35) NOT NULL, HireDate date NOT NULL, CONSTRAINT SalesRepPK PRIMARY KEY (SalesRepNo), CONSTRAINT SalesRepAK1 UNIQUE (RepName) ); we know that ________.

A) RepName is the primary key B) RepName is a foreign key C) RepName is a candidate key D) RepName is a surrogate key Answer: C AACSB: Information Technology; Application of Knowledge Difficulty: Difficult LO: To create and execute SQL constraints Classification: Application 11 ..

58) The SQL keyword used to limit column values to specific values is ________.

A) CONSTRAINT B) CHECK C) NOT NULL D) UNIQUE Answer: B AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To create and execute SQL constraints Classification: Concept 59) Which SQL keyword is used to change the structure, properties or constraints of a table?

A) SET B) CREATE C) SELECT D) ALTER Answer: D AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To create and manage table structures using SQL statements Classification: Concept 60) Which SQL keyword is used to delete a table's structure?

A) DELETE B) DROP C) DISPOSE D) ALTER Answer: B AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To create and manage table structures using SQL statements Classification: Concept 61) When the correct SQL command is used to delete a table's structure, what happens to the data in the table?

A) If the deleted table was a parent table, the data is added to the appropriate rows of the child table.

B) If the deleted table was a child table, the data is added to the appropriate rows of the parent table.

C) The data in the table is also deleted.

D) Nothing because there was no data in the table since only an empty table can be deleted.

Answer: C AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To create and manage table structures using SQL statements Classification: Concept 12 ..

62) Which SQL keyword is used to add one or more rows of data to a table?

A) DELETE B) INSERT C) SELECT D) UPDATE Answer: B AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To create and manage table structures using SQL statements Classification: Concept 63) Which SQL keyword is used to change one or more rows in a table?

A) MODIFY B) INSERT C) SELECT D) UPDATE Answer: D AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To create and manage table structures using SQL statements Classification: Concept 64) Which SQL keyword is used to change the values of an entire column?

A) CHANGE B) INSERT C) SELECT D) SET Answer: D AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Difficult LO: To create and manage table structures using SQL statements Classification: Concept 65) Which keyword is used to remove one or more rows from a table?

A) DELETE B) INSERT C) ERASE D) SET Answer: A AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To create and manage table structures using SQL statements Classification: Concept

13 ..

66) Based on the tables below, which of the following SQL statements would increase the balance of the Gonzales account by $100 to a total of $450?

GENERAL SALES DATABASE: SALESREP SalesRepNo 654 734 345 434 CUSTOMER CustNo 9870 8590 7840 4870

RepName Jones Smith Chen Johnson

CustName Winston Gonzales Harris Miles

HireDate 01/02/2005 02/03/2007 01/25/2004 11/23/2004

Balance 500 350 800 100

SalesRepNo 345 434 654 345

A) SELECT Gonzales FROM CUSTOMER INSERT VALUES PLUS (100) INTO Balance; B) SELECT Gonzales FROM CUSTOMER INSERT VALUES (450) INTO Balance; C) INSERT INTO CUSTOMER VALUES (450) SELECT Balance WHERE CustName = 'Gonzales'; D) UPDATE CUSTOMER SET Balance = 450 WHERE CustName = 'Gonzales'; Answer: D AACSB: Information Technology; Application of Knowledge Difficulty: Difficult LO: To create and manage table structures using SQL statements Classification: Application

14 ..

67) An SQL virtual table is called ________.

A) a CHECK constraint B) a view C) embedded SQL D) a trigger Answer: B AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To understand several uses for SQL views Classification: Concept 68) The SQL command used to create a virtual table is ________.

A) CREATE VTABLE B) CREATE VIEW C) VTABLE D) VIEW Answer: B AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To use SQL statements to create, use, and manage views Classification: Concept 69) SQL views are constructed from ________.

A) CREATE statements B) INSERT statements C) UPDATE statements D) SELECT statements Answer: D AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To use SQL statements to create, use, and manage views Classification: Concept 70) According to the SQL-92 standard, statements used to construct views cannot contain ________.

A) the SELECT clause B) the FROM clause C) the WHERE clause D) the ORDER BY clause Answer: D AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To use SQL statements to create, use, and manage views Classification: Concept

15 ..

71) Which SQL statement is used to retrieve view instances?

A) CREATE B) DELETE C) INSERT D) SELECT Answer: D AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To use SQL statements to create, use, and manage views Classification: Concept 72) SQL views are not used ________.

A) to hide columns B) to show results of computed columns C) to hide complicated SQL statements D) to enforce primary key constraints Answer: D AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To understand several uses for SQL views Classification: Concept 73) If the values in an SQL view are changeable through the view itself, which SQL statement is used to change the values?

A) CREATE B) DELETE C) INSERT D) UPDATE Answer: D AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To use SQL statements to create, use, and manage views Classification: Concept 74) SQL views are always updatable when ________.

A) the view is based on a single table with no computed columns, and all non-null columns are present in the view B) the view is based on any number of tables, with or without computed columns, and the INSTEAD OF trigger is defined for the view C) the view is based on multiple tables, the update is being done on the most subordinate table, and the rows of that table can be uniquely identified D) Both A and B are correct Answer: D AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To understand several uses for SQL views Classification: Concept 16 ..

75) A set of SQL statements stored in an application written in a standard programming language is called ________.

A) a stored procedure B) a view C) embedded SQL D) a trigger Answer: C AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To understand how SQL is used in application programming Classification: Concept 76) Because SQL statements are set-oriented, whereas programs are element-oriented, the results of SQL statements used in programs are treated as ________.

A) tables B) rows C) files D) pseudofiles Answer: D AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To understand how SQL is used in application programming Classification: Concept 77) Because SQL statements are table-oriented, whereas programs are element-oriented, the results of SQL statements used in programs are accessed using ________.

A) standard programming tools B) custom written programming tools C) an SQL cursor D) an SQL trigger Answer: C AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To understand SQL/Persistent Stored Modules (SQL/PSM) Classification: Concept 78) A stored program that is attached to a table or view is called ________.

A) a CHECK constraint B) a view C) embedded SQL D) a trigger Answer: D AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To understand how to create and use triggers Classification: Concept 17 ..

79) Which of the following is not an ANSI SQL trigger?

A) BEFORE UPDATE B) INSTEAD OF UPDATE C) AFTER INSERT D) INSTEAD OF CONSTRAINT Answer: D AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To understand how to create and use triggers Classification: Concept 80) Which of the following is not an SQL trigger Oracle supports?

A) BEFORE B) INSTEAD OF C) AFTER D) DURING Answer: D AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To understand how to create and use triggers Classification: Concept 81) Which of the following is an SQL trigger Microsoft SQL Server supports?

A) BEFORE B) INSTEAD OF C) AFTER D) Both B and C are correct Answer: D AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To understand how to create and use triggers Classification: Concept 82) SQL triggers can be used when the DBMS receives a(n) ________ request.

A) INSERT B) SELECT C) ALTER D) CREATE Answer: A AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To understand how to create and use triggers Classification: Concept

18 ..

83) SQL triggers are not used for ________.

A) validity checking B) providing default values C) updating views D) creating tables Answer: D AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To understand SQL/Persistent Stored Modules (SQL/PSM) Classification: Concept 84) When a trigger is fired, the DBMS makes the appropriate data available to ________.

A) the SQL interpreter B) the application code C) the embedded SQL code D) the trigger code Answer: D AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To understand how to create and use triggers Classification: Concept 85) SQL triggers are created using ________.

A) the SQL CREATE TRIGGER statement B) the SQL ADD TRIGGER statement C) the SQL TRIGGER statement D) the SQL ADD CONSTRAINT TRIGGER statement Answer: A AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To understand how to create and use triggers Classification: Concept 86) To set a column value to an initial value that is selected according to some business logic, you would use ________.

A) the SQL DEFAULT constraint with the CREATE TABLE command B) an SQL view C) embedded SQL D) an SQL trigger Answer: D AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To understand how to create and use triggers Classification: Concept

19 ..

87) If the values in an SQL view are not changeable through the view itself, you may still be able to update the view by using unique application logic. In this case, the specific logic is placed in ________.

A) a BEFORE trigger B) an INSTEAD OF trigger C) an AFTER trigger D) Depending on the specific logic, either A or B can be used.

Answer: B AACSB: Information Technology; Analytical Thinking Difficulty: Difficult LO: To understand how SQL is used in application programming Classification: Concept 88) A stored program that is attached to the database is called ________.

A) a view B) embedded SQL C) a trigger D) a stored procedure Answer: D AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To understand SQL/Persistent Stored Modules (SQL/PSM) Classification: Concept 89) Stored procedures have all these advantages except ________.

A) greater security B) faster development C) SQL optimized by the DBMS compiler D) code sharing Answer: B AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To understand how to create and use stored procedures Classification: Concept 90) Because SQL stored procedures allow and encourage code sharing among developers, stored procedures give database application developers all these advantages except ________.

A) less work B) standardized processing C) specialization among developers D) faster query response times Answer: D AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To understand how to create and use stored procedures Classification: Concept 20 ..

91) Referential integrity constraints are implemented in SQL using the ________ syntax.

A) PRIMARY KEY B) FOREIGN KEY C) DEFAULT D) UNIQUE Answer: B AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To understand how referential integrity actions are implemented in SQL statements Classification: Concept 92) If you have a foreign key in a CUSTOMER table that references the primary key in a SALESREP table, the ON DELETE CASCADE syntax means that ________.

A) when a CUSTOMER is deleted, that CUSTOMER's SALESREP is also deleted B) when a CUSTOMER is deleted, all SALESREPS are also deleted C) when a SALESREP is deleted, all CUSTOMERs of that SALESREP are also deleted D) when the SALESREP table is dropped, all CUSTOMERs must be deleted Answer: C AACSB: Information Technology; Application of Knowledge Difficulty: Moderate LO: To understand how referential integrity actions are implemented in SQL statements Classification: Application 93) Which of the following does not describe a user-defined function?

A) It computes a numeric value B) It can be called by name from within an SQL statement C) It may have input parameters passed to it D) It returns an output value to the calling statement Answer: A AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To understand how to create and use functions Classification: Concept

21 ..

94) Based on the table below, a function to compute a 10% late penalty on a customer's balance would have how many input parameters?

CUSTOMER CustNo 9870 8590 7840 4870

CustName Winston Gonzales Harris Miles

Balance 500 350 800 100

SalesRepNo 345 434 654 345

A) 0 B) 1 C) 2 D) it doesn't matter Answer: B AACSB: Information Technology; Application of Knowledge Difficulty: Moderate LO: To understand how to create and use functions Classification: Application 95) Explain the essential format of the CREATE TABLE statement. Include an example.

Answer: The essential format for the CREATE TABLE statement is: CREATE TABLE tablename ( column-description, column-description, column-description, ... optional table constraints ); "Tablename" is the name that will be given to the newly created table. "Column-description" is a three-part description of each column to appear in the table. This description includes the name of the column, the column's data type, and an optional column constraint (either Primary Key, Null, or Not Null), in that order. The CONSTRAINT phrase can be used to set optional primary key, foreign key and referential integrity constraints for the table. All SQL statements must end with a semi-colon (;). Here is an example: CREATE TABLE VEHICLE ( VIN CHAR(32), Year INTEGER, Make CHAR(25) NOT NULL, CONSTRAINT VEHICLE_PK PRIMARY KEY (VIN) ); AACSB: Information Technology; Application of Knowledge Difficulty: Moderate LO: To create and manage table structures using SQL statements Classification: Application

22 ..

96) Explain how relationships are created using SQL. Include an example.

Answer: In SQL, relationships are created using a FOREIGN KEY constraint. This has the format: CONSTRAINT ConstraintNameFK FOREIGN KEY({ForeignKeyColumnInCurrentTable} REFERENCES {ReferencedTableName}(PrimaryKeyColumnInReferencedTable}) The constraint thus names the foreign key column in the current table and its corresponding primary key in a referenced table. As an example, consider an advising relationship from STUDENT to FACULTY. The following constraint might appear in the SQL statement creating the STUDENT table: CONSTRAINT AdvisorFK FOREIGN KEY (AdvisorID) REFERENCES FACULTY (FacultyID) AACSB: Information Technology; Application of Knowledge Difficulty: Moderate LO: To understand how referential integrity actions are implemented in SQL statements Classification: Application 97) Discuss SQL data types.

Answer: Common examples of standard SQL data types are Char, VarChar, Integer, and Numeric. The Char data type is for fixed-length character data. VarChar is for variable-length character data. Integer is for numeric data that are whole numbers only. Numeric is for numeric data that may include decimals. Char, VarChar, and Numeric must be qualified by a length specification to indicate the amount of storage space to be allocated for each data item. For example, Char(10) indicates fixed-length character data that is always stored as 10 characters.

AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To create and manage table structures using SQL statements Classification: Concept 98) Discuss what is meant by a data type of "Numeric (10,3)." Include at least one example.

Answer: Numeric indicates a non-integer, decimal number in SQL Server. Oracle Database uses Number, and MySQL uses Decimal or Fixed. The (10,3) is in (n,d) format, where n is the total number of digits allowed, and d is the number of digits to the right of the decimal place. Thus, "10, 3" allows a maximum of ten digits, and the last three are considered to be to the right of the decimal place. For example, "1234567" would be read as "1234.567."

AACSB: Information Technology; Application of Knowledge Difficulty: Moderate LO: To create and manage table structures using SQL statements Classification: Application

23 ..

99) Distinguish between Char and VarChar data types. Include examples and tradeoffs.

Answer: Char data type is fixed-length, so that no matter the actual length of the data entered it will always take exactly the same storage space. For example, Char(10) indicates that 10 characters will always be stored for each value of that column. If the actual data entered is less than the specified fixed- length, the data will be padded with blanks. VarChar data type is variable length so that only the amount of space actually needed to store the data is used.

Although VarChar may be more efficient in its use of space, it is not always preferred. VarChar requires the storage of some extra data to indicate the length of the data values, plus it requires some extra processing by the DBMS to arrange the variable length data. As another example, VarChar(10) indicates that the maximum length of a string to be stored in that field will be 10 characters. If the actual data are shorter, then fewer than 10 characters will be stored.

AACSB: Information Technology; Analytical Thinking Difficulty: Difficult LO: To create and manage table structures using SQL statements Classification: Synthesis

24 ..

100) The following database will be used in this question: GENERAL SALES DATABASE: SALESREP SalesRepNo 654 734 345 434 CUSTOMER CustNo 9870 8590 7840 4870

RepName Jones Smith Chen Johnson

CustName Winston Gonzales Harris Miles

HireDate 01/02/2005 02/03/2007 01/25/2004 11/23/2004

Balance 500 350 800 100

SalesRepNo 345 434 654 345

Explain the use of the SQL statement CREATE TABLE. Do NOT discuss the ALTER statement in your answer, but DO include an example based on the SALESREP table in the General Sales database.

Answer: The SQL statement CREATE TABLE forms the basis for all SQL table construction.

CREATE TABLE is used to name tables and specify their structure, including column names and their associated data types. In addition, CREATE TABLE can be used to define primary keys, foreign keys, and to specify constraints on tables, columns and column values. There are five SQL keywords that specify these constraints: PRIMARY KEY, FOREIGN KEY, NULL/NOT NULL, UNIQUE, and CHECK. PRIMARY KEY and FOREIGN KEY are used to specify keys. NULL and NOT NULL specify whether nulls are allowed as values in a column.

UNIQUE specifies whether the column values have to be unique. The SQL keyword CONSTRAINT may be used to specify some of the table constraints. For example, to create the SALESREP table for the General Sales database, the following SQL statement may be used: CREATE TABLE SALESREP ( SalesRepNo Integer Not Null, RepName Char(25) Not Null, HireDate Date Not Null, CONSTRAINT SalesRepPK PRIMARY KEY (SalesRepNo) ); Note to the instructor: The data type of HireDate is shown as Date, which is the ORACLE data type shown in the text. Students may also use Datetime, which is the SQL Server data type, which is also shown in the text.

AACSB: Information Technology; Application of Knowledge Difficulty: Moderate LO: To create and manage table structures using SQL statements Classification: Application 25 ..

101) The following database will be used in this question: GENERAL SALES DATABASE: SALESREP SalesRepNo 654 734 345 434 CUSTOMER CustNo 9870 8590 7840 4870

RepName Jones Smith Chen Johnson

CustName Winston Gonzales Harris Miles

HireDate 01/02/2005 02/03/2007 01/25/2004 11/23/2004

Balance 500 350 800 100

SalesRepNo 345 434 654 345

What is an SQL view, and what is it used for? Include an example based on the CUSTOMER table of the General Sales Database.

Answer: An SQL view is a virtual table constructed from database tables or other views. It is based on the SQL CREATE VIEW command and uses the SQL SELECT statement to construct the view. However, the ORDER BY clause cannot be used when creating a view. For example: CREATE VIEW CustomerNameOnly AS SELECT CustName FROM CUSTOMER; A view may be used to (1) hide columns or rows, (2) show the results of computed columns, (3) hide complicated SQL statements such as joins, (4) layer built-in functions, (5) provide a level of indirection between the data processed by applications and the actual table data,(6) assign different processing permissions to different views of the same table, and (7) assign different triggers to different views of the same table.

AACSB: Information Technology; Application of Knowledge Difficulty: Difficult LO: To understand several uses for SQL views; To use SQL statements to create, use, and manage views Classification: Application

26 ..

102) What is embedded SQL, and what considerations are necessary when using it in an application?

Answer: Embedded SQL are SQL statements used, or embedded, in program code, triggers or stored procedures. Applications are typically written in program code, using a programming language. There are two problems that arise. First, the results of SQL statements must be assigned to programming language variables. DBMS products typically provide the means of doing this. Second, SQL is table or set-oriented and SQL results use tables or sets of rows, whereas application programming languages are variable or row-oriented. This is resolved by treating SQL results as pseudofiles. A cursor is then used to move through the pseudofile one.

AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To understand how SQL is used in application programming Classification: Concept 103) What are SQL triggers and how are they used?

Answer: An SQL trigger is a stored program that is attached to a table or view. The trigger is invoked by the DBMS whenever an insert, update or delete request is made on the table or view with the trigger. There are three commonly used triggers: BEFORE, INSTEAD OF, and AFTER (MS SQL server does not support BEFORE). This creates a set of nine possible trigger types: BEFORE + [INSERT or UPDATE or DELETE], INSTEAD OF + [INSERT or UPDATE or DELETE], and AFTER + [INSERT or UPDATE or DELETE]. Triggers are used (among other things) for (1) providing default values, (2) validity checking, (3) updating views, and (4) enforcing referential integrity actions.

AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To understand how to create and use triggers Classification: Concept 104) What are SQL stored procedures and how are they used?

Answer: An SQL stored procedure is a stored program that is attached to a database instead of just a table or view. Stored procedures can receive input parameters and return results. They can be executed by any process that has permission with the database to use stored procedures. They can issue INSERT, UPDATE and DELETE commands. They are typically used by (1) database administrators to do common administrative tasks, and (2) database applications.

AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To understand how to create and use stored procedures Classification: Concept

27 ..

Database Processing, 14e (Kroenke) Chapter 8: Database Redesign 1) Database redesign is rarely needed because databases are usually built correctly the first time.

Answer: FALSE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To understand the need for database redesign Classification: Concept 2) In a real sense, information systems and organizations do not just influence each other, but rather they create each other.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To understand the need for database redesign Classification: Concept 3) A continuous circular process of changes in user behaviors and change in the information systems they use is a natural outcome of information system use.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To understand the need for database redesign Classification: Concept 4) The continuous circular process of changes is known as the Systems Development Life Cycle (SDLC).

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To understand the need for database redesign Classification: Concept 5) Database redesign is equally difficult whether or not the database has data in it.

Answer: FALSE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To understand the need for database redesign Classification: Concept

1 ..

6) In the database redesign process, it is often useful to test whether certain conditions or assumptions are valid before proceeding with the redesign.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To understand the need for database redesign Classification: Concept 7) In the database redesign process, two SQL tools are useful for testing whether or not certain conditions or assumptions are valid: uncorrelated subqueries and EXISTS/NOT EXISTS. Answer: FALSE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To understand the need for database redesign Classification: Concept 8) A correlated subquery looks very different from a noncorrelated subquery.

Answer: FALSE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To be able to use correlated subqueries Classification: Concept 9) Correlated subqueries can be used to verify functional dependencies.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To be able to use correlated subqueries Classification: Concept 10) In a correlated subquery, the same table is used in the upper and lower SELECT statements.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To be able to use correlated subqueries Classification: Concept

2 ..

11) In the SQL statement: SELECT S1.CustName, S1.SalesRepNo FROM SALES S1; the "S1" is called an alias.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology; Application of Knowledge Difficulty: Moderate LO: To be able to use correlated subqueries Classification: Application 12) In a correlated subquery, the DBMS can run the lower SELECT statement by itself and then send the results to the upper SELECT statement.

Answer: FALSE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To be able to use correlated subqueries Classification: Concept 13) In a correlated subquery, the DBMS must run the lower SELECT statement as a process that is nested within the upper SELECT statement.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To be able to use correlated subqueries Classification: Concept 14) There is a common trap in writing a correlated subquery, which will cause no rows to ever be displayed in the results.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To be able to use correlated subqueries Classification: Concept 15) Although correlated subqueries are useful in database redesign, they cannot be used to verify functional dependencies.

Answer: FALSE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To be able to use correlated subqueries Classification: Concept

3 ..

16) When using queries with EXISTS and NOT EXISTS, the processing of the associated SELECT statements must be nested.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To be able to use the SQL EXISTS and NOT EXISTS comparison operators in correlated subqueries Classification: Concept 17) A doubly nested set of NOT EXISTS SELECT statements can be used to find rows that meet some specified condition for every row in a table.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Difficult LO: To be able to use the SQL EXISTS and NOT EXISTS comparison operators in correlated subqueries Classification: Concept 18) The use of a doubly nested set of NOT EXISTS SELECT statements is a famous pattern in SQL use.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To be able to use the SQL EXISTS and NOT EXISTS comparison operators in correlated subqueries Classification: Concept 19) EXISTS and NOT EXISTS are actually just another form of correlated subqueries.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To be able to use the SQL EXISTS and NOT EXISTS comparison operators in correlated subqueries Classification: Concept 20) Because EXISTS and NOT EXISTS are forms of correlated subqueries, the processing of the associated SELECT statements must be nested.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To be able to use the SQL EXISTS and NOT EXISTS comparison operators in correlated subqueries Classification: Concept

4 ..

21) The EXISTS keyword will be true if any row in the subquery meets the condition.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To be able to use the SQL EXISTS and NOT EXISTS comparison operators in correlated subqueries Classification: Concept 22) The NOT EXISTS keyword will be true if any row in the subquery fails to meet the condition.

Answer: FALSE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To be able to use the SQL EXISTS and NOT EXISTS comparison operators in correlated subqueries Classification: Concept 23) A doubly nested set of EXISTS SELECT statements can be used to find rows that meet some specified condition for every row in a table.

Answer: FALSE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Difficult LO: To be able to use the SQL EXISTS and NOT EXISTS comparison operators in correlated subqueries Classification: Concept 24) When using a doubly nested set of NOT EXISTS SELECT statements, a row that does not match any row matches every row.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Difficult LO: To be able to use the SQL EXISTS and NOT EXISTS comparison operators in correlated subqueries Classification: Concept 25) The use of a doubly nested set of NOT EXISTS SELECT statements is so rare that even if you are a professional database developer you will probably never see it used.

Answer: FALSE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To be able to use the SQL EXISTS and NOT EXISTS comparison operators in correlated subqueries Classification: Concept

5 ..

26) There is no good SQL command that can be used to change table names.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To be able to change table names Classification: Concept 27) The process of reading an actual database schema and producing a data model from that schema is called reverse engineering.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To understand reverse engineering Classification: Concept 28) The data model produced by reverse engineering is a true conceptual schema.

Answer: FALSE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To understand reverse engineering Classification: Concept 29) The data model produced by reverse engineering may include some entities that should not appear in the data model.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To understand reverse engineering Classification: Concept 30) The design produced by reverse engineering may be described as a table-relationship diagram.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To understand reverse engineering Classification: Concept 31) The authors refer to the data model produced by reverse engineering as the RE data model.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To understand reverse engineering Classification: Concept

6 ..

32) Because of the need to know the functional dependencies in a database, it is a good idea to create a dependency graph.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To be able to use dependency graphs Classification: Concept 33) Dependency graphs are graphical displays like bar charts.

Answer: FALSE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To be able to use dependency graphs Classification: Concept 34) Typically, there are at least four different copies of the database schema used in the redesign process.

Answer: FALSE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To understand the need for database redesign Classification: Concept 35) A means must be created to recover all test databases to their original state during the redesign testing process.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To understand the need for database redesign Classification: Concept 36) Even if an organization has a very large database, it will be possible to make a complete backup copy of the operational database prior to making structural changes.

Answer: FALSE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To understand the need for database redesign Classification: Concept 37) SQL contains an SQL command RENAME TABLENAME that can be used to change table names.

Answer: FALSE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To be able to change table names Classification: Concept 7 ..

38) SQL Server 2014 contains a system-stored procedure named sp_rename that can be used to change table names.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To be able to change table names Classification: Concept 39) Changing table names is complicated by the fact that constraints and triggers are often associated with the table and will also need to be changed.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To be able to change table names Classification: Concept 40) In order to minimize the need to change table names, some organizations have a policy that no user or application should ever employ the true name of a table, but use views as table aliases instead.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Difficult LO: To be able to change table names Classification: Concept 41) To add a NULL column to a table, we simply use the MODIFY TABLE statement.

Answer: FALSE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To be able to change table columns Classification: Concept 42) If a DEFAULT constraint is included when a new column is added to a table, the default value is only applied to new rows and not to the existing rows at the time the new column is added.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To be able to change table columns Classification: Concept

8 ..

43) To add a NOT NULL column to a table, we first add a NULL column, then we insert values into every row, and finally we change the NULL constraint to NOT NULL. Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To be able to change table columns Classification: Concept 44) To drop a nonkey column from a table, no preliminary steps are needed and we can simply use the ALTER TABLE DROP COLUMN statement.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To be able to change table columns Classification: Concept 45) To drop a foreign key column from a table, no preliminary steps are needed and we can simply use the ALTER TABLE DROP COLUMN statement.

Answer: FALSE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To be able to change table columns Classification: Concept 46) To drop a primary key column from a table the primary key constraint must first be dropped, but this does not require that related foreign keys based on the column be dropped.

Answer: FALSE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Difficult LO: To be able to change table columns Classification: Concept 47) To drop a constraint, no preliminary steps are needed and we can simply use the ALTER TABLE DROP CONSTRAINT statement.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Difficult LO: To be able to change table columns Classification: Concept 48) Converting date, money, or other more specific data types to char or varchar will usually succeed.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Difficult LO: To be able to change table columns Classification: Concept 9 ..

49) To change the minimum cardinality on the parent side from zero to one, the foreign key, which would have been NULL, must be changed to NOT NULL. Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Difficult LO: To be able to change relationship cardinalities Classification: Concept 50) Depending on the DBMS, when changing the minimum cardinality on the parent side from zero to one, the foreign key constraint that defines the relationship may have to be dropped before the change is made and re-added afterwards.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Difficult LO: To be able to change relationship cardinalities Classification: Concept 51) There are several difficulties with increasing cardinalities from 1:1 to 1:N, one of which is preserving the existing relationships.

Answer: FALSE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Difficult LO: To be able to change relationship cardinalities Classification: Concept 52) When increasing cardinalities from 1:N to N:M, we basically create a new intersection table, fill it with data and drop the old foreign key.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To be able to change relationship cardinalities Classification: Concept 53) When decreasing maximum cardinalities, there will always be data loss.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To be able to change relationship cardinalities Classification: Concept 54) Adding new tables and relationships to a database is difficult.

Answer: FALSE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To be able to add and delete relationships Classification: Concept 10 ..

55) Deleting tables and relationships is basically a matter of dropping foreign key constraints and then dropping the tables.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To be able to add and delete relationships Classification: Concept 56) Database redesign is fairly easy when ________.

A) information systems and organizations influence each other B) the design was done correctly the first time C) there is no data in the database D) good backups of the database are available Answer: C AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To understand the need for database redesign Classification: Concept 57) Which of the following is not a possible step in the database redesign process?

A) Checking whether certain conditions or assumptions about the data are valid B) Reverse engineering the data model C) Revising user account name policies D) Maintaining backups of the existing database Answer: C AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To understand the need for database redesign Classification: Concept 58) In the database redesign process, before proceeding with the redesign it is often useful to ________.

A) check whether certain conditions or assumptions about the data are valid B) find out why the design was not done properly the first time C) stop information systems and users from influencing each other D) set standards for user behavior Answer: A AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To understand the need for database redesign Classification: Concept

11 ..

59) In the database redesign process, an SQL tool that is useful for testing whether or not certain conditions or assumptions are valid is ________.

A) UPDATE B) DROP TABLE C) CREATE TRIGGER D) NOT EXISTS Answer: D AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To be able to use the SQL EXISTS and NOT EXISTS comparison operators in correlated subqueries Classification: Concept 60) In a correlated subquery of a database that has tables TableOne and TableTwo, if table TableOne is used in the upper SELECT statement, then which table is used in the lower SELECT statement?

A) TableOne B) TableTwo C) Both TableOne and TableTwo D) Either TableOne or TableTwo Answer: A AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To be able to use correlated subqueries Classification: Concept 61) In the SQL statements SELECT C1.CustName, C1.SalesRepNo FROM CUSTOMER C1; the "C1" is called a(n) ________.

A) term B) alias C) convention D) label Answer: B AACSB: Information Technology; Application of Knowledge Difficulty: Moderate LO: To be able to use correlated subqueries Classification: Application

12 ..

62) When running a correlated subquery, the DBMS ________.

A) runs the lower SELECT statement by itself and then sends the results to the upper SELECT statement.

B) runs the upper SELECT statement by itself and then sends the results to the lower SELECT statement.

C) alternates running the lower SELECT statement with running the upper SELECT statement based on each result of the lower SELECT statement D) Either A or B may be used depending on the query.

Answer: C AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Difficult LO: To be able to use correlated subqueries Classification: Concept 63) When running a correlated subquery, the DBMS always uses ________.

A) regular processing B) nested processing C) "quick and dirty" processing D) SQL-92 processing Answer: B AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To be able to use correlated subqueries Classification: Concept

13 ..

64) Which of the following SQL statements is a correctly stated correlated subquery?

A) SELECT C1.CustName, C1.SalesRepNo FROM CUSTOMER C1 WHERE C1.SalesRepNo IN (SELECT S1.SalesRepNo FROM SALESREP S1 WHERE S1.RepName = 'Smith'); B) SELECT C1.CustName, C1.SalesRepNo FROM CUSTOMER C1 WHERE C1.SalesRepNo IN (SELECT S1.SaleRepNo FROM SALESREP S1 WHERE S1.RepName = 'Smith') AND C1.SalesRepNo=S1.SalesRepNo); C) SELECT C1.CustName, C1.SalesRepNo FROM CUSTOMER C1 WHERE C1.SalesRepNo IN (SELECT S1.SaleRepNo FROM SALESREP S1 WHERE S1.RepName = 'Smith') AND C1.SalesRepNo<>S1.SalesRepNo); D) SELECT C1.CustName, C1.SalesRepNo FROM CUSTOMER C1 WHERE C1.SalesRepNo IN (SELECT C2.SaleRepNo FROM CUSTOMER C2 WHERE C1.SalesRepNo=C2.SalesRepNo); AND C1.OrderNo<>C2.OrderNo); Answer: D AACSB: Information Technology; Application of Knowledge Difficulty: Difficult LO: To be able to use correlated subqueries Classification: Application 65) SQL queries that use EXISTS and NOT EXISTS are ________.

A) normal subqueries B) correlated subqueries C) uncorrelated subqueries D) constraint dependent subqueries Answer: B AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To be able to use the SQL EXISTS and NOT EXISTS comparison operators in correlated subqueries Classification: Concept

14 ..

66) When running an SQL query that uses EXISTS, the EXISTS keyword will be true if ________.

A) any row in the subquery meets the condition B) all rows in the subquery meet the condition C) no row in the subquery meets the condition D) any row in the subquery fails to meet the condition Answer: A AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To be able to use the SQL EXISTS and NOT EXISTS comparison operators in correlated subqueries Classification: Concept 67) When running an SQL query that uses NOT EXISTS, the NOT EXISTS keyword will be true if ________.

A) any row in the subquery meets the condition B) all rows in the subquery meet the condition C) no row in the subquery meets the condition D) any row in the subquery fails to meet the condition Answer: C AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To be able to use the SQL EXISTS and NOT EXISTS comparison operators in correlated subqueries Classification: Concept 68) A doubly nested set of NOT EXISTS SELECT statements is ________.

A) a famous pattern in SQL B) regularly used C) rarely used to nonexistent in the real world D) Both A and B are correct Answer: D AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To be able to use the SQL EXISTS and NOT EXISTS comparison operators in correlated subqueries Classification: Concept

15 ..

69) In a doubly nested set of NOT EXISTS SELECT statements, ________.

A) if a row does not not match any row, then it matches every row B) if a row matches any row, then it matches every row C) if a row does not match any row, then it does not match every row D) if a row matches any row, then it does not match every row Answer: A AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Difficult LO: To be able to use the SQL EXISTS and NOT EXISTS comparison operators in correlated subqueries Classification: Concept 70) The process of reading an actual database schema and producing a data model from that schema is called ________.

A) data modeling B) data engineering C) reverse engineering D) schema modeling Answer: C AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To understand reverse engineering Classification: Concept 71) The data model produced by reverse engineering is not truly a logical model because it will contain ________.

A) tables for strong entities B) supertype/subtype tables C) tables for ID-dependent entities D) intersection tables Answer: D AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To understand reverse engineering Classification: Concept 72) The data model produced by reverse engineering is a(n) ________.

A) conceptual schema B) internal schema C) dependency graph D) table-relationship diagram Answer: D AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To understand reverse engineering Classification: Concept 16 ..

73) Because of the need to know the functional dependencies in a database, it is a good idea to create a(n) ________.

A) conceptual schema B) internal schema C) dependency graph D) table-relationship diagram Answer: C AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To be able to use dependency graphs Classification: Concept 74) A dependency graph should include all of the following except ________.

A) tables B) views C) triggers D) DEFAULT values Answer: D AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To be able to use dependency graphs Classification: Concept 75) Which of the following different copies of the database schema is typically not used in the database redesign process?

A) Small test database B) Data warehouse database C) Operational database D) Large test database Answer: B AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To understand the need for database redesign Classification: Concept 76) In order to make sure the database redesign is working properly during the redesign testing process, a means must be created to ________.

A) reverse engineer all test databases B) graph dependencies in all test databases C) recover all test databases to their original state D) re-interview all relevant users Answer: C AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To understand the need for database redesign Classification: Concept 17 ..

77) To change a table name, we ________.

A) use the SQL RENAME TABLE command B) use the SQL ALTER TABLENAME command C) use the SQL MODIFY TABLENAME command D) create a new table, move the data, and drop the old table Answer: D AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To be able to change table names Classification: Concept 78) When making any change to the database structure, we may need to check for effects of the change on any of the following except ________.

A) data B) foreign keys C) ad-hoc SQL queries D) triggers Answer: C AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To understand the need for database redesign Classification: Concept 79) To add a NULL column to a table, we ________.

A) use the REVISE TABLE command B) use the ALTER TABLE command C) use the MODIFY TABLE command D) create a new table with the NULL column, move the other data, and drop the old table Answer: B AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To be able to change table columns Classification: Concept 80) If a DEFAULT constraint is included when a new column is added to a table, the default value is applied to ________.

A) all existing rows at the time the column is added B) all new rows C) all new rows but only after the UPDATE command is issued D) Both A and B are correct Answer: B AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To be able to change table columns Classification: Concept

18 ..

81) To add a NOT NULL column to a table, we ________.

A) use the REVISE TABLE command B) use the ALTER TABLE command C) use the MODIFY TABLE command D) create a new NULL column, insert data values into every row, and change the NULL constraint to NOT NULL Answer: D AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To be able to change table columns Classification: Concept 82) When dropping a nonkey column from a table, which of the following steps is (are) included in the process? (The order of the steps listed below is not relevant, only the steps themselves.)

A) Drop any column constraints from the table B) Drop the column from the table C) Drop any foreign keys constraints based on the column D) Both A and B are correct Answer: B AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To be able to change table columns Classification: Concept 83) When dropping a primary key column from a table, which of the following steps is included in the process? (The order of the steps listed below is not relevant, only the steps themselves.)

A) Drop all constraints from the table B) Drop the foreign keys from the table C) Drop the foreign keys in other tables based on the primary key column D) Drop the primary key(s) of any table(s) to which this one is related Answer: C AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Difficult LO: To be able to change table columns Classification: Concept

19 ..

84) When dropping a foreign key column from a table, which of the following steps is (are) included in the process? (The order of the steps listed below is not relevant, only the steps themselves.)

A) Drop the foreign key constraint from the table B) Drop the foreign key column from the table C) Drop the primary key in the other table referenced by the referential integrity constraint D) Both A and B are correct Answer: D AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To be able to change table columns Classification: Concept 85) Changing cardinalities ________.

A) never occurs in database redesign B) rarely occurs in database redesign C) commonly occurs in database redesign D) always occurs in database redesign Answer: C AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To be able to change relationship cardinalities Classification: Concept 86) When changing column data types, which of the following data conversions will either usually or always succeed?

A) Numeric → date B) Date or money → char or varchar C) Char or varchar → numeric D) Char or varchar → date or money Answer: B AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Difficult LO: To be able to change table columns Classification: Concept 87) When changing the minimum cardinality on the parent side of the relationship from zero to one, the foreign key ________.

A) must be changed from NULL to NOT NULL B) must be changed from NOT NULL to NULL C) must be changed to a composite key D) must be changed to a surrogate key Answer: A AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To be able to change relationship cardinalities Classification: Concept 20 ..

88) Which of the following are difficulties when changing the maximum cardinality from 1:1 to 1:N? A) Preserving the existing tables B) Preserving the existing relationships C) Preserving the existing data D) Both A and B are correct Answer: B AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To be able to change relationship cardinalities Classification: Concept 89) When increasing cardinalities from 1:N to N:M, which of the following steps is not included in the process? (The order of the steps listed below is not relevant, only the steps themselves.)

A) Create an intersection table B) Populate the intersection table C) Drop the old foreign key D) Drop the primary key Answer: D AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To be able to change relationship cardinalities Classification: Concept 90) When decreasing cardinalities, there will always be ________.

A) relationship loss B) foreign key loss C) data loss D) default value loss Answer: C AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To be able to change relationship cardinalities Classification: Concept 91) When dropping tables and relationships, which of the following steps is/are included in the process? (The order of the steps listed below is not relevant, only the steps themselves.)

A) Drop the foreign key constraints from the tables B) Drop the tables C) Drop the primary key constraints from the tables D) Both A and B are correct Answer: D AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To be able to add and delete relationships Classification: Concept 21 ..

92) During the database redesign process, you discover that when an ORDER is deleted, its corresponding entries in the LINE_ITEM table are not deleted (but you would like them to be).

In order to fix, this, you use what SQL syntax?

A) ON UPDATE CASCADE B) ON DELETE CASCADE C) CASCADE CONSTRAINTS D) DEFAULT Answer: B AACSB: Information Technology; Application of Knowledge Difficulty: Difficult LO: To be able to change relationship properties Classification: Application 93) During the database redesign process, you discover that when you try to change a DEPARTMENT name (the department's primary key), the change is disallowed by the DBMS due to your design of the EMPLOYEE table (which has a foreign key referencing DEPARTMENT) You want the change to be allowed. In order to fix this, you use what SQL syntax?

A) ON UPDATE CASCADE B) ON DELETE CASCADE C) ADD CONSTRAINT D) FOREIGN KEY Answer: A AACSB: Information Technology; Application of Knowledge Difficulty: Difficult LO: To be able to change relationship properties Classification: Application 94) Why do databases need redesigning?

Answer: Databases need redesigning for two reasons. First, it is not always easy to build a database correctly the first time, and changes in an organization's business process may create the need for a change. With regards to the first reason, even if the data modeling process captured all the users' requirements, translating the requirements into a correct data model and database design can be difficult. Almost inevitably, there will be errors that need to be corrected.

With regards to the second reason, information systems and the organizations that use them influence each other to the point where they can be said to "create" each other. As the organization changes so will the user requirements, which will necessitate database redesign.

AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To understand the need for database redesign Classification: Concept

22 ..

95) When redesigning a database, how can we check assumptions about functional dependencies?

Answer: There are two related SQL techniques that we can use to check assumptions about functional dependencies in an existing database. The first is to use a correlated subquery with the SQL IN keyword, and the second is to use a correlated subquery structure using the SQL EXISTS and/or NOT EXISTS keywords.

AACSB: Information Technology; Application of Knowledge Difficulty: Moderate LO: To be able to use correlated subqueries Classification: Concept 96) What is a correlated subquery? Include an example.

Answer: A correlated subquery uses the standard SQL subquery structure of a SELECT statement (called the lower SELECT) within the WHERE clause of a controlling (or upper) SELECT. However, where a non-correlated subquery uses different tables in the upper and lower SELECTS, the correlated subquery uses the same table in both SELECTS. SQL aliases are used to provide different table names within the query. When a non-correlated subquery is processed, the lower SELECT is processed first and the entire result set of the lower SELECT is passed to the upper SELECT. When a correlated subquery is processed, a nested processing is used where each individual result of the lower SELECT is returned one at a time to the upper SELECT for processing. Here is an example that finds the last names of all students advised by a faculty whose last name is 'Smith': SELECT S.LastName FROM Student S WHERE EXISTS (SELECT * FROM FACULTY F WHERE F.FacultyID = S.AdvisorID AND F.LastName = 'Smith')); AACSB: Information Technology; Application of Knowledge Difficulty: Moderate LO: To be able to use correlated subqueries Classification: Application 97) Explain and contrast the results provided by the EXISTS, NOT EXISTS, and doubly-nested NOT EXISTS keywords.

Answer: The EXISTS and NOT EXISTS keywords are used in the WHERE clause of correlated subqueries, and thus are the basis of just another form of correlated subquery. The EXISTS keyword will be true if any row in the subquery meets the subquery condition(s). The NOT EXISTS keyword will be true when all rows in the subquery fail to meet the subquery condition(s). The double use of NOT EXISTS, which requires three nested SELECT statements, can be used to test for situations where every row of a table meets a specified condition tested.

The doubly nested NOT EXISTS pattern is a famous pattern in SQL and very useful when needed.

AACSB: Information Technology; Analytical Thinking Difficulty: Moderate LO: To be able to use correlated subqueries Classification: Synthesis 23 ..

98) What is reverse engineering and how well does it work?

Answer: Reverse engineering (RE) is the process of reading the database schema of an existing database and using it to reconstruct a data model of the database. It works fairly well, but does have significant limitations. First, RE produces conceptual schema errors because it creates an entity for every table in the database including intersection tables in N:M relationships which would not be an entity in the original data model. Second, it does not generate internal schema information such as referential integrity constraints. Therefore, the result, which the authors call the RE data model, is a good starting point for analyzing an existing database but is not a complete solution.

AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To understand reverse engineering Classification: Concept 99) What is a dependency graph, and what is it used for in database redesign?

Answer: Dependency graphs are not a graphical display like a bar chart, but rather a set of connected nodes. The nodes represent objects such as tables, view, triggers, stored procedures, etc., in the database. Line segments show the interconnections, or dependencies, between these objects. Thus, a dependency graph is useful for determining how a change to one object in a database might affect other objects in the database.

AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To be able to use dependency graphs Classification: Concept 100) Discuss the role of backup and test databases in database redesign.

Answer: Typically, there are at least three different copies of the database schema used in database redesign: (1) a small test database for initial testing, (2) a large or full copy test database for further testing, and (3) the operational database itself. There must be a process to restore the test databases to their original state during the testing process so that tests can be rerun as needed. If it is not possible to use a full copy of a very large operational database for testing, an appropriate large scale test version must be created and used.

AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To understand the need for database redesign Classification: Concept

24 ..

101) What is the process and what are the considerations when changing a table name?

Answer: To change a table name, we re-create the table with the new name, copy the data to the new table, and finally drop the old table. Although the process is simple, there are several considerations. First is the problem of a surrogate key, for the existing values must be maintained. This is solved by creating the key as regular field, copying the date, and then converting the column to a surrogate key. Second is the problem of restructuring constrains to make sure they now apply to the new table. Finally any stored procedures, triggers and other application code that applied to the old table must be rewritten to apply to the new table.

AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To be able to change table names Classification: Concept 102) What is the process for adding a NOT NULL column to a table?

Answer: There are three steps in adding a NOT NULL column to a table. First, the column is added as a NULL column. Second, data is added to the column using one or more UPDATE statements. Finally, the ALTER command is used to change the column from NULL to NOT NULL. AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To be able to change table columns Classification: Concept 103) Discuss workable data conversion and possible data loss when changing column data types during a database redesign.

Answer: Converting Numeric (Number), Money, Date and other more specific data types to Char or VarChar will usually work. The reverse conversions, from Char and VarChar to Numeric, Money and Date, are risky and may not work.

AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To be able to change table columns Classification: Concept

25 ..

Database Processing, 14e (Kroenke) Chapter 9: Managing Multiuser Databases 1) Database administration tasks have to be performed for single-user, personal databases.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To understand the need for and importance of database administration Classification: Concept 2) Database administration is more important but less difficult in multiuser database systems than in single-user database systems.

Answer: FALSE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To understand the need for and importance of database administration Classification: Concept 3) In general, the overall responsibility of the DBA is to facilitate the development and use of the database system.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To understand the need for and importance of database administration Classification: Concept 4) The DBA has to find a balance between the conflicting goals of maximizing availability of the database to users and protecting the database.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To understand the need for concurrency control, security, and backup and recovery Classification: Concept 5) The DBA is responsible for managing changes to the database structure, but is rarely involved in the original design of the structure.

Answer: FALSE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To understand the need for and importance of database administration Classification: Concept

1 ..

6) Changes in the database structure usually involve only one application.

Answer: FALSE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To understand the need for and importance of database administration Classification: Concept 7) The database is most vulnerable to failure after a change to its structure.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To understand the need for and importance of database administration Classification: Concept 8) One important reason for documenting changes to the database structure is for diagnosing errors.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To understand the need for and importance of database administration Classification: Concept 9) Concurrency control measures are taken to ensure that one user's work has absolutely no influence on another user's work.

Answer: FALSE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To understand the need for concurrency control, security, and backup and recovery Classification: Concept 10) A transaction is sometimes called atomic because it is performed as a unit.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To understand the need for concurrency control, security, and backup and recovery Classification: Concept 11) A transaction is a series of actions to be taken on the database such that either all of them are performed successfully or none of them is performed at all.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To understand the need for concurrency control, security, and backup and recovery Classification: Concept

2 ..

12) A transaction is a group of alternative database actions, from which the database can choose to perform only one of them.

Answer: FALSE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To understand the need for concurrency control, security, and backup and recovery Classification: Concept 13) The size of a lock is referred to as the lock granularity.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To learn about typical problems that can occur when multiple users process a database concurrently Classification: Concept 14) An exclusive lock locks the item from access of any type.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To learn about typical problems that can occur when multiple users process a database concurrently Classification: Concept 15) An exclusive lock locks the item from change but not from read access.

Answer: FALSE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To learn about typical problems that can occur when multiple users process a database concurrently Classification: Concept 16) Resource locking is one remedy to the lost update problem.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To understand the use of locking and the problem of deadlock Classification: Concept 17) Locks placed by a command issued to the DBMS from the application program are called explicit locks.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To understand the use of locking and the problem of deadlock Classification: Concept 3 ..

18) Locks placed automatically by the DBMS are called implicit locks.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To understand the use of locking and the problem of deadlock Classification: Concept 19) Explicit locks are locks that are placed automatically by the DBMS. Answer: FALSE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To understand the use of locking and the problem of deadlock Classification: Concept 20) Locks with large granularity are easy for the DBMS to administer but frequently cause conflicts.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To understand the use of locking and the problem of deadlock Classification: Concept 21) Two-phased locking is a scheme for achieving serializability of transactions.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To understand the use of locking and the problem of deadlock Classification: Concept 22) Two-phased locking has a growing phase and a shrinking phase.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To understand the use of locking and the problem of deadlock Classification: Concept 23) In two-phase locking, all locks are obtained during the growing phase.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To understand the use of locking and the problem of deadlock Classification: Concept

4 ..

24) In two-phase locking, all locks are released during the contracting phase.

Answer: FALSE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To understand the use of locking and the problem of deadlock Classification: Concept 25) Resource locking must be carefully planned because most DBMS products cannot detect a deadlock condition.

Answer: FALSE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To understand the use of locking and the problem of deadlock Classification: Concept 26) Requiring all application programs to lock resources in the same order is one way of preventing a deadlock condition.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Difficult LO: To understand the use of locking and the problem of deadlock Classification: Concept 27) With optimistic locking, the assumption is made that no conflict will occur.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To learn the difference between optimistic and pessimistic locking Classification: Concept 28) With pessimistic locking, the assumption is made that a conflict will occur.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To learn the difference between optimistic and pessimistic locking Classification: Concept 29) Resources are locked for a shorter amount of time with pessimistic locking because the transaction is pre-processed.

Answer: FALSE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To learn the difference between optimistic and pessimistic locking Classification: Concept

5 ..

30) In general, optimistic locking is the preferred technique for Internet databases.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To learn the difference between optimistic and pessimistic locking Classification: Concept 31) The transaction boundaries are the essential information that the DBMS needs from the application programs to enforce different locking strategies.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To know the meaning of an ACID transaction Classification: Concept 32) A durable transaction is one for which all committed changes are permanent.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To know the meaning of an ACID transaction Classification: Concept 33) Transaction level consistency means that all rows impacted by any actions in a transaction are protected from change during the entire transaction.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To know the meaning of an ACID transaction Classification: Concept 34) A dirty read happens when one transaction reads a changed record that has not been committed to the database.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To learn about typical problems that can occur when multiple users process a database concurrently Classification: Concept 35) Nonrepeatable reads occur when a transaction rereads data it has previously read and finds modifications or deletions caused by a committed transaction.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To learn about typical problems that can occur when multiple users process a database concurrently Classification: Concept 6 ..

36) Repeatable Read isolation is the most restrictive level of isolation.

Answer: FALSE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To learn the four 1992 ANSI standard isolation levels Classification: Concept 37) According to ANSI SQL, the serializable isolation level will not allow phantom reads, dirty reads, and nonrepeatable reads.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To learn the four 1992 ANSI standard isolation levels Classification: Concept 38) A static cursor processes a snapshot of the relation that was taken when the cursor was opened.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To learn the four 1992 ANSI standard isolation levels Classification: Concept 39) A dynamic cursor saves primary key values when the cursor is opened and retrieves the values for each row as the application program accesses it.

Answer: FALSE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To learn the four 1992 ANSI standard isolation levels Classification: Concept 40) The goal of database security is to ensure that only authorized users can perform authorized activities at authorized times.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To understand the need for security and specific tasks for improving database security Classification: Concept 41) In regard to database security, neither the DBMS nor the database applications can enforce processing responsibilities.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To understand the need for security and specific tasks for improving database security Classification: Concept 7 ..

42) Processing responsibilities should be documented and encoded into manual procedures.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To understand the need for security and specific tasks for improving database security Classification: Concept 43) Processing rights may be implemented at the DBMS level.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To understand the need for security and specific tasks for improving database security Classification: Concept 44) All commercial DBMS products use some version of "username and password" as part of their security features.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To understand the need for security and specific tasks for improving database security Classification: Concept 45) The security provided by the DBMS often has to be augmented by additional security features within the application program.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To understand the need for security and specific tasks for improving database security Classification: Concept 46) A database save is used to mark the end of a transaction.

Answer: FALSE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To know the difference between recovery via reprocessing and recovery via rollback/rollforward Classification: Concept 47) A checkpoint is a point of synchronization between the database and the transaction log.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To understand the nature of the tasks required for recovery using rollback/rollforward Classification: Concept

8 ..

48) Copies of each database record or page before being changed by a transaction that are saved for use in database recovery are called before images.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To understand the nature of the tasks required for recovery using rollback/rollforward Classification: Concept 49) Copies of each database record or page after it was changed by a transaction that are saved for use in database recovery are called ghost images.

Answer: FALSE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To understand the nature of the tasks required for recovery using rollback/rollforward Classification: Concept 50) Reprocessing is normally the most convenient method for recovery after a system failure.

Answer: FALSE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To know the difference between recovery via reprocessing and recovery via rollback/rollforward Classification: Concept 51) Rollforward is a method of database recovery that restores the database save and all valid transactions since the save was reapplied.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To understand the nature of the tasks required for recovery using rollback/rollforward Classification: Concept 52) Rollforward and reprocessing are two different names for the same technique.

Answer: FALSE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Difficult LO: To know the difference between recovery via reprocessing and recovery via rollback/rollforward Classification: Concept 53) To support rollforward and rollback recovery, transactions must be written to a script before they are applied to the database.

Answer: FALSE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To understand the nature of the tasks required for recovery using rollback/rollforward Classification: Concept 9 ..

54) Both rollforward and rollback require the use of a log of transaction results.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To understand the nature of the tasks required for recovery using rollback/rollforward Classification: Concept 55) The DBA should periodically analyze run-time statistics of database performance to help manage the DBMS. Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To know basic administrative and managerial DBA functions Classification: Concept 56) An active data repository is one in which the metadata is automatically created as the system components are created.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To know basic administrative and managerial DBA functions Classification: Concept 57) A standby data repository is one which requires a person to generate the metadata and place it in the repository.

Answer: FALSE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To know basic administrative and managerial DBA functions Classification: Concept 58) A passive data repository is preferred over an active repository because it requires less human intervention.

Answer: FALSE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To know basic administrative and managerial DBA functions Classification: Concept

10 ..

59) Which of the following is not a database administration responsibility of a DBA? A) Managing the database structure B) Writing the applications C) Managing the DBMS D) Maintaining the data repository Answer: B AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To know basic administrative and managerial DBA functions Classification: Concept 60) Which of the following is true about making changes to the database structure?

A) The DBA need not get input from users on the issue because it is a technical decision.

B) Formal policies and procedures for requesting a change are not used because they are too limiting.

C) Documentation of when the change was made, how it was made, and why it was made must be created.

D) Changes do not produce unexpected results because the DBA will have investigated the change thoroughly before implementing it.

Answer: C AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Difficult LO: To know basic administrative and managerial DBA functions Classification: Concept 61) The task of diagnosing errors due to changes in the database structure is eased by ________.

A) formal policies for requesting changes B) database structure change documentation C) rollback analysis D) configuration control Answer: B AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To know basic administrative and managerial DBA functions Classification: Concept 62) Measures that are taken to prevent one user's work from inappropriately influencing another user's work are called ________.

A) concurrency control B) checkpoint C) database recovery D) database logging Answer: A AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To understand the need for concurrency control, security, and backup and recovery Classification: Concept 11 ..

63) A series of actions to be taken on the database such that either all actions are completed successfully, or none of them can be completed, is known as a ________.

A) checkpoint B) log C) lock D) transaction Answer: D AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To know the meaning of an ACID transaction Classification: Concept 64) When two transactions are being processed against the database at the same time ________.

A) they are called concurrent transactions B) they are usually interleaved C) they always result in a lost update problem D) Both A and B are correct Answer: D AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To understand the need for concurrency control, security, and backup and recovery Classification: Concept 65) The situation that occurs when one user's changes to the database are lost by a second user's changes to the database is known as the ________.

A) lost update problem B) deadly embrace problem C) inconsistent read problem D) inconsistent write problem Answer: A AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To learn about typical problems that can occur when multiple users process a database concurrently Classification: Concept 66) One remedy for the inconsistencies caused by concurrent processing is ________.

A) concurrency B) checkpointing C) rollback D) resource locking Answer: D AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To understand the need for concurrency control, security, and backup and recovery Classification: Concept 12 ..

67) A lock placed automatically by the DBMS is called a(n) ________ lock.

A) exclusive B) explicit C) shared D) implicit Answer: D AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To understand the use of locking and the problem of deadlock Classification: Concept 68) Which of the following is not true about locks?

A) Locks with large granularity are easier for the DBMS to administer.

B) Locks with small granularity cause more conflicts.

C) Locks may have a database-level granularity.

D) Locks may have a table-level granularity.

Answer: B AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Difficult LO: To understand the use of locking and the problem of deadlock Classification: Concept 69) Which type of lock prevents all types of access to the locked resource?

A) Exclusive lock B) Shared lock C) Explicit lock D) Implicit lock Answer: A AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To understand the use of locking and the problem of deadlock Classification: Concept 70) Which type of lock still allows other transactions to have read-only access to the locked resource?

A) Exclusive lock B) Shared lock C) Explicit lock D) Implicit lock Answer: B AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Difficult LO: To understand the use of locking and the problem of deadlock Classification: Concept

13 ..

71) Which of the following is not true about two-phased locking?

A) Cannot obtain a new lock once a lock has been released B) Uses only shared locks C) Has a growing phase D) Has a shrinking phase Answer: B AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Difficult LO: To understand the use of locking and the problem of deadlock Classification: Concept 72) The situation that occurs when two users are each waiting for a resource that the other person has locked is known as a(n) ________.

A) lost update problem B) deadlock C) inconsistent read problem D) checkpoint Answer: B AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To understand the use of locking and the problem of deadlock Classification: Concept 73) Requiring all application programs to lock resources in the same order is a technique for preventing what problem?

A) Concurrent update B) Lost update C) Deadlock D) Exclusive locks Answer: C AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To understand the use of locking and the problem of deadlock Classification: Concept 74) Locks that are placed assuming that a conflict will occur are called ________.

A) explicit locks B) implicit locks C) optimistic locks D) pessimistic locks Answer: D AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To learn the difference between optimistic and pessimistic locking Classification: Concept

14 ..

75) Locks that are placed assuming that a conflict will not occur are called ________.

A) dynamic B) shared C) pessimistic D) optimistic Answer: D AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To learn the difference between optimistic and pessimistic locking Classification: Concept 76) Ensuring that all rows impacted by the actions of a transaction are protected from changes until the entire transaction is completed is called ________.

A) statement level consistency B) optimistic locking C) transaction level consistency D) durable transactions Answer: C AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Difficult LO: To know the meaning of an ACID transaction Classification: Concept 77) When a transaction reads a row that has been changed, but the change has not been committed, this is known as a ________.

A) Clean read B) Dirty read C) Nonrepeatable read D) Phantom read Answer: B AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Difficult LO: To learn the four 1992 ANSI standard isolation levels Classification: Concept 78) When a transaction rereads data that has been changed and finds changes due to committed transactions, this is known as a ________.

A) Clean read B) Dirty read C) Nonrepeatable read D) Phantom read Answer: C AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Difficult LO: To learn the four 1992 ANSI standard isolation levels Classification: Concept 15 ..

79) Which of the following is allowed by "Repeatable Read Isolation"?

A) Nonrepeatable reads B) Dirty reads C) Phantom reads D) Both A and B are correct Answer: C AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Difficult LO: To learn the four 1992 ANSI standard isolation levels Classification: Concept 80) Which of the following is true of forward only cursors?

A) Current values for each row are retrieved when the application accesses a row.

B) All changes of any type from any source are visible.

C) Changes made by the transaction are visible only if they occur on rows ahead of the cursor.

D) It requires the greatest overhead of any cursor type.

Answer: C AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Difficult LO: To learn the four 1992 ANSI standard isolation levels Classification: Concept 81) Which of the following cannot be enforced in the DBMS or application programs?

A) Processing rights B) Security C) Processing responsibilities D) Cursors E) Transaction isolation Answer: C AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To understand the need for security and specific tasks for improving database security Classification: Concept 82) Once processing rights have been defined, they may be implemented at any of these levels except ________.

A) network B) operating system C) data D) application Answer: C AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Difficult LO: To understand the need for security and specific tasks for improving database security Classification: Concept

16 ..

83) Which of the following is not true of DBMS security features?

A) Users may be assigned to one or more roles.

B) A role may be assigned to only one user.

C) Both users and roles can have many permissions.

D) Objects have many permissions.

Answer: B AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To understand the need for security and specific tasks for improving database security Classification: Concept 84) Recovering a database via reprocessing involves ________.

A) restoring the database from the save and reprocessing all the transactions since the save B) restoring the database from the save and reapplying all the changes made by transactions since the save C) undoing the changes made by erroneous or partially processed transactions and restarting the valid transactions that were in process at the time of the failure D) recreating the database by reentering all of the data from the beginning, and then reprocessing all of the transactions Answer: A AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To know the difference between recovery via reprocessing and recovery via rollback/rollforward Classification: Concept 85) Recovering a database via rollforward involves ________.

A) restoring the database from the save and reprocessing all the transactions since the save B) restoring the database from the save and reapplying all the changes made by transactions since the save C) undoing the changes made by erroneous or partially processed transactions and restarting the valid transactions that were in process at the time of the failure D) re-creating the database by re-entering all of the data from the beginning, and then reprocessing all of the transactions Answer: B AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To know the difference between recovery via reprocessing and recovery via rollback/rollforward Classification: Concept

17 ..

86) Recovering a database via rollback involves ________.

A) restoring the database from the save and reprocessing all the transactions since the save B) restoring the database from the save and reapplying all the changes made by transactions since the save C) undoing the changes made by erroneous or partially processed transactions and restarting the valid transactions that were in process at the time of the failure D) re-creating the database by re-entering all of the data from the beginning and, then reprocessing all of the transactions Answer: C AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To know the difference between recovery via reprocessing and recovery via rollback/rollforward Classification: Concept 87) Which of the following would not be contained in a transaction log?

A) Before images B) Type of operation C) Time of the action D) Permissions Answer: D AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To understand the nature of the tasks required for recovery using rollback/rollforward Classification: Concept 88) Which of the following would a DBA typically NOT do in managing the DBMS? A) Analyze system performance statistics B) Install new versions of the operating system, as needed C) Evaluate new DBMS product features D) Tune DBMS product options to accommodate other software in use Answer: B AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To know basic administrative and managerial DBA functions Classification: Concept

18 ..

89) Which of the following is not true of data repositories?

A) They are usually created after the database has been implemented and optimized for performance.

B) They may be virtual.

C) They may contain metadata about database applications.

D) They may contain metadata about users.

Answer: A AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To know basic administrative and managerial DBA functions Classification: Concept 90) Which type of data repository is composed of metadata that is created automatically as the system components are created?

A) Passive B) Dynamic C) Active D) Automatic Answer: C AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To know basic administrative and managerial DBA functions Classification: Concept 91) Explain the importance of documenting changes in database structure.

Answer: Changes in database structure may introduce errors that do not become apparent for long periods of time. Documentation provides a record of changes to assist the investigation into the cause of database errors. Further, documentation of database changes can be used to determine the structure of the database at some point in the past. This is necessary for proper interpretation of any historical records that may need to be retrieved. Finally, documentation can assist in recovering the database from a previous copy in case of database failure. Not only do transactions have to be restored to the recovered database, but also any structural changes since the backup was created will have to be reapplied.

AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To understand the need for and importance of database administration Classification: Application

19 ..

92) Explain the concept of serializable transactions.

Answer: Concurrent transactions are two or more transactions that are processed against the database at the same time. It is desirable for concurrent transactions to be serializable; that is, the results of the concurrent transactions should be logically consistent with the results that would be obtained if the transactions were not processed concurrently but rather in an arbitrary serial order.

AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To learn about typical problems that can occur when multiple users process a database concurrently Classification: Concept 93) Briefly explain the strategy of two-phased locking.

Answer: Two-phased locking is a strategy to ensure the serializability of transactions. A transaction is allowed to obtain locks as necessary, but once the first lock is released no other locks may be obtained. This produces the two-phased effect—the growing phase in which locks are obtained and the shrinking phase as locks are released.

AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To understand the use of locking and the problem of deadlock Classification: Concept 94) Explain the concept of an atomic transaction.

Answer: An atomic transaction is a transaction in which either all steps must be completed successfully, or none of the steps can be completed at all. A transaction becomes atomic when the complete set of steps within the transaction is a single logical unit of work.

AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To know the meaning of an ACID transaction Classification: Concept 95) Distinguish between statement-level consistency and transaction-level consistency.

Answer: Statement-level consistency requires that a statement apply to a set of rows that is consistent from the beginning of the statement until the end of the statement. Transaction-level consistency indicates that the set of rows will remain consistent throughout the processing of all statements within the transaction.

AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Difficult LO: To learn the four 1992 ANSI standard isolation levels Classification: Application

20 ..

96) Briefly define the three problems that can occur because of concurrent processing that are addressed by resource locking.

Answer: The three problems that can occur because of concurrent processing are dirty reads, nonrepeatable reads, and phantom reads. A dirty read occurs when a transaction reads a changed record that has not been committed to the database. If the change is cancelled before it is committed, then the read will contain incorrect data. A nonrepeatable read occurs when a transaction rereads data and finds modifications or deletions caused by another transaction. A phantom read occurs when a transaction rereads data and finds new rows that were inserted by another transaction since the prior read.

AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To learn about typical problems that can occur when multiple users process a database concurrently Classification: Concept 97) Briefly define the four isolation levels and the problems they prevent.

Answer: The four isolation levels are read uncommitted, read committed, repeatable read and serializable. The three problems that can occur because of concurrent processing are dirty reads, nonrepeatable reads, and phantom reads. The read uncommitted isolation level does not prevent any of these problems from occurring. The read committed isolation level prevents dirty reads.

The repeatable read isolation level prevents dirty reads and nonrepeatable reads. The serializable isolation level prevents all three problems from occurring.

AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To learn the four 1992 ANSI standard isolation levels Classification: Concept 98) Explain the process of using optimistic locking.

Answer: Optimistic locking makes the assumption that no conflicts will occur. Data is read, the transaction is processed, updates are issued, and then a check is made to see if a conflict occurred. If a conflict does occur, the transaction is repeated until it completes without a conflict.

Thus, the lock is not secured until the transaction is completed. This reduces the amount of time that the lock is held.

AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To learn the difference between optimistic and pessimistic locking Classification: Application

21 ..

99) Which are more commonly used: implicit or explicit locks? Why? Answer: Implicit locks are more commonly used than explicit locks. Concurrency control involves many complex factors that influence the performance of the system. The impact of some of these factors can only be determined through trial and error. Changing explicit locks to tune system performance can require making changes throughout the program code to obtain and release locks at various places in the transactions. Implicit locks are much easier to change since a locking strategy can be specified in a system parameter or lock declaration area and then the DBMS will place the locks implicitly wherever they are needed to implement that strategy.

AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To understand the use of locking and the problem of deadlock Classification: Application 100) Distinguish between the four cursor types.

Answer: Forward only cursors are the simplest type of cursor, and only allow the application program to move forward through the record set. The three other types of cursors are all scrollable cursors, meaning that the application program can move forward and backward through the record set. Static cursors take a snapshot of the relation at the point in time when the cursor was opened. Keyset cursors save a copy of the primary key value for each record in the cursor. This key value is then used to retrieve the values of each record as the application program accesses that record. Dynamic cursors are fully functional cursors and can see any changes made to the records by any committed transactions.

AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To learn the four 1992 ANSI standard isolation levels Classification: Application 101) Discuss the DBMS security model.

Answer: In the DBMS security model, users are assigned to roles, and roles are granted permissions for certain actions on database objects. While it is also possible in this model for a user to be directly granted permissions to objects, this is not a recommended practice.

AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To understand the need for security and specific tasks for improving database security Classification: Application

22 ..

102) Explain the purpose of transaction logs and checkpoints.

Answer: Transaction logs are created to facilitate the recovery of the database. All transactions that make changes to the database are recorded in the transaction log before they are applied to the database. In the event that the database fails the transactions in the log can be used to undo changes made by transactions that were not committed, and to redo changes that were committed since the database was last saved. Checkpoints are used in conjunction with transaction logs. A checkpoint is a marker for when the last time the database and the transaction log were synchronized. If the database must be restored, only after images for transactions that began after the last checkpoint have to be applied.

AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Difficult LO: To understand the nature of the tasks required for recovery using rollback/rollforward Classification: Application

23 ..

Database Processing, 14e (Kroenke) Chapter 11: The Web Server Environment 1) Every DBMS product has an application programming interface (API).

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To understand the nature and characteristics of the data environment that surrounds Internet technology database applications Classification: Concept 2) Every DBMS product uses the same API. Answer: FALSE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To understand the nature and characteristics of the data environment that surrounds Internet technology database applications Classification: Concept 3) ODBC stands for Open Database Connectivity.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To learn the purpose, features, and facilities of ODBC Classification: Concept 4) If a server is using a Microsoft Windows operating system, it is usually running Internet Information Server (IIS) as its Web server.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To understand the nature and characteristics of the data environment that surrounds Internet technology database applications Classification: Concept 5) The most widely used Web server for all operating systems is Internet Information Services (IIS).

Answer: FALSE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To understand the nature and characteristics of the data environment that surrounds Internet technology database applications Classification: Concept

1 ..

6) If the Web server and the DBMS are running on the same server, the system has a three-tier architecture.

Answer: FALSE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To understand the nature and characteristics of the data environment that surrounds Internet technology database applications Classification: Concept 7) ODBC has not had practical success, but has shown great potential for future development.

Answer: FALSE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To learn the purpose, features, and facilities of ODBC Classification: Concept 8) ODBC works with table-like data sources such as relational databases and spreadsheets.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To learn the purpose, features, and facilities of ODBC Classification: Concept 9) OLE DB can act as a wrapper for (covers) database native libraries so that the functionality can be provided by OLE. Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To understand the nature and goals of OLE DB Classification: Concept 10) With ODBC, a database and the DBMS that processes it are identified by the data source.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To learn the purpose, features, and facilities of ODBC Classification: Concept 11) With ODBC, the driver manager serves as an intermediary between the application and the DBMS drivers.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To learn the purpose, features, and facilities of ODBC Classification: Concept

2 ..

12) With ODBC, only a single driver is needed to handle all data source types, such as Oracle, DB2, and Access.

Answer: FALSE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To learn the purpose, features, and facilities of ODBC Classification: Concept 13) In ODBC, the amount of work that the driver must do is largely determined by the degree of SQL-compliance of the data source.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Difficult LO: To learn the purpose, features, and facilities of ODBC Classification: Concept 14) A multiple-tier ODBC driver may reformat an SQL request, but it does not actually process the SQL statement.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To learn the purpose, features, and facilities of ODBC Classification: Concept 15) With ODBC, a file data source is available only to the user that created it.

Answer: FALSE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To learn the purpose, features, and facilities of ODBC Classification: Concept 16) In general, the best type of ODBC data source to define for a Web application is a system data source.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To learn the purpose, features, and facilities of ODBC Classification: Concept 17) OLE DB objects are COM objects.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To understand the nature and goals of OLE DB Classification: Concept

3 ..

18) OLE DB can be used to access ODBC data sources.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To understand the nature and goals of OLE DB Classification: Concept 19) OLE DB is an object-oriented interface.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To understand the nature and goals of OLE DB Classification: Concept 20) In OLE DB, a RecordSet is a more abstract representation of a rowset.

Answer: FALSE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Difficult LO: To understand the nature and goals of OLE DB Classification: Concept 21) Object classes have properties that represent characteristics of the objects in the class.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To understand the nature and goals of OLE DB Classification: Concept 22) One of the properties of all collections is Count, which is the number of objects in the collection.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To understand the nature and goals of OLE DB Classification: Concept 23) In OLE DB, all of an object's properties must be exposed in all interfaces, but not all methods have to be exposed.

Answer: FALSE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To understand the nature and goals of OLE DB Classification: Concept

4 ..

24) One important result of OLE DB is that data does not have to be moved or converted from one form to another.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To understand the nature and goals of OLE DB Classification: Concept 25) An OLE DB service provider accepts data from an OLE DB tabular data provider.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To understand the nature and goals of OLE DB Classification: Concept 26) ADO provides access to OLE functionality to programming languages that ordinarily could not access OLE functions.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To learn the characteristics and object model of ADO.NET Classification: Concept 27) ADO is accessible from languages such as C++ and C#, but not Visual Basic or scripting languages.

Answer: FALSE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To learn the characteristics and object model of ADO.NET Classification: Concept 28) ADO was (and still is) frequently used for database applications.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To learn the characteristics and object model of ADO.NET Classification: Concept 29) ADO.NET is a completely new product, with no connection to ADO except the similar name.

Answer: FALSE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To learn the characteristics and object model of ADO.NET Classification: Concept

5 ..

30) ADO.NET provides the capability to create and process in-memory databases called DataSets.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To learn the characteristics and object model of ADO.NET Classification: Concept 31) An ADO.NET DataSet has all the characteristics, features, and functions of a regular database.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To learn the characteristics and object model of ADO.NET Classification: Concept 32) An ADO.NET DataSet is connected to databases.

Answer: FALSE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To learn the characteristics and object model of ADO.NET Classification: Concept 33) An ADO.NET dataset can have primary and foreign keys, but ADO.NET does not support referential integrity.

Answer: FALSE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To learn the characteristics and object model of ADO.NET Classification: Concept 34) Once an ADO.NET dataset is constructed, its contents can be formatted as an XML document with a single command.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To learn the characteristics and object model of ADO.NET Classification: Concept 35) An ADO.NET dataset can only be used with optimistic locking.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To learn the characteristics and object model of ADO.NET Classification: Concept

6 ..

36) Only open source products may be used in conjunction with JDBC. Answer: FALSE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To understand the characteristics of JDBC and the four types of JDBC drivers Classification: Concept 37) To use JDBC, programs must be written in Java.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To understand the characteristics of JDBC and the four types of JDBC drivers Classification: Concept 38) JDBC drivers only exist for a limited number of DBMS products at this time.

Answer: FALSE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To understand the characteristics of JDBC and the four types of JDBC drivers Classification: Concept 39) JDBC-ODBC bridge drivers resolve inconsistencies between Java and C/C++ to allow Java access to ODBC data sources.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To understand the characteristics of JDBC and the four types of JDBC drivers Classification: Concept 40) Type 2 JDBC drivers access ODBC data sources over a network.

Answer: FALSE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To understand the characteristics of JDBC and the four types of JDBC drivers Classification: Concept 41) Type 4 JDBC drivers translate JDBC calls into a DBMS-independent network protocol.

Answer: FALSE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To understand the characteristics of JDBC and the four types of JDBC drivers Classification: Concept

7 ..

42) Java programs are compiled into machine-independent bytecode.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To understand the characteristics of JDBC and the four types of JDBC drivers Classification: Concept 43) Java programs tend to execute faster than programs compiled into machine-dependent code because the Java virtual machine only has to interpret the bytecode.

Answer: FALSE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To understand the characteristics of JDBC and the four types of JDBC drivers Classification: Concept 44) An applet is a Java bytecode program that executes on the Web server.

Answer: FALSE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To understand the characteristics of JDBC and the four types of JDBC drivers Classification: Concept 45) Applet bytecode is sent to the user's computer and is invoked using the HTTP protocol.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To understand the characteristics of JDBC and the four types of JDBC drivers Classification: Concept 46) Java programs that access a database from an applet must use a Type 2 JDBC driver.

Answer: FALSE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Difficult LO: To understand the characteristics of JDBC and the four types of JDBC drivers Classification: Concept 47) The first step in using a JDBC driver is to establish a connection.

Answer: FALSE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To understand the characteristics of JDBC and the four types of JDBC drivers Classification: Concept

8 ..

48) Java Server Pages (JSP) can run only on Linux or Unix servers.

Answer: FALSE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To understand the characteristics of JDBC and the four types of JDBC drivers Classification: Concept 49) JSP pages are automatically re-compiled if the uncompiled JSP page is newer than the compiled version of the page.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To understand the characteristics of JDBC and the four types of JDBC drivers Classification: Concept 50) Basic Web pages are created using Hypertext Markup Language (HTML).

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To understand HTML and PHP Classification: Concept 51) HTML is defined by the World Wide Web Consortium (W3C).

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To understand HTML and PHP Classification: Concept 52) A common default Web page name recognized by most Web servers is FirstPage.html.

Answer: FALSE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To understand HTML and PHP Classification: Concept 53) Database processing and document processing are unrelated to one another.

Answer: FALSE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To understand the importance of XML Classification: Concept

9 ..

54) HTML is an application of a document markup language called Standard Generalized Markup Language (SGML).

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To understand the importance of XML Classification: Concept 55) In the 1990s the database community and the document processing community created a standard called Expandable Markup Language (XML).

Answer: FALSE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To understand the importance of XML Classification: Concept 56) XML provides a standardized, non-customizable way to describe the content of a document.

Answer: FALSE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To understand the importance of XML Classification: Concept 57) XML documents can be automatically generated from database data.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To understand the importance of XML Classification: Concept 58) SOAP was originally an XML-based standard for providing remote procedure calls over the Internet.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To understand the importance of XML Classification: Concept 59) Oracle requires the use of Java for generating XML documents from database data.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To understand the importance of XML Classification: Concept

10 ..

60) MySQL does not have facilities for generating XML documents from database data.

Answer: FALSE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To understand the importance of XML Classification: Concept 61) PHP code is executed on a server and can generate HTML code that is sent to the client computer.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To be able to construct Web database applications pages using PHP Classification: Concept 62) The SQL Server statement SELECT ...FOR XML RAW tells SQL Server to place the data values from the columns in the table into XML elements.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To learn the basic concepts involved in using the SQL SELECT . . . FOR XML statement Classification: Concept 63) Which of the following can only interact with relational database and table-like data structures?

A) OLE DB B) ODBC C) ASP D) ADO Answer: B AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To learn the purpose, features, and facilities of ODBC Classification: Concept 64) Which of the following is true about ODBC? A) ODBC has experienced little practical success.

B) ODBC requires developers to have a thorough knowledge of many DBMS native libraries.

C) ODBC can be used to access data from spreadsheets.

D) ODBC has an object-oriented interface.

Answer: C AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To learn the purpose, features, and facilities of ODBC Classification: Concept

11 ..

65) According to the ODBC standard, which of the following is not part of the specification of a data source?

A) The associated DBMS B) The database C) The driver D) The operating system Answer: C AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To learn the purpose, features, and facilities of ODBC Classification: Concept 66) Which does the ODBC standard not define a means of doing?

A) Start transactions B) Rollback transactions C) Read a Microsoft Word document D) Issue SQL commands Answer: C AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To learn the purpose, features, and facilities of ODBC Classification: Concept 67) Which of the following is a function performed by the driver manager in ODBC? A) Submit SQL statements to the data source B) Determine the type of DBMS that processes a given ODBC data source C) Load the appropriate ODBC driver into memory D) Both B and C are correct Answer: D AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To learn the purpose, features, and facilities of ODBC Classification: Concept 68) The intermediary between the application and the DBMS drivers in the ODBC architecture is the ________.

A) driver manager B) DBMS C) ODBC driver D) data source Answer: A AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To learn the purpose, features, and facilities of ODBC Classification: Concept

12 ..

69) Which of the following is a task performed by the driver according to the ODBC standard?

A) Determines the appropriate DBMS B) Validates the format of the ODBC command received from the application C) Converts data source error codes into ODBC standard error codes D) Converts the data source into an SQL-compliant data structure Answer: C AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To learn the purpose, features, and facilities of ODBC Classification: Concept 70) The ________ processes ODBC requests and submits specific SQL statements to a given type of data source.

A) driver manager B) ADO C) driver D) source converter Answer: C AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To learn the purpose, features, and facilities of ODBC Classification: Concept 71) A data source that is fully SQL-compliant would use what type of DBMS driver?

A) Single-tier B) Multiple-tier C) SQL transform D) Text-based Answer: B AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To learn the purpose, features, and facilities of ODBC Classification: Concept 72) How does an application determine the level of ODBC conformance available from a driver?

A) The application makes a call to the driver manager.

B) The application makes a call to the data source.

C) The application makes a call to the driver.

D) The developer must determine the level of conformance before the application is written.

Answer: C AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To learn the purpose, features, and facilities of ODBC Classification: Concept

13 ..

73) Support for a scrollable cursor is a sign of what type of conformance in a DBMS driver?

A) Level 1 API B) Extended SQL Grammar C) Core API D) Level 2 API Answer: D AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To learn the purpose, features, and facilities of ODBC Classification: Concept 74) Support for subqueries and creating indexes is a sign of what type of SQL grammar conformance in a DBMS driver?

A) Level 2 API Grammar B) Minimum SQL Grammar C) Core SQL Grammar D) Extended SQL Grammar Answer: C AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Difficult LO: To learn the purpose, features, and facilities of ODBC Classification: Concept 75) A ________ data source can be shared among database users as long as they have the same DBMS driver and privilege to access the database.

A) file B) common C) user D) system Answer: A AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To learn the purpose, features, and facilities of ODBC Classification: Concept 76) A data source that is local to a single computer and can be used by the operating system and any user on that computer is called a ________ data source.

A) file B) user C) shared D) system Answer: D AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To learn the purpose, features, and facilities of ODBC Classification: Concept 14 ..

77) In general, for Web applications it is best to create what type of data source on the Web server?

A) File B) User C) Shared D) System Answer: D AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To learn the purpose, features, and facilities of ODBC Classification: Concept 78) OLE DB breaks the features and functions of a DBMS into what type of objects?

A) COM B) JSP C) MTS D) ODBC Answer: A AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To understand the nature and goals of OLE DB Classification: Concept 79) Which of the following is not true about OLE DB? A) Scripting languages can access OLE DB. B) OLE DB is object-oriented.

C) OLE DB can access ODBC data sources.

D) OLE DB can access non-relational data sources.

Answer: A AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To understand the nature and goals of OLE DB Classification: Concept 80) The characteristics of an object are called ________.

A) classes B) collections C) methods D) properties Answer: D AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To understand the nature and goals of OLE DB Classification: Concept

15 ..

81) The actions that an object can perform are called ________.

A) procedures B) collections C) methods D) properties Answer: C AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To understand the nature and goals of OLE DB Classification: Concept 82) An important method of a collection is a(n) ________, which can be used to pass through or otherwise identify the items in the collection.

A) iterator B) identifier C) converter D) transformer Answer: A AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Difficult LO: To understand the nature and goals of OLE DB Classification: Concept 83) A set of objects and the properties and methods that they expose are known as a(n) ________.

A) provider B) interface C) implementation D) instantiation Answer: B AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To understand the nature and goals of OLE DB Classification: Concept 84) Which of the following is a type of OLE DB data provider?

A) Relational data provider B) Method provider C) Sequential data provider D) Tabular data provider Answer: D AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To understand the nature and goals of OLE DB Classification: Concept

16 ..

85) Which standard interface in OLE DB is invoked to declare a forward-only cursor?

A) IRowSet B) IAccessor C) IColumnsInfo D) adXact Answer: A AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Difficult LO: To understand the nature and goals of OLE DB Classification: Concept 86) Which of the following is not true of ADO? A) ADO is a simple object model for OLE DB data consumers.

B) ADO can be used from VBScript and JavaScript.

C) ADO is harder to understand than OLE DB. D) ADO can be called from languages such as Visual Basic.NET, Java and C#.

Answer: C AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To learn the characteristics and object model of ADO.NET Classification: Concept 87) Which of the following is not true about ADO.NET? A) It is an improved and expanded version of ADO. B) It facilitates the transformation of XML documents to and from relational database constructs.

C) It provides the ability to create and process in-memory databases.

D) Microsoft does not supply a data provider for Oracle database.

Answer: D AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To learn the characteristics and object model of ADO.NET Classification: Concept 88) ADO.NET in-memory databases are called ________.

A) adoBases B) adoDatabases C) DataSets D) dotNetDatabases Answer: C AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To learn the characteristics and object model of ADO.NET Classification: Concept

17 ..

89) An ADO.NET Data Provider is a(n) ________ that provides ADO.NET services.

A) class library B) windows application C) Web application D) XML service Answer: A AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To learn the characteristics and object model of ADO.NET Classification: Concept 90) Which of the following is not true about ADO.NET DataSets?

A) They can have multiple tables and relationships.

B) They can have foreign keys and surrogate keys.

C) They can support referential integrity actions.

D) Operations performed on DataSets are also performed on the data on disk.

Answer: D AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To learn the characteristics and object model of ADO.NET Classification: Concept 91) Which of the following is true of JDBC? A) Programs must be written in Java.

B) JDBC only works with open-source products.

C) JDBC is only available for Unix-like operating systems, such as Linux.

D) JDBC is actually a DBMS. Answer: A AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To understand the characteristics of JDBC and the four types of JDBC drivers Classification: Concept 92) What type of JDBC driver is known as a JDBC-ODBC bridge?

A) Type 1 driver B) Type 2 driver C) Type 3 driver D) Type 4 driver Answer: A AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To understand the characteristics of JDBC and the four types of JDBC drivers Classification: Concept

18 ..

93) What type of JDBC driver translates JDBC calls into DBMS-independent network protocols?

A) Type 1 driver B) Type 2 driver C) Type 3 driver D) Type 4 driver Answer: C AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To understand the characteristics of JDBC and the four types of JDBC drivers Classification: Concept 94) What type of JDBC driver connects to the native API of the DBMS? A) Type 1 driver B) Type 2 driver C) Type 3 driver D) Type 4 driver Answer: B AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To understand the characteristics of JDBC and the four types of JDBC drivers Classification: Concept 95) What type of JDBC driver translates JDBC calls into DBMS-specific network protocols?

A) Type 1 driver B) Type 2 driver C) Type 3 driver D) Type 4 driver Answer: D AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To understand the characteristics of JDBC and the four types of JDBC drivers Classification: Concept 96) A Java virtual machine is actually a ________.

A) program compiler B) JDBC data source C) bytecode interpreter D) JDBC driver Answer: C AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To understand the characteristics of JDBC and the four types of JDBC drivers Classification: Concept

19 ..

97) Which of the following is not true about bytecode interpretation?

A) It may be performed on the client or the server.

B) Only one bytecode interpreter is needed for all machine architectures.

C) It is slower than running a program compiled into machine code.

D) It increases portability.

Answer: B AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Difficult LO: To understand the characteristics of JDBC and the four types of JDBC drivers Classification: Concept 98) Applet bytecode is transmitted to the user's computer via ________.

A) the JDBC driver B) the Java virtual machine C) HTTP D) the bytecode interpreter Answer: C AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To understand the characteristics of JDBC and the four types of JDBC drivers Classification: Concept 99) A(n) ________ is a Java program that is interpreted and executed by a bytecode interpreter on the Web server.

A) applet B) Java virtual machine C) servlet D) JDBC translator Answer: C AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To understand the characteristics of JDBC and the four types of JDBC drivers Classification: Concept 100) In a three-tier or n-tier architecture, which type of JDBC driver can be used if the DBMS and the Web server are running on the same computer?

A) Only Type 1 and Type 2 B) All four Types C) Only Type 3 and Type 4 D) Only Type 2 and Type 3 Answer: B AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Difficult LO: To understand the characteristics of JDBC and the four types of JDBC drivers Classification: Concept

20 ..

101) The first step in using a JDBC driver is to ________.

A) establish a connection to the database B) load the driver C) create a statement D) call the DriverManager object Answer: B AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To understand the characteristics of JDBC and the four types of JDBC drivers Classification: Concept 102) The coding for Java Server Pages must be written in ________.

A) Java B) JavaScript C) C++ D) Both A and B are correct Answer: A AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To understand the nature of JSP and know the differences between JSP and ASP.NET Classification: Concept 103) Which of the following is true about JSP code?

A) It must be written in Java or JavaScript.

B) It does not have access to HTTP functionality.

C) It must be coded as complete Java classes and methods.

D) It is automatically converted into Java servlets.

Answer: D AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To understand the nature of JSP and know the differences between JSP and ASP.NET Classification: Concept 104) Which of the following is not true about Tomcat?

A) It is a servlet processor.

B) It can be used as a standalone Web server.

C) It is often used in conjunction with Apache.

D) It is an applet processor.

Answer: D AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To understand the nature of JSP and know the differences between JSP and ASP.NET Classification: Concept

21 ..

105) JSP pages ________.

A) are automatically compiled by the servlet processor as needed B) are required to be compiled by the developer before being made public C) are automatically checked for syntax errors by the servlet as they are written D) uses more memory than CGI files Answer: A AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Difficult LO: To understand the nature of JSP and know the differences between JSP and ASP.NET Classification: Concept 106) As compared to CGI files, JSP pages ________.

A) are less memory efficient B) require more processor time C) execute faster D) keep more copies of a given page in memory Answer: C AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Difficult LO: To understand the nature of JSP and know the differences between JSP and ASP.NET Classification: Concept 107) In PHP, any programming language statements that are to be processed on the server must be enclosed in ________.

A) <!-- and --!> B) [php and php] C) (php and php) D) <?php and ?> Answer: D AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To be able to construct Web database applications pages using PHP Classification: Concept 108) The first PHP element to be created is the ________.

A) Command object B) Connection object C) Errors collection D) Parameters collection Answer: B AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To be able to construct Web database applications pages using PHP Classification: Concept

22 ..

109) The final step of using a PHP connection to a DBMS is to ________.

A) open the connection B) test the connection C) close the connection D) process the query results Answer: C AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To be able to construct Web database applications pages using PHP Classification: Concept 110) PDO stands for ________.

A) PHP Data Objects B) PHP Design Objects C) Personal Data Objects D) Personal Design Objects Answer: A AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To be able to construct Web database applications pages using PHP Classification: Concept 111) HTML is an application of ________.

A) SGML B) XML C) SOAP D) XSLT Answer: A AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To understand HTML and PHP Classification: Concept 112) XML stands for ________.

A) Experimental Markup Language B) Extendable Markup Language C) Extensible Markup Language D) Active X-control Markup Language Answer: C AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To understand the importance of XML Classification: Concept

23 ..

113) Which of the following is not true about XML? A) It is a subset of SGML. B) Additional standards and capabilities have been added to XML processing.

C) It is a hybrid of document processing and database processing.

D) It is a subset of HTML. Answer: D AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To understand the importance of XML Classification: Concept 114) SOAP originally stood for ________.

A) Simple Operational Application Protocol B) Standard Operational Application Protocol C) Simple Object Application Protocol D) Simple Object Access Protocol Answer: D AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To understand the importance of XML Classification: Concept 115) SOAP has become ________.

A) just a name, not an acronym B) a standard protocol for sending any type of message C) an old technology replaced by XML D) Both A and B are correct Answer: D AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To understand the importance of XML Classification: Concept

24 ..

116) The SQL Server statement SELECT * FROM Table01 FOR XML RAW tells SQL Server to place the data values from the columns in the table into XML ________.

A) elements B) attributes C) elements or attributes, as chosen by SQL Server D) elements or attributes, as designated by the XML Schema Answer: B AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To learn the basic concepts involved in using the SQL SELECT . . . FOR XML statement Classification: Concept 117) Explain the relationships among native DBMS libraries, ODBC, OLE DB, ADO, and ADO.NET and why each led to the development of the next.

Answer: All of these provide means of data access. Native DBMS libraries are the least abstract and are DBMS-specific access methods. Due to the large numbers of data sources that developers have to deal with, learning that many DBMS libraries was cumbersome. ODBC developed as a more abstract means of data access that shielded developers from having to learn multiple native DBMS libraries. One shortcoming of ODBC, however, was that it can only access data from sources that have a table-like structure. Therefore, OLE DB was developed as a means of accessing data from a much broader range of data source types. OLE DB is an objectoriented interface that is suitable for use by many object-oriented languages. Many developers, however, use languages such as Visual Basic and scripting languages that cannot access OLE DB. ADO was therefore developed to further abstract OLE DB and provide access to OLE DB functionality to programming languages that cannot directly access OLE DB. ADO has been followed by ADO.NET, which is part of Microsoft's .NET initiative. It extends the functionality of ADO. AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To understand the nature and characteristics of the data environment that surrounds Internet technology database applications Classification: Application

25 ..

118) Briefly describe the components of the ODBC architecture.

Answer: In the ODBC architecture, the application program, driver manager, and DBMS drivers reside on the Web server, and the database and DBMS reside on the database server. The combination of the database and its associated DBMS comprise the data source. The data source contains the data used by the application. The application program talks to the driver manager.

When the application requests a connection, the driver manager checks to see which DBMS the data source uses and loads the appropriate DBMS driver into memory. The driver manager also checks the format of the ODBC requests coming from the application program. The DBMS driver processes the ODBC requests and submits the SQL statements to the data source. The driver also ensures that the responses coming from the data source are in appropriate ODBC format.

AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To learn the purpose, features, and facilities of ODBC Classification: Concept 119) What are the different types of conformance levels within the ODBC standard, and why do they exist?

Answer: There are two types of conformance levels within the ODBC standard—ODBC conformance and SQL conformance. ODBC conformance deals with the features and functions that are available to the application program through the DBMS driver API. The SQL conformance standard deals with the SQL statements, expressions, and data types that the driver can process. The reason for these levels is to accommodate the varying ability of different vendors to comply with the power and expressiveness of the ODBC standard and the SQL language. Without these different levels of compliance, the ODBC standard would either be too simple to be very useful, or too rigorous for many vendors to comply with.

AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Difficult LO: To learn the purpose, features, and facilities of ODBC Classification: Synthesis 120) Why is the decomposition of the features and functions of a DBMS into different objects an advantage for OLE DB? Answer: First, by breaking the features of the DBMS into different objects, vendors have the option of implementing only a portion of their product in OLE DB. This is significant since the all-or-nothing approach required with ODBC was a major disincentive to vendors because of the large investment necessary to achieve ODBC compliance. OLE DB allows the vendor to increase their OLE DB participation in a piecemeal fashion. Second, it allows vendors to create multiple interfaces to their products that have different properties and methods exposed. This improves flexibility for data consumers since they can select an interface that only provides the methods they need, and it is more flexible for data providers since they can change the implementation of an interface without negatively impacting their data consumers.

AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Difficult LO: To understand the nature and goals of OLE DB Classification: Application 26 ..

121) What is ADO.NET and what is an ADO.NET DataSet? Answer: ADO.NET is an improved and expanded version of Active Data Objects (ADO).

ADO.NET handles the transformation of XML documents between the documents and associated relational databases. ADO.NET can also create and process in-memory databases called datasets. ADO.NET uses ADO.NET data providers, which are class libraries of ADO.NET services, to communicate with (1) Oracle, (2) SQL server and (3) any OLE DBcompliant DBMS. (The information necessary to write ADO.NET class libraries is publicly available so that other data providers may be written.) An ADO.NET dataset is an in-memory database maintained by ADO.NET. Datasets have all the characteristics, features and functions of regular databases, but an ADO.NET DataSet is disconnected from the database. This allows ADO.NET to manipulate the dataset without changing the associated database until ADO.NET is ready to make changes.

AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Difficult LO: To learn the characteristics and object model of ADO.NET Classification: Application 122) Distinguish among the four types of JDBC drivers.

Answer: Type 1 drivers are JDBC-ODBC bridge drivers that resolve some of the inconsistencies between Java and C/C++ to provide access to ODBC data sources from Java. Type 2 drivers are written wholly in Java, and they connect to the native API of the DBMS. Type 3 and Type 4 drivers have network capabilities. Type 3 drivers transform JDBC calls into a DBMSindependent network protocol. Type 4 drivers transform JDBC calls into DBMS-specific network protocols.

AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To understand the characteristics of JDBC and the four types of JDBC drivers Classification: Concept 123) Compare and contrast servlets and applets.

Answer: Servlets and applets are both Java programs compiled into machine-independent bytecode. Both are interpreted and executed by bytecode interpreters called Java virtual machines. Both are invoked using the HTTP protocol. Servlets, however, are interpreted and executed on the Web server computer. It then sends its results to the user's computer via the response capabilities of HTTP. Applets, on the other hand, are interpreted and executed on the user's computer. The bytecode for the applet is transmitted via HTTP to the user's computer, where the Java virtual machine will interpret and execute it locally.

AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To understand the nature of JSP and know the differences between JSP and ASP.NET Classification: Concept

27 ..

124) Explain the process by which JSP pages are compiled.

Answer: All JSP pages are compiled into servlets. When a JSP page is requested, the servlet processor checks to see if the uncompiled version of the JSP page is older or newer than the compiled servlet. If the servlet is older than the uncompiled version of the JSP page, then the JSP page is parsed into standard Java source code and is recompiled into a new version of the servlet.

This new version of the servlet is then loaded into memory. If the uncompiled version of the JSP page was created at or before the time of the current servlet, the servlet processor checks to see if the current servlet is already loaded into memory. If it is not, then the servlet is loaded. In either case, the servlet is then ready to be executed by the servlet processor.

AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To understand the nature of JSP and know the differences between JSP and ASP.NET Classification: Concept 125) Briefly describe PHP. Answer: PHP, which is an abbreviation for PHP: Hypertext Processor, is a popular scripting language that can be embedded in Web pages. PHP allows users to connect to databases, run SQL commands against the databases, and then process the results of the SQL commands for display on Web pages. PHP commands are enclosed in <?php and ?> elements.

AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To understand HTML and PHP Classification: Concept 126) Briefly describe NetBeans.

Answer: NetBeans is an open-source Integrated Development Environment (IDE). An IDE is intended as a complete application development framework, with all the tools needed to create applications easily and conveniently available to application developers. For use with PHP, a PHP plugin is available for NetBeans to provide a PHP development environment within the NetBeans IDE. AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To be able to construct Web database applications pages using PHP Classification: Concept 127) What is XML, and why is it significantly better than HTML? Answer: XML stands for Extensible Markup Language, and it is a subset of Standard Generalized Markup Language (SGML). XML is significantly better than HTML because: (1) XML provides a clean break between document structure, content, and materialization, which prevents the confounding of these functions; and (2) while XML is standardized, it allows for extension by application developers. The structure of any document is formally defined with XML in a standardized way.

AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To understand the importance of XML Classification: Concept 28 ..

128) Give an example of how XML can be used with a DBMS. Answer: One example is the use of XML with SQL Server. Here we use the SQL FOR XML clause to retrieve XML data from the database. The query results are returned to a single cell.

This output can be expanded and copied to other documents.

AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To learn the basic concepts involved in using the SQL SELECT . . . FOR XML statement Classification: Concept

29 ..

Database Processing, 14e (Kroenke) Chapter 12: Big Data, DataWarehouses, and Business Intelligence Systems 1) Big Data is the name given to the enormous datasets generated by Web 2.0 applications.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To learn the basic concepts of Big Data, structured storage, and the MapReduce process Classification: Concept 2) Business Intelligence (BI) systems are information systems that help users analyze and use data.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To learn the basic concepts of business intelligence (BI) systems Classification: Concept 3) Business Intelligence (BI) systems support operational activities.

Answer: FALSE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To learn the basic concepts of business intelligence (BI) systems Classification: Concept 4) Business Intelligence (BI) systems obtain data in three different ways.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To learn the basic concepts of business intelligence (BI) systems Classification: Concept 5) Business Intelligence (BI) reporting systems are used to filter data, sort data, group data, and make simple calculations based on the data.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To learn the basic concepts of business intelligence (BI) systems Classification: Concept 6) Business Intelligence (BI) reporting systems can analyze data using standard SQL. Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To learn the basic concepts of business intelligence (BI) systems Classification: Concept 1 ..

7) Business Intelligence (BI) reporting systems summarize the current status of business activities and compare that status with past events, but not with predicted future activities.

Answer: FALSE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Difficult LO: To learn the basic concepts of business intelligence (BI) systems Classification: Concept 8) Data mining uses sophisticated statistical and mathematical techniques to perform what-if analyses, to make predictions, and to facilitate decision making.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To learn the basic concepts of online analytical processing (OLAP) and data mining Classification: Concept 9) Report delivery is more important for data mining than it is for reporting systems.

Answer: FALSE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To learn the basic concepts of business intelligence (BI) systems; To learn the basic concepts of online analytical processing (OLAP) and data mining Classification: Concept 10) A data warehouse is a database system that has data, programs, and personnel specialized in Business Intelligence (BI) processing.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To learn the basic concepts of data warehouses and data marts Classification: Concept 11) Data warehouses are populated with data prepared by data extraction, transformation, and load (ETL) programs.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To learn the basic concepts of data warehouses and data marts Classification: Concept 12) Data warehouse data are frequently denormalized.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To learn the basic concepts of data warehouses and data marts Classification: Concept 2 ..

13) Data warehouses also store the data warehouse metadata.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Difficult LO: To learn the basic concepts of data warehouses and data marts Classification: Concept 14) Data warehouses often include data purchased from outside vendors.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Difficult LO: To learn the basic concepts of data warehouses and data marts Classification: Concept 15) Metadata about the data's source, format, assumptions, and constraints are kept in a data warehouse metadata database.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To learn the basic concepts of data warehouses and data marts Classification: Concept 16) Problematic data are called dirty data.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To learn the basic concepts of data warehouses and data marts Classification: Concept 17) A data mart is a collection of data that addresses a particular component of a functional area of a business.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To learn the basic concepts of data warehouses and data marts Classification: Concept 18) Operational databases store historical data.

Answer: FALSE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To learn the basic concepts of data warehouses and data marts Classification: Concept

3 ..

19) Dimensional databases are used for analytical data processing.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To learn the basic concepts of dimensional databases Classification: Concept 20) Dimensional databases use the star schema.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To learn the basic concepts of dimensional databases Classification: Concept 21) Operational databases contain a fact table.

Answer: FALSE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To learn the basic concepts of dimensional databases Classification: Concept 22) A star schema resembles a star, with a dimension table at the center and fact tables radiating out from the center.

Answer: FALSE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To learn the basic concepts of dimensional databases Classification: Concept 23) In a snowflake table, each dimension table is normalized.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To learn the basic concepts of dimensional databases Classification: Concept 24) Business Intelligence (BI) reporting systems are intended to create meaningful information from disparate data sources and to deliver that information to the proper users on a timely basis.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To learn the basic concepts of business intelligence (BI) systems Classification: Concept

4 ..

25) RFM analysis is a way of analyzing and ranking customers based on online survey data.

Answer: FALSE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To learn the basic concepts of business intelligence (BI) systems Classification: Concept 26) In a common form of RFM analysis, customers are sorted into five groups and given an associated score depending on their group.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To learn the basic concepts of business intelligence (BI) systems Classification: Concept 27) In a common form of RFM analysis, customers with an R score of 5 are in the 20% of customers who have the most recent orders.

Answer: FALSE AACSB: Information Technology; Application of Knowledge Difficulty: Moderate LO: To learn the basic concepts of business intelligence (BI) systems Classification: Concept 28) In RFM analysis, R stands for "how recently."

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To learn the basic concepts of business intelligence (BI) systems Classification: Concept 29) In RFM analysis, F stands for "how frequently."

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To learn the basic concepts of business intelligence (BI) systems Classification: Concept 30) In RFM analysis, M stands for "how much money."

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To learn the basic concepts of business intelligence (BI) systems Classification: Concept

5 ..

31) In a common form of RFM analysis, a score of 1 is "high" or "good" while a score of 5 is "low" or "bad."

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Difficult LO: To learn the basic concepts of business intelligence (BI) systems Classification: Concept 32) In a common form of RFM analysis, an RFM score of {5 1 1} means that the customer orders frequently and orders items of high monetary value but has not ordered anything for some time.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology; Application of Knowledge Difficulty: Moderate LO: To learn the basic concepts of business intelligence (BI) systems Classification: Concept 33) OLAP provides the ability to sum, count, average, and perform other simple arithmetic operations on groups of data.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To learn the basic concepts of online analytical processing (OLAP) and data mining Classification: Concept 34) An OLAP cube is limited to three axes.

Answer: FALSE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Difficult LO: To learn the basic concepts of online analytical processing (OLAP) and data mining Classification: Concept 35) The term drill down refers to the capability of seeing the data in smaller and smaller units.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To learn the basic concepts of online analytical processing (OLAP) and data mining Classification: Concept 36) To create an OLAP report for an SQL Server 2014 database, use the PivotTable tool in SQL Server 2014.

Answer: FALSE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To learn the basic concepts of online analytical processing (OLAP) and data mining Classification: Concept 6 ..

37) When creating an OLAP report based on SQL Server 2014 data, it is often a good idea to create a view to organize the data needed for the OLAP report.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To learn the basic concepts of online analytical processing (OLAP) and data mining Classification: Concept 38) Microsoft Excel 2013 allows us to connect directly to an SQL Server 2014 database when building a PivotTable.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To learn the basic concepts of online analytical processing (OLAP) and data mining Classification: Concept 39) Microsoft Excel 2013 cannot import SQL Server 2014 data directly into a PivotTable report, but must first place the data into a worksheet.

Answer: FALSE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To learn the basic concepts of online analytical processing (OLAP) and data mining Classification: Concept 40) Although Microsoft Excel 2013 will create a PivotTable report using SQL Server 2014 data, it does not have formatting tools that can be used with the report.

Answer: FALSE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To learn the basic concepts of online analytical processing (OLAP) and data mining Classification: Concept 41) Data mining is the application of mathematical and statistical techniques to find patterns and relationships that can be used to classify and predict future outcomes.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To learn the basic concepts of online analytical processing (OLAP) and data mining Classification: Concept 42) Most data mining techniques are simple and easy to use.

Answer: FALSE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To learn the basic concepts of online analytical processing (OLAP) and data mining Classification: Concept 7 ..

43) The movement that uses different database methods than the relational model and/or SQL is called the NoSQL movement.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To learn the basic concepts of Big Data, structured storage, and the MapReduce process Classification: Concept 44) Most of NoSQL nonrelational database methodologies are known as structured storage.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To learn the basic concepts of Big Data, structured storage, and the MapReduce process Classification: Concept 45) NoSQL really stands of "Not only SQL." Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To learn the basic concepts of Big Data, structured storage, and the MapReduce process Classification: Concept 46) Facebook uses the Apache Software Foundation's Cassandra NoSQL database.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To learn the basic concepts of Big Data, structured storage, and the MapReduce process Classification: Concept 47) Amazon.com's Dynamo was an early example of structured storage.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To learn the basic concepts of Big Data, structured storage, and the MapReduce process Classification: Concept 48) Google's Bigtable was an early example of structured storage.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To learn the basic concepts of Big Data, structured storage, and the MapReduce process Classification: Concept

8 ..

49) Structured storage column families are indistinguishable from relational database tables.

Answer: FALSE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To learn the basic concepts of Big Data, structured storage, and the MapReduce process Classification: Concept 50) In the MapReduce process, the Reduce step is followed by the Map step.

Answer: FALSE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To learn the basic concepts of Big Data, structured storage, and the MapReduce process Classification: Concept 51) Business Intelligence (BI) systems do which of the following?

A) Analyze current and past activities B) Predict future events C) Record and process transactions D) Both A and B are correct Answer: D AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To learn the basic concepts of business intelligence (BI) systems Classification: Concept 52) Business Intelligence (BI) systems fall into which of the following categories?

A) Processing B) Reporting C) Data mining D) Both B and C are correct Answer: D AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To learn the basic concepts of business intelligence (BI) systems Classification: Concept 53) Business Intelligence (BI) systems obtain their data by all of the following means except ________.

A) read and process data from an operational database B) process extracts from operational databases C) process data purchased from data vendors D) read and process data entered by BI system users Answer: D AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To learn the basic concepts of business intelligence (BI) systems Classification: Concept 9 ..

54) Business Intelligence (BI) reporting systems can do which of the following operations?

A) Filter data B) Group data C) Modify data D) Both A and B are correct Answer: D AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To learn the basic concepts of business intelligence (BI) systems Classification: Concept 55) One Business Intelligence (BI) reporting system that uses extensions to SQL is ________.

A) cluster analysis B) OLAP C) regression analysis D) RFM analysis Answer: B AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To learn the basic concepts of business intelligence (BI) systems Classification: Concept 56) Data mining applications are used to accomplish all of the following tasks except ________.

A) perform what-if analysis B) make predications C) facilitate decision making D) update the database Answer: D AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To learn the basic concepts of online analytical processing (OLAP) and data mining Classification: Concept 57) Which of the following is (are) true about data mining applications?

A) They use sophisticated mathematical techniques.

B) They use sophisticated statistical techniques.

C) Their report delivery is more important than report delivery for reporting systems.

D) Both A and B are correct Answer: D AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Difficult LO: To learn the basic concepts of online analytical processing (OLAP) and data mining Classification: Concept

10 ..

58) Which of the following is not a reason that operational data are difficult to read?

A) Dirty data B) Current data C) Nonintegrated data D) Missing values Answer: B AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To learn the basic concepts of business intelligence (BI) systems Classification: Concept 59) We have obtained access to the company's operational data. In one record, we find that a customer's age has been recorded as "337." This is an example of ________.

A) dirty data B) inconsistent data C) nonintegrated data D) a "wrong format" problem Answer: A AACSB: Information Technology; Application of Knowledge Difficulty: Moderate LO: To learn the basic concepts of business intelligence (BI) systems Classification: Application 60) We have obtained access to the company's operational data. We examine 50 records for customers with phone numbers that should use the current area code of 345. Of these 50 records, we find 10 that still use an older area code of 567. This is an example of ________.

A) dirty data B) inconsistent data C) nonintegrated data D) a "too much data" problem Answer: B AACSB: Information Technology; Application of Knowledge Difficulty: Difficult LO: To learn the basic concepts of business intelligence (BI) systems Classification: Application

11 ..

61) We have obtained access to the company's operational data. We have been asked to produce a report with an item by item analysis of sales, but the only sales figure available is the total sale value for each order. This is an example of ________.

A) dirty data B) inconsistent data C) nonintegrated data D) a "wrong format" problem Answer: D AACSB: Information Technology; Application of Knowledge Difficulty: Difficult LO: To learn the basic concepts of business intelligence (BI) systems Classification: Application 62) A data warehouse database differs from an operational database because ________.

A) data warehouse data are not stored in tables B) data warehouse databases do not have metadata C) data warehouse data are often denormalized D) Both B and C are correct Answer: C AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To learn the basic concepts of data warehouses and data marts Classification: Concept 63) Which of the following is not a component of a data warehouse?

A) Data extract, transform, and load (ETL) preparation programs B) Data warehouse data C) Operational database updates D) Data warehouse metadata Answer: C AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To learn the basic concepts of data warehouses and data marts Classification: Concept 64) A data mart differs from a data warehouse in that ________.

A) it has a larger database B) it deals with a particular component or functional area of the business C) data mart users must have more data management expertise than data warehouse employees D) it is updated more frequently by the data mart users Answer: B AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To learn the basic concepts of data warehouses and data marts Classification: Concept

12 ..

65) Data warehouses use a(n) ________.

A) operational database B) dimensional database C) structured storage D) object-relational data model Answer: B AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To learn the basic concepts of data warehouses and data marts Classification: Concept 66) Slowly changing dimensions are handled by a(n) ________.

A) operational database B) dimensional database C) structured storage D) object-relational data model Answer: B AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To learn the basic concepts of dimensional databases Classification: Concept 67) Dimensional databases are used to track historical data, and therefore must have a(n) ________.

A) time dimension B) customer dimension C) sales dimension D) order dimension Answer: A AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To learn the basic concepts of dimensional databases Classification: Concept 68) Star schemas have a ________ at the center of the star.

A) fact table B) dimension table C) map table D) reduce table Answer: A AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To learn the basic concepts of dimensional databases Classification: Concept

13 ..

69) Snowflake schemas have normalized ________.

A) fact tables B) dimension tables C) map tables D) reduce tables Answer: B AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To learn the basic concepts of dimensional databases Classification: Concept 70) A Business Intelligence (BI) reporting system ________.

A) creates meaningful information from disparate data sources B) delivers information to users at the DBA's convenience C) uses statistical procedures to predict future events D) uses operational data Answer: A AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To learn the basic concepts of business intelligence (BI) systems Classification: Concept 71) RFM analysis analyzes and ranks customers based on ________.

A) their purchasing patterns B) their income status C) their residential location D) Both A and B are correct Answer: A AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To learn the basic concepts of business intelligence (BI) systems Classification: Concept 72) The "R" in RFM analysis stands for ________.

A) rank B) recent C) relationship D) readiness Answer: B AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To learn the basic concepts of business intelligence (BI) systems Classification: Concept

14 ..

73) The "M" in RFM analysis stands for ________.

A) money B) mostly C) modest D) modern Answer: A AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To learn the basic concepts of business intelligence (BI) systems Classification: Concept 74) RFM scores commonly range from ________, with ________ being the "high" or "most desirable" (from the vendor's point of view) score.

A) 0 to 5; 0 B) 0 to 5; 5 C) 1 to 5; 1 D) 1 to 5, 5 Answer: C AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To learn the basic concepts of business intelligence (BI) systems Classification: Concept 75) We have done an RFM analysis on our customer data. John Smith has a score of {5 1 1}.

This means that John ________.

A) has ordered recently, and orders a lot when he orders B) hasn't ordered recently, but orders a lot when he orders C) has ordered recently, but doesn't order a lot when he orders D) hasn't ordered recently, and doesn't order a lot when he orders Answer: B AACSB: Information Technology; Application of Knowledge Difficulty: Moderate LO: To learn the basic concepts of business intelligence (BI) systems Classification: Application 76) OLAP stands for ________.

A) OnLine Analytical Processing B) OffLine Analytical Processing C) OnLine Analysis Process D) Old, Lazy And Particular Answer: A AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To learn the basic concepts of online analytical processing (OLAP) and data mining Classification: Concept

15 ..

77) In OLAP, the data item of interest is called a ________.

A) level B) dimension C) measure D) member Answer: C AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To learn the basic concepts of online analytical processing (OLAP) and data mining Classification: Concept 78) In OLAP, the characteristic of a measure is called a ________.

A) level B) dimension C) slice D) member Answer: B AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To learn the basic concepts of online analytical processing (OLAP) and data mining Classification: Concept 79) An OLAP cube is called that because some products show OLAP displays on ________ axes.

A) one B) two C) three D) four Answer: C AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To learn the basic concepts of online analytical processing (OLAP) and data mining Classification: Concept 80) The term drill down means the user wants to ________.

A) summarize data B) get older data C) sort data D) get more details Answer: D AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To learn the basic concepts of online analytical processing (OLAP) and data mining Classification: Concept

16 ..

81) To create an OLAP report for an SQL Server 2014 database, we can build a PivotTable in ________.

A) Microsoft Access 2013 B) Microsoft Word 2013 C) Microsoft Visio 2013 D) Microsoft Excel 2013 Answer: D AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To learn the basic concepts of online analytical processing (OLAP) and data mining Classification: Concept 82) To use an SQL Server 2014 database in an Microsoft Excel 2013 PivotTable, it is generally useful to ________.

A) create a view in SQL Server 2014 to organize the data B) store the needed data in an Excel worksheet C) store the needed data in a Word document D) store the needed data in a Visio diagram Answer: A AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To learn the basic concepts of online analytical processing (OLAP) and data mining Classification: Concept 83) To arrange the PivotTable columns and rows in Microsoft Excel 2013, we use the ________.

A) PivotTable Control B) PivotTable dialog box C) PivotTable Field List D) Pivot Table Wizard Answer: C AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To learn the basic concepts of online analytical processing (OLAP) and data mining Classification: Concept 84) To format a PivotTable in Microsoft Excel 2013, we use the ________.

A) Design command tab in the PivotTable Tools contextual command tab B) Format command tab in the PivotTable Tools contextual command tab C) Design command tab in the Report Tools contextual command tab D) Format command tab in the Report Tools contextual command tab Answer: A AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To learn the basic concepts of online analytical processing (OLAP) and data mining Classification: Concept

17 ..

85) When distributed databases break the database into sections and store the sections on different servers, this is known as ________.

A) replication B) partitioning C) disbursing D) distributed two-phase locking Answer: B AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To learn the basic concepts of distributed databases and object-relational databases Classification: Concept 86) When distributed databases create copies of the database on different servers, this is known as ________.

A) replication B) partitioning C) disbursing D) distributed two-phase locking Answer: A AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To learn the basic concepts of distributed databases and object-relational databases Classification: Concept 87) DBMSs associated with the NoSQL movement are often known as ________.

A) RDBMSs B) OODBMSs C) SSDBMSs D) structured storage Answer: D AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To learn the basic concepts of Big Data, structured storage, and the MapReduce process Classification: Concept 88) The structured storage equivalent of an RDBMS table is a ________.

A) column B) super column C) column family D) map Answer: C AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To learn the basic concepts of Big Data, structured storage, and the MapReduce process Classification: Concept

18 ..

89) In the MapReduce process, the first step is the ________ step.

A) column B) reduce C) column family D) map Answer: D AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To learn the basic concepts of Big Data, structured storage, and the MapReduce process Classification: Concept 90) Hadoop is a(n) ________.

A) RDMBS B) OODBMS C) distributed file system (DFS) D) Web server Answer: C AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To learn the basic concepts of Big Data, structured storage, and the MapReduce process Classification: Concept 91) One of the goals of an object-relational database is to allow ________ to persist in the database.

A) data structures B) objects C) methods D) Java variables Answer: B AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To learn the basic concepts of distributed databases and object-relational databases Classification: Concept 92) ________ is a DBMS that provides a full set of object-relational features.

A) Oracle Database B) Microsoft Access C) Microsoft SQL Server 2014 D) MySQL Answer: A AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To learn the basic concepts of distributed databases and object-relational databases Classification: Concept

19 ..

93) Virtualization is an attempt to do a better job of using which hardware resources in a computer?

A) Memory and monitors B) CPU and memory C) Operating system D) Database tables Answer: B AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To learn the basic concepts of virtual machines Classification: Concept 94) The program that manages the various virtual machines (which can of course be running their own DBMS installation) running on a physical machine is called a ________.

A) supervisor B) hypervisor C) virtual operating system D) virtual DBMS Answer: B AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To learn the basic concepts of virtual machines Classification: Concept 95) Computing and storage services offered by various companies over the internet, with either storage or processing performed remotely, are collectively known as ________.

A) NoSQL databases B) remote databases C) cloud computing D) distributed computing Answer: C AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To learn the basic concepts of cloud computing Classification: Concept 96) Each of the following is an example of a cloud computing platform except ________.

A) SQL Server 2014 Express B) Amazon Web Services C) Google Business Solutions D) Windows Azure Answer: A AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To learn the basic concepts of cloud computing Classification: Concept 20 ..

97) What are Business Intelligence (BI) systems?

Answer: Business Intelligence (BI) systems are information systems used by managers and other business professionals to analyze past and current activities and to predict future events. BI systems do not support the recording and processing of operational data—this is left to transaction processing systems. Instead, BI systems are management support systems that produce information for assessment, analysis, planning and control. There are two main categories of BI systems: reporting systems and data mining applications.

AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To learn the basic concepts of business intelligence (BI) systems Classification: Concept 98) Why is operational data sometimes unusable for Business Intelligence (BI) use? Include at least two examples.

Answer: Data in operational databases can suffer from a number of problems. These include: (1) Dirty data—data that has problems with it, for example an age of "323;" (2) Missing values— data values that are unknown, for example a person's age; (3) Inconsistent data—old data values that needed to be updated may not have been—for example a ZIP code in an area that was split into two new ZIP codes; (4) Data not integrated—when data from two or more data sets is used, the data may be from two or more different DBMSs; (5) Data in the wrong format—data values may have been recorded at an inappropriate value for the needed analysis—for example, distance may have been recorded in miles when we need meters; (6) Too much data—it is possible to simply have very large data sets in terms of records or fields.

AACSB: Information Technology; Application of Knowledge Difficulty: Moderate LO: To learn the basic concepts of business intelligence (BI) systems Classification: Application 99) What is a data warehouse?

Answer: A data warehouse is a nonoperational database intended for use by Business Intelligence (BI) applications. A data warehouse is a database system that has data, programs and personnel who specialize in the preparation of data for Business Intelligence processing.

Database in data warehouses are frequently denormalized to speed up BI processes. The components of a data warehouse include programs for data extraction/cleaning/preparation, data warehouse DBMSs, data warehouse metadata and data warehouse data. The data warehouse metadata database records the data warehouse data's source, format, assumptions, constraints and other relevant facts.

AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To learn the basic concepts of data warehouses and data marts Classification: Concept

21 ..

100) Compare the characteristics of an operational database and a dimensional database.

Answer: An operational database is used for structured transaction data processing, while a dimensional database is used for unstructured analytical data processing. An operational database uses current data, while a dimensional database uses both current and historical data. With an operational database, data are inserted, modified and deleted by users, while in a dimensional database data are loaded and updated systemically by the data warehouse administrators.

AACSB: Information Technology; Analytical Thinking Difficulty: Moderate LO: To learn the basic concepts of data warehouses and data marts Classification: Synthesis 101) What is a slowly changing dimension? Include an example.

Answer: A slowly changing dimension is an attribute or set of attributes that can change over time, but typically does not change that often. Address and phone number are examples of slowly changing dimensions.

AACSB: Information Technology; Application of Knowledge Difficulty: Moderate LO: To learn the basic concepts of dimensional databases Classification: Application 102) What is a star schema?

Answer: The star schema describes the arrangement of the tables in a dimensional database. A fact table is the center of the star, while dimension tables are connected to the fact table and can be illustrated as the points of the star.

AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To learn the basic concepts of dimensional databases Classification: Concept 103) What is a conformed dimension?

Answer: A conformed dimension is a dimension table in a data warehouse that is used in more than one star schema. Since the same table is reused, we can be sure that the data is consistent within each star schema.

AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To learn the basic concepts of dimensional databases Classification: Concept

22 ..

104) What is a reporting system?

Answer: A reporting system is one of the main categories of a Business Intelligence (BI) system. Reporting systems are used to filter data, sort data, group data and make simple calculations based on the data. These systems summarize the current status of business activities and compare the current status to past or predicted results. They are also used to classify entities such as customers, employees, products, etc. Report delivery is a critical aspect of reporting systems.

AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To learn the basic concepts of business intelligence (BI) systems Classification: Concept 105) What is a Microsoft Excel PivotTable?

Answer: A PivotTable is the reporting mechanism Excel uses to display OLAP reports. Both measures (a dimensional database "fact") and dimensions are displayed and can be rearranged.

Drill-down is also available.

AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To learn the basic concepts of online analytical processing (OLAP) and data mining Classification: Concept 106) What is a distributed database?

Answer: A distributed database is a database that has been partitioned, replicated, or both.

Partitioning means breaking up the database into sections, and then storing those sections on separate computers. Replicating means making copies of the database, and then storing those copies on separate computers.

AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To learn the basic concepts of distributed databases and object-relational databases Classification: Concept 107) What are objects, and how are they related to the object-oriented DBMS (OODBMS)?

Answer: An object-oriented DBMS is designed to store object data. Objects are the basis of object-oriented programming (OOP). Objects have methods and properties. Methods are computer programs that perform a task, and properties are data items particular to the object.

OODBMSs are designed to provide object persistence for OOP objects, which means providing the means for storing object property values.

AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To learn the basic concepts of distributed databases and object-relational databases Classification: Concept

23 ..

108) What is the NoSQL movement?

Answer: The NoSQL movement is a school of thought and a group of application developers who want to use non-relational data structures and/or bypass SQL as a DML. The non-relational database structures of the NoSQL movement are often known as structured storage. An example is the Apache Software Foundation's Cassandra database, which powers Facebook and Twitter.

Some relational database vendors are trying to accommodate the movement without giving up the relational underpinnings of their products.

AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To learn the basic concepts of Big Data, structured storage, and the MapReduce process Classification: Concept

24 ..

Database Processing, 14e (Kroenke) Online Chapter 10A: Managing Databases with SQL Server 2014 1) The SQL Server GUI program is the Enterprise Manager.

Answer: FALSE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To use SQL Server 2014's graphical utilities Classification: Concept 2) The Microsoft SQL Server Management Studio Manager can be used to create a new database.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To use SQL Server 2014's graphical utilities Classification: Concept 3) The SQL Server default when creating a new database is to create two data files and one log file for each database.

Answer: FALSE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To create a database in SQL Server 2014 Classification: Concept 4) In addition to the standard SQL Server 2014 tools, SQL statements such as CREATE TABLE can now also be executed by using Microsoft's PowerShell.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To use SQL Server 2014's graphical utilities Classification: Concept 5) When viewing the SQL Server list of tables in a database, dbo means "domain base object" and indicates a system table.

Answer: FALSE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To submit both SQL DDL and DML via the Microsoft SQL Server Management Studio Classification: Concept

1 ..

6) SQL Server 2014 provides two ways to create tables—graphically and through SQL code.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To submit both SQL DDL and DML via the Microsoft SQL Server Management Studio Classification: Concept 7) With SQL Server, the preferred way to create database structures is with SQL statements.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To submit both SQL DDL and DML via the Microsoft SQL Server Management Studio Classification: Concept 8) SQL Statements can be submitted to SQL Server from the Microsoft SQL Server Management Studio.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To submit both SQL DDL and DML via the Microsoft SQL Server Management Studio Classification: Concept 9) To use an SQL Server reserved word as a user identifier, it must be enclosed in square brackets [ ].

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To submit both SQL DDL and DML via the Microsoft SQL Server Management Studio Classification: Concept 10) The Microsoft SQL Server Management Studio cannot verify SQL statements until they are executed.

Answer: FALSE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To submit both SQL DDL and DML via the Microsoft SQL Server Management Studio Classification: Concept 11) Stored procedures and triggers in SQL Server may become confused while executing stored procedures and triggers when SQL Server special words such as TRANSACTION appear as table or other names, even if they are enclosed in square brackets [ ].

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To create a database in SQL Server 2014 Classification: Concept 2 ..

12) The name TRANSACTION is so special to SQL Server that no stored procedures will work on a table with that name.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To submit both SQL DDL and DML via the Microsoft SQL Server Management Studio Classification: Concept 13) In the Microsoft SQL Server Management Studio, the starting value for a field that has been set as an IDENTITY in SQL Server is set in the seed (StartingValue) property.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To submit both SQL DDL and DML via the Microsoft SQL Server Management Studio Classification: Concept 14) In the Microsoft SQL Server Management Studio, the amount to add to the surrogate key value when adding a new row is specified by the increment property.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To submit both SQL DDL and DML via the Microsoft SQL Server Management Studio Classification: Concept 15) When viewing a table in the GUI tools table design window in SQL Server, the primary key is indicated by a black arrow.

Answer: FALSE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To submit both SQL DDL and DML via the Microsoft SQL Server Management Studio Classification: Concept 16) When viewing a table in the GUI tools table design window in SQL Server, the notation that should supply the values for a surrogate key is that the Identity property of that column is set to "Yes." Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To submit both SQL DDL and DML via the Microsoft SQL Server Management Studio Classification: Concept 17) SQL Server automatically creates an index on primary key fields only.

Answer: FALSE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To understand how SQL Server implements indexes, concurrency control and cursors Classification: Concept 3 ..

18) The developer can direct SQL Server to create indexes on non-key fields.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To understand how SQL Server implements indexes, concurrency control and cursors Classification: Concept 19) SQL Server supports three types of indexes: clustered, unclustered, and random.

Answer: FALSE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To understand how SQL Server implements indexes, concurrency control and cursors Classification: Concept 20) In an SQL Server clustered index, the data are stored in the bottom level of the index and in the same order as the index.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To understand how SQL Server implements indexes, concurrency control and cursors Classification: Concept 21) With SQL Server, a clustered index has the data with, and in the same order as, the bottom level of the index.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To understand how SQL Server implements indexes, concurrency control and cursors Classification: Concept 22) With SQL Server, only one clustered index is allowed per table.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To understand how SQL Server implements indexes, concurrency control and cursors Classification: Concept 23) With SQL Server, a nonclustered index does not contain data but has pointers to the data.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To understand how SQL Server implements indexes, concurrency control and cursors Classification: Concept

4 ..

24) With SQL Server, the clustered index is faster for data retrieval.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To understand how SQL Server implements indexes, concurrency control and cursors Classification: Concept 25) Data can be entered directly into a table in Enterprise Manager or via SQL INSERT statements submitted through the Microsoft SQL Server Management Studio.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To submit both SQL DDL and DML via the Microsoft SQL Server Management Studio Classification: Concept 26) Database views can only be created in SQL Server through the use of SQL commands.

Answer: FALSE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To submit both SQL DDL and DML via the Microsoft SQL Server Management Studio Classification: Concept 27) One means of processing an SQL Server database is to create application code in a programming language and invoke SQL Server DBMS commands from that program.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To understand the use of SQL/Persistent Stored Modules (SQL/PSM) in SQL Server TSQL Classification: Concept 28) One means of processing an SQL Server database is to save groups of SQL Server DBMS commands in a text file and then process this file in the Microsoft SQL Server Management Studio.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To submit both SQL DDL and DML via the Microsoft SQL Server Management Studio Classification: Concept

5 ..

29) PL/SQL is a programming language for SQL Server that adds programming constructs to the SQL language.

Answer: FALSE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To understand the use of SQL/Persistent Stored Modules (SQL/PSM) in SQL Server TSQL Classification: Concept 30) SQL Server user variables and parameters start with the @ symbol.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To understand the use of SQL/Persistent Stored Modules (SQL/PSM) in SQL Server TSQL Classification: Concept 31) When you use the Microsoft SQL Server Management Studio to run and rerun a set of SQL Server DBMS commands stored in a text file, the stored procedure must start with CREATE PROCEDURE. Answer: FALSE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Difficult LO: To understand the use of SQL/Persistent Stored Modules (SQL/PSM) in SQL Server TSQL Classification: Concept 32) SQL Server supports AFTER and INSTEAD OF triggers, but not BEFORE triggers.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To understand the purpose and role of triggers and to create simple triggers Classification: Concept 33) SQL Server AFTER triggers may be assigned to either tables or views.

Answer: FALSE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To understand the purpose and role of triggers and to create simple triggers Classification: Concept

6 ..

34) SQL Server AFTER triggers may be used with insert and update actions, but not delete actions.

Answer: FALSE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To understand the purpose and role of triggers and to create simple triggers Classification: Concept 35) In SQL Server, triggers can roll back the transaction that caused them to be fired.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To understand the purpose and role of triggers and to create simple triggers Classification: Concept 36) In SQL Server, insert and update triggers store new values in a pseudotable named inserted.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To understand the purpose and role of triggers and to create simple triggers Classification: Concept 37) In SQL Server, insert and update triggers store old values in a pseudotable named deleted.

Answer: FALSE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Difficult LO: To understand the purpose and role of triggers and to create simple triggers Classification: Concept 38) SQL Server built-in system function names start with the @@ symbol.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To understand the purpose and role of triggers and to create simple triggers Classification: Concept 39) When using SQL Server, developers place explicit locks.

Answer: FALSE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To understand how SQL Server implements concurrency control Classification: Concept

7 ..

40) SQL Server automatically makes determinations of whether or not to promote or demote a lock.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To understand how SQL Server implements concurrency control Classification: Concept 41) In SQL Server, it is not possible to make dirty reads.

Answer: FALSE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To understand how SQL Server implements concurrency control Classification: Concept 42) The default cursor concurrency for a dynamic cursor in SQL Server is optimistic.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To understand how SQL Server implements concurrency control Classification: Concept 43) The default transaction isolation level for SQL Server is Read Committed.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To understand how SQL Server implements concurrency control Classification: Concept 44) In SQL Server, SCROLL_LOCK is a version of pessimistic locking.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To understand how SQL Server implements concurrency control Classification: Concept 45) Locking hints included in an SQL statement will override locking behavior based on explicit transaction isolation level statements.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To understand how SQL Server implements concurrency control Classification: Concept

8 ..

46) In SQL Server, locking behavior can be modified by providing locking hints in the WITH parameter of the FROM clause in SELECT statements.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To understand how SQL Server implements concurrency control Classification: Concept 47) SQL Server logins can be based on Windows Operating System security or SQL serverspecific security.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To understand the SQL Server security model Classification: Concept 48) The recommended SQL Server security is Windows-only security.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To understand the SQL Server security model Classification: Concept 49) SQL Server security roles provide a simple way to control user privileges in a database.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To understand the SQL Server security model Classification: Concept 50) When recovering a database in SQL Server, it is possible to process the log to a particular point in time or to a transaction mark.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To understand the fundamental features of SQL Server backup and recovery facilities Classification: Concept 51) In SQL Server, a differential backup makes a copy of the entire database.

Answer: FALSE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To understand the fundamental features of SQL Server backup and recovery facilities Classification: Concept

9 ..

52) In SQL Server, a transaction log backup makes a copy of the changes that have been made since the last time a backup of the entire database was made.

Answer: FALSE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To understand the fundamental features of SQL Server backup and recovery facilities Classification: Concept 53) SQL Server supports three recovery models: simple, complex and bulk logged.

Answer: FALSE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To understand the fundamental features of SQL Server backup and recovery facilities Classification: Concept 54) SQL Server bulk-logged recovery differs from other log-based recovery methods because it does not include log entries for changes that cause large log entries.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To understand the fundamental features of SQL Server backup and recovery facilities Classification: Concept 55) In SQL Server, the full recovery model creates a log entry for every change to the database.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To understand the fundamental features of SQL Server backup and recovery facilities Classification: Concept 56) The SQL Server GUI interface database management program is the ________.

A) Enterprise Manager B) Query Analyzer C) Microsoft SQL Server Management Studio D) Both A and B are correct Answer: C AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To use SQL Server 2014's graphical utilities Classification: Concept

10 ..

57) Which of the following is true about SQL Server Import and Export Wizard?

A) SQL Server Native Client should be selected as the destination.

B) The user can't specify that the column names are in the first row.

C) There are no problems with modifying the default column attributes.

D) The user can specify the primary key to be set on the imported table.

Answer: A AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To import Microsoft Excel worksheet data into a database table Classification: Concept 58) The SQL Server default when creating a new database is to create ________ for each database.

A) one data file and one log file B) one data file and two log files C) two data files and one log file D) There is no default—the database creator must specify how many data files and log files will be created.

Answer: A AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To create a database in SQL Server 2014 Classification: Concept 59) SQL statements can be passed to SQL Server using the ________.

A) Enterprise Manager B) Query Analyzer C) Microsoft SQL Server Management Studio D) Both A and B are correct Answer: C AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To submit both SQL DDL and DML via the Microsoft SQL Server Management Studio Classification: Concept 60) SQL Server tables can be created and modified using ________.

A) Enterprise Manager B) Query Analyzer C) Microsoft SQL Server Management Studio D) Both A and B are correct Answer: C AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To submit both SQL DDL and DML via the Microsoft SQL Server Management Studio Classification: Concept

11 ..

61) When creating SQL Server tables in a database, SQL statements can now also be submitted by using ________.

A) Internet Explorer B) Microsoft PowerShell C) Microsoft Excel D) PL/SQL Answer: B AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To submit both SQL DDL and DML via the Microsoft SQL Server Management Studio Classification: Concept 62) Anytime you want to use an SQL Server reserved word as a user identifier, enclose it in ________.

A) { } B) [ ] C) ( ) D) < > Answer: B AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To submit both SQL DDL and DML via the Microsoft SQL Server Management Studio Classification: Concept 63) The column(s) that is/are the primary key in an SQL table are indicated by ________ when viewed graphically in Enterprise Manager.

A) the black arrow symbol B) the outline arrow symbol C) the key symbol D) being underlined Answer: C AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To use SQL Server 2014's graphical utilities Classification: Concept

12 ..

64) What name is so special to SQL Server that no stored procedure will work on a table with that name, not even if it is enclosed in brackets?

A) NAME B) UPDATE C) TRANSACTION D) KEY Answer: C AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To understand the purpose and role of stored procedures and to create simple stored procedures Classification: Concept 65) When reviewing a table in the SQL Server GUI tools, which property should be set to "Yes" to indicate that the column is a surrogate key for which SQL Server should automatically supply values?

A) Identity B) Surrogate C) AutoIncrement D) AutoNumber Answer: A AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To use SQL Server 2014's graphical utilities Classification: Concept 66) Using only SQL Server tools, you can enter data into a table by ________.

A) entering it into a table grid in the Microsoft SQL Server Management Studio B) using INSERT statements through the Microsoft SQL Server Management Studio C) using an SQL Server form D) Both A and B are correct Answer: D AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To submit both SQL DDL and DML via the Microsoft SQL Server Management Studio Classification: Concept

13 ..

67) When creating a T-SQL statement, you should ________.

A) predefine it graphically in Enterprise Manager B) limit it to one table C) limit it to two tables D) end it with the semicolon normally used to terminate SQL statements Answer: D AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To understand the use of SQL/Persistent Stored Modules (SQL/PSM) in SQL Server TSQL Classification: Concept 68) Which of the following is true about indexes in SQL Server?

A) SQL Server automatically creates indexes for columns appearing in WHERE clauses in queries.

B) SQL Server pads all indexes.

C) SQL Server supports filling up to a limit of 70 percent.

D) SQL Server automatically creates indexes for foreign keys.

Answer: D AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To understand how SQL Server implements indexes, concurrency control and cursors Classification: Concept 69) Which type(s) of index in SQL Server has/have a bottom level that does not contain data but has pointers to the data?

A) Clustered B) Nonclustered C) Unique D) Both A and B are correct Answer: B AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To understand how SQL Server implements indexes, concurrency control and cursors Classification: Concept 70) Which of the following is true of clustered indexes?

A) They are normally slower than nonclustered indexes for retrieving data.

B) Only one is allowed per table.

C) They are normally slower than nonclustered indexes for updating data.

D) They do not have data in the bottom level.

Answer: B AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To understand how SQL Server implements indexes, concurrency control and cursors Classification: Concept 14 ..

71) Which type of index in SQL Server is faster for data retrieval?

A) Clustered B) Nonclustered C) Baseline D) There is no advantage to any particular index for data retrieval, only for data updating.

Answer: A AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To understand how SQL Server implements indexes, concurrency control and cursors Classification: Concept 72) Which of the following is true about the SQL Server Import and Export Wizard?

A) The spreadsheet data must already be normalized in order to be imported.

B) There may be problems importing Excel 2013 data and we may need to install Excel 2007 compatibility software.

C) The Import and Export Wizard sometimes creates blank rows at the end of the imported table.

D) Both B and C are correct.

Answer: D AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To import Microsoft Excel worksheet data into a database table Classification: Concept 73) The language available in SQL Server that adds programming constructs to the SQL language is known as ________.

A) PL/SQL B) C++ C) INTERACT-SQL D) TRANSACT-SQL Answer: D AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To understand the use of SQL/Persistent Stored Modules (SQL/PSM) in SQL Server TSQL Classification: Concept

15 ..

74) Which of the following is known to be true if the command EXEC abcCust @Cost = 5 is used in SQL to invoke a stored procedure in Microsoft SQL Server?

A) The name of the stored procedure is abcCust.

B) The name of the stored procedure is abc.

C) The parameter Cost is given a value of 5.

D) Both A and C are correct.

Answer: D AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Difficult LO: To understand the purpose and role of stored procedures and to create simple stored procedures Classification: Application 75) A stored procedure can be stored in a text file and run with the Microsoft SQL Server Management Studio. If we are running the code that creates this procedure for the third time, it must start with ________.

A) RUN PROCEDURE B) CREATE PROCEDURE C) ALTER PROCEDURE D) MODIFY PROCEDURE Answer: C AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To understand the purpose and role of stored procedures and to create simple stored procedures Classification: Concept 76) SQL Server user variables and parameters start with the symbol ________.

A) @@ B) # C) ## D) @ Answer: D AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To understand the purpose and role of stored procedures and to create simple stored procedures Classification: Concept

16 ..

77) Which of the following is not a type of trigger supported by SQL Server?

A) BEFORE B) INSTEAD OF C) CONCURRENT D) Both A and C are correct Answer: D AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To understand the purpose and role of triggers and to create simple triggers Classification: Concept 78) A view may not be assigned to a(n) ________.

A) BEFORE trigger B) INSTEAD OF trigger C) CONCURRENT trigger D) AFTER trigger Answer: D AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To understand the purpose and role of triggers and to create simple triggers Classification: Concept 79) SQL Server system function names start with the symbol ________.

A) @@ B) # C) ## D) @ Answer: A AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To understand the use of SQL/Persistent Stored Modules (SQL/PSM) in SQL Server TSQL Classification: Concept 80) For triggers on insert and update actions, the new column values are stored in ________.

A) a table named new:TableName B) a table named old:TableName C) a pseudotable name inserted D) a pseudotable named deleted Answer: C AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To understand the purpose and role of triggers and to create simple triggers Classification: Concept

17 ..

81) Which of the following is not a lock granularity supported by SQL Server?

A) Row B) Attribute C) Table D) Page Answer: B AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To understand how SQL Server implements indexes, concurrency control and cursors Classification: Concept 82) Which of the following is not a transaction isolation level supported by SQL Server?

A) Pessimistic B) Read Committed C) Serializable D) Read Uncommitted Answer: A AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Difficult LO: To understand how SQL Server implements indexes, concurrency control and cursors Classification: Concept 83) Which of the following is the default transaction isolation level for SQL Server?

A) Repeatable Read B) Read Committed C) Serializable D) Read Uncommitted Answer: B AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To understand how SQL Server implements indexes, concurrency control and cursors Classification: Concept 84) Which of the following is the most restrictive transaction isolation level option supported by SQL Server?

A) Repeatable Read B) Read Committed C) Serializable D) Read Uncommitted Answer: C AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Difficult LO: To understand how SQL Server implements indexes, concurrency control and cursors Classification: Concept

18 ..

85) Which of the following is a type of cursor concurrency that causes SQL Server to place an update lock on a row when the row is read?

A) SCROLL_LOCK B) Optimistic C) Serializable D) Read only Answer: A AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Difficult LO: To understand how SQL Server implements indexes, concurrency control and cursors Classification: Concept 86) The default cursor concurrency setting for a static cursor in SQL Server is ________.

A) SCROLL_LOCK B) Optimistic C) Serializable D) Read only Answer: D AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To understand how SQL Server implements indexes, concurrency control and cursors Classification: Concept 87) The default cursor concurrency setting for a keyset cursor in SQL Server is ________.

A) Pessimistic B) Optimistic C) Serializable D) Read only Answer: B AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To understand how SQL Server implements indexes, concurrency control and cursors Classification: Concept 88) Specifying locking hints in which parameter in an SQL clause can modify locking behavior in SQL Server?

A) SELECT B) WITH C) LOCK D) HINT Answer: B AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To understand how SQL Server implements indexes, concurrency control and cursors Classification: Concept

19 ..

89) Which type of backup in SQL Server will create a backup of the entire database?

A) Full backup B) Transaction backup C) Database backup D) Complete backup Answer: A AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To understand the fundamental features of SQL Server backup and recovery facilities Classification: Concept 90) Which of the following is a type of recovery model supported in SQL Server in which all database changes are logged?

A) Bulk logged B) Full C) Simple D) Complete Answer: B AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To understand the fundamental features of SQL Server backup and recovery facilities Classification: Concept 91) Describe the database files that are automatically created when a new database is created in SQL Server.

Answer: By default there are two database files created. The first is a data file, and the second is a log file for the database. However, other files can be created during the database creation process.

AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To create a database in SQL Server 2014 Classification: Concept 92) Explain two ways of creating tables in SQL Server.

Answer: SQL Server tables can be created in either the Microsoft SQL Server Management Studio, which is a GUI environment, or in Microsoft PowerShell if a command line method is preferred. The Microsoft SQL Server Management Studio, like any Windows program, uses a set of menu choices and dialog boxes to create tables. Properties in property dialog boxes can be used to modify table and column properties. The Microsoft SQL Server Management Studio also allows the use of standard SQL statements to create and modify tables. Although it is text-based, it is simpler to use because it uses standard SQL. AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To create a database in SQL Server 2014 Classification: Application

20 ..

93) Discuss the Microsoft PowerShell utility.

Answer: Microsoft Windows PowerShell is a very powerful command-line and scripting utility that Microsoft has released. It is superior to the CMD command-line tool. PowerShell is intended for wide use, but with the addition of the PowerShell sqlps utility, PowerShell can perform the functions of the older SQL Server SQL CMD command-line utility (which is still available) and more. It is the command-line utility of choice if a command-line utility is going to be used.

AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To create a database in SQL Server 2014 Classification: Concept 94) What is the SQL CLR? Answer: The Microsoft .NET framework is built around the Common Language Runtime (CLR) technology. This allows programming languages such Visual Basic .NET and C# .NET to be translated to the same underlying command set. SQL CLR is the implementation of CLR on SQL Server, which allows the .NET languages to create and run such routines as triggers and stored procedures.

AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To understand the purpose and role of stored procedures and to create simple stored procedures Classification: Concept 95) Explain SQL Server indexes.

Answer: There are two types of SQL Server indexes—clustered and nonclustered. Clustered indexes store data at the bottom level of the index and in the same order as the index. In nonclustered indexes, the bottom level of the index holds pointers to the data instead of the data itself. Since data can only be sorted in one physical order at a time, there can be only one clustered index per table. Clustered indexes are faster for data retrieval. SQL Server automatically creates indexes for all primary and foreign keys. Database developers can create others as needed.

AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To understand how SQL Server implements indexes, concurrency control and cursors Classification: Concept

21 ..

96) Explain the SQL Server IDENTITY constraint.

Answer: The IDENTITY constraint is used to define surrogate keys in SQL Server. The syntax IDENTITY (m,n) is used to specify a surrogate key with an Identity Seed (starting value) of m and an Identity Increment (increment value) of n. Thus the statement IDENTITY (100,2) will start a sequence at 100 and increase it by 2 each time. If the IDENTITY constraint is applied to an existing column in an existing table that has existing data, the Identity Seed will be automatically set to the greater of (1) the Identity Seed or (2) the largest data value already in the column. This insures that no existing data values will be duplicated.

AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To submit both SQL DDL and DML via the Microsoft SQL Server Management Studio Classification: Concept 97) Explain how to work around the SQL Server IDENTITY constraint when non-sequential data must be entered.

Answer: The Transact-SQL IDENTITY_INSERT property allows users to control whether or not the IDENTITY constraint is in effect. To insert non-sequential data, we (1) use the command SET IDENTITY_INSERT {tableName} OFF to disable the IDENTITY constraint, (2) insert the non-sequential data, and (3) use the command SET IDENTITY_INSERT {TableName} ON to enable the IDENTITY constraint again.

AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Difficult LO: To submit both SQL DDL and DML via the Microsoft SQL Server Management Studio Classification: Application 98) Briefly describe how a developer defines the type of locking behavior to be used with SQL Server.

Answer: Locking behavior in SQL Server is determined by the interaction of transaction isolation level, cursor concurrency setting, and locking hints. Transaction isolation level can be defined to be Read Uncommitted, Read Committed, Repeatable Read, or Serializable. Read Committed is the default setting. Cursor concurrency can be set to Read-only, Optimistic, or Scroll_Lock. Scroll_Lock is a type of pessimistic locking. The cursor type determines the default type of cursor concurrency. Locking hints can be used by experienced developers to modify locking behavior. Locking hints can override transaction isolation level for a given transaction, or influence the types of locks that SQL Server uses for a given transaction. Locking hints are specified by the WITH parameter of the FROM clause in SELECT SQL statements.

AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Difficult LO: To understand how SQL Server implements indexes, concurrency control and cursors Classification: Application

22 ..

99) Briefly explain the different SQL Server backup types.

Answer: SQL Server supports three types of backup: full, differential and transaction log. The full backup backs up the complete database with transaction logs. The differential backup backs up only the changes since the last full backup. The transaction log backup backs up only the current transaction log, which is helpful if there are a lot of transactions occurring on a regular basis.

AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To understand the fundamental features of SQL Server backup and recovery facilities Classification: Application 100) Briefly explain the different SQL Server recovery models.

Answer: SQL Server supports three recovery models: simple, full, and bulk logged. The simple recovery model does not create logs of any changes to the database. This recovery method relies only on complete database backups in the event that the database must be recovered. The full recovery model logs all changes that are made to the database. The bulk-logged recovery model logs all changes to the database except for changes that would result in large log entries.

AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To understand the fundamental features of SQL Server backup and recovery facilities Classification: Application 101) Briefly explain the process for importing spreadsheet data into a SQL Server table, and indicate some of the pitfalls or potential problems.

Answer: The worksheet data does not need to be normalized, as we can take care of that later.

There may be problems importing Excel 2013 data at this writing, the user may need to install the "2007 Office System Driver: Data Connectivity Components." SQL server may choose the incorrect setting for datatypes or NULL/NOT NULL, but it is best to not change these settings on import, and fix them later.

Right-click on the database object to display a short-cut menu, then select TASKS, then "Import Data." Select Microsoft Excel as the data source and the "First Row has Column Names" option.

For the destination, select SQL Server Native Client, next the "Copy Data" option, and the desired source table (spreadsheet name). Optionally select Edit Mappings, but this is not recommended, then Next and Finish.

AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Difficult LO: To import Microsoft Excel worksheet data into a database table Classification: Application

23 ..

Database Processing, 14e (Kroenke) Online Chapter 10B: Managing Databases with Oracle Database 1) Oracle Database provides only one method for creating an Oracle Database database.

Answer: FALSE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To install Oracle Database 12c and create a database Classification: Concept 2) The Oracle Database Configuration Assistant is the easiest Oracle Database tool to use when you are creating an Oracle database.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To install Oracle Database 12c and create a database Classification: Concept 3) When creating a new database in Oracle Database, two new account passwords are automatically created in the database.

Answer: FALSE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To install Oracle Database 12c and create a database Classification: Concept 4) The Oracle Enterprise Manager Database Express 12c is a Web-based Oracle Database administration utility.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To use Oracle Database 12c's Web-based Enterprise Manager Database Express utility Classification: Concept 5) Instead of creating a new database instance in Oracle Database, it is preferable to create a new tablespace.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To create and use Oracle Database 12c tablespaces Classification: Concept

1 ..

6) Each Oracle Database tablespace has one or more datafiles associated with it.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To create and use Oracle Database 12c tablespaces Classification: Concept 7) An Oracle Database tablespace is a logical subdivision of an Oracle database instance that is used to group related tables, views, and other similar objects.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To create and use Oracle Database 12c tablespaces Classification: Concept 8) In Oracle Database security, a System Privilege is the right to execute general tasks such as performing some action on the database data.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Difficult LO: To understand how Oracle Database 12c implements server and database security Classification: Concept 9) In Oracle Database security, a Role can have many system privileges.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To understand how Oracle Database 12c implements server and database security Classification: Concept 10) Among its many functions, SQL*Plus is also a programming language.

Answer: FALSE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To be able to submit both SQL DDL and DML via the SQL Developer utility Classification: Concept 11) The Oracle Database GUI tool used for application development is the Oracle SQL Developer.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To use Oracle Database 12c's graphical utilities Classification: Concept

2 ..

12) The default file extension for text files created for SQL Developer is .sql.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To use Oracle Database 12c's graphical utilities Classification: Concept 13) Oracle Database supports the ON UPDATE CASCADE constraint.

Answer: FALSE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Difficult LO: To install Oracle Database 12c and create a database Classification: Concept 14) When using Oracle Database, a sequence is an object that generates a sequential series of unique numbers.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To install Oracle Database 12c and create a database Classification: Concept 15) Sequences are most often used to provide values for surrogate keys.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To install Oracle Database 12c and create a database Classification: Concept 16) The NextVal method provides the next value in a sequence.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To install Oracle Database 12c and create a database Classification: Concept 17) The CurrVal method provides the current value in a sequence.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To install Oracle Database 12c and create a database Classification: Concept

3 ..

18) With Oracle Database, using a sequence does not guarantee valid surrogate key values.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Difficult LO: To install Oracle Database 12c and create a database Classification: Concept 19) With Oracle Database, data must be entered at the Oracle Database command prompt.

Answer: FALSE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To be able to submit both SQL DDL and DML via the SQL Developer utility Classification: Concept 20) The Oracle Database FORMAT_DATE function can be used to make sure that Oracle Database interprets date data correctly.

Answer: FALSE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To install Oracle Database 12c and create a database Classification: Concept 21) In Oracle Database, indexes are created using the ALTER command.

Answer: FALSE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To install Oracle Database 12c and create a database Classification: Concept 22) Oracle Database uses the SQL ALTER TABLE command to change the structure of a table.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To install Oracle Database 12c and create a database Classification: Concept 23) The Oracle Database GUI is the Oracle SQL Browser.

Answer: FALSE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To use Oracle Database 12c's graphical utilities Classification: Concept

4 ..

24) The Oracle Database Enterprise Manager Database Express provides graphical facilities for managing databases.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To use Oracle Database 12c's Web-based Enterprise Manager Database Express utility Classification: Concept 25) The Oracle SQL Developer has no facility for executing SQL statements.

Answer: FALSE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To be able to submit both SQL DDL and DML via the SQL Developer utility Classification: Concept 26) You can use the Edit Table table editor to create an index in Oracle Database.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To use Oracle Database 12c's graphical utilities Classification: Concept 27) With Oracle Database, stored procedures can be invoked remotely.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To understand the purpose and role of stored procedures and learn how to create simple stored procedures Classification: Concept 28) The PL/SQL keyword DECLARE is used to begin the basic PL/SQL block structure.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To understand the use of SQL/Persistent Stored Modules (SQL/PSM) in Oracle Database PL/SQL Classification: Concept 29) The PL/SQL keyword BEGIN is used to define a group of PL/SQL statements.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To understand the use of SQL/Persistent Stored Modules (SQL/PSM) in Oracle Database PL/SQL Classification: Concept

5 ..

30) The PL/SQL keyword ISTHERE is used to test for the existence of a condition.

Answer: FALSE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To understand the use of SQL/Persistent Stored Modules (SQL/PSM) in Oracle Database PL/SQL Classification: Concept 31) The PL/SQL keywords FOR, WHILE, and LOOP are used to create blocks of code that repeat until an ending condition is reached.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To understand the use of SQL/Persistent Stored Modules (SQL/PSM) in Oracle Database PL/SQL Classification: Concept 32) The PL/SQL keyword STOP HERE is used to complete the basic PL/SQL block structure.

Answer: FALSE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To understand the use of SQL/Persistent Stored Modules (SQL/PSM) in Oracle Database PL/SQL Classification: Concept 33) The PL/SQL keyword RETURN is used to exit a block of code and terminate whatever code structure is running.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To understand the use of SQL/Persistent Stored Modules (SQL/PSM) in Oracle Database PL/SQL Classification: Concept 34) With Oracle Database, stored procedures cannot use a cursor variable, so another method must be used to access a table on a row by row basis.

Answer: FALSE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To understand the purpose and role of stored procedures and learn how to create simple stored procedures Classification: Concept

6 ..

35) If you include a slash as the last line in an Oracle stored procedure, the procedure will be compiled and stored when you run the block of code.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Difficult LO: To understand the purpose and role of stored procedures and learn how to create simple stored procedures Classification: Concept 36) You can include single line comments in an Oracle Database stored procedure by starting each comment line with the /* symbol.

Answer: FALSE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Difficult LO: To understand the purpose and role of stored procedures and learn how to create simple stored procedures Classification: Concept 37) Oracle Database triggers are PL/SQL or Java procedures that are invoked when specified database activity occurs.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To understand the purpose and role of triggers and learn how to create simple triggers Classification: Concept 38) All Oracle Database triggers work at the row level.

Answer: FALSE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Difficult LO: To understand the purpose and role of triggers and learn how to create simple triggers Classification: Concept 39) Oracle Database triggers BEFORE and AFTER are placed on tables, while the INSTEAD OF trigger is placed on views.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Difficult LO: To understand the purpose and role of triggers and learn how to create simple triggers Classification: Concept

7 ..

40) In Oracle Database, triggers that are fired once for each row that is changed in a table are called row triggers.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To understand the purpose and role of triggers and learn how to create simple triggers Classification: Concept 41) INSTEAD OF triggers are placed on views.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To understand the purpose and role of triggers and learn how to create simple triggers Classification: Concept 42) SOONER and LATER triggers are placed on tables.

Answer: FALSE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To understand the purpose and role of triggers and learn how to create simple triggers Classification: Concept 43) The prefix :new is used to make final values of columns available to insert and update triggers.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Difficult LO: To understand the purpose and role of triggers and learn how to create simple triggers Classification: Concept 44) The prefix :old is used to make previous values of columns available to update and delete triggers.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To understand the purpose and role of triggers and learn how to create simple triggers Classification: Concept 45) Oracle Database uses a System Change Number (SCN) to identify before images in rollback segments to prevent dirty reads.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Difficult LO: To understand the fundamental features of Oracle Database 12c backup and recovery facilities Classification: Concept 8 ..

46) The Read Only transaction isolation level is unique to Oracle Database.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To understand how Oracle Database 12c implements concurrency control Classification: Concept 47) Oracle Database only reads committed changes, and therefore dirty reads are not possible.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To understand how Oracle Database 12c implements concurrency control Classification: Concept 48) The default isolation level in Oracle Database is Read Committed, which provides statement level isolation.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Difficult LO: To understand how Oracle Database 12c implements concurrency control Classification: Concept 49) With Oracle Database, you can change the default transaction isolation for all transactions in a session by using the SET TRANSACTION ISOLATION LEVEL statement.

Answer: FALSE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Difficult LO: To understand how Oracle Database 12c implements concurrency control Classification: Concept 50) Control files, as used by Oracle Database's backup and recovery features, contain records of database changes.

Answer: FALSE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To understand the fundamental features of Oracle Database 12c backup and recovery facilities Classification: Concept 51) In the event of an application failure, Oracle Database uses the in-memory rollback segments and OnLine ReDo files to recover.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To understand the fundamental features of Oracle Database 12c backup and recovery facilities Classification: Concept 9 ..

52) Oracle Database does not require the use of Archive ReDo files for instance recovery.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To understand the fundamental features of Oracle Database 12c backup and recovery facilities Classification: Concept 53) In Oracle Database recovery facilities, control files are small files that describe the name, contents, and locations of various files used by Oracle Database.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To understand the fundamental features of Oracle Database 12c backup and recovery facilities Classification: Concept 54) In Oracle Database recovery facilities, OnLine ReDo files are maintained on disk and contain the rollback segments from recent database changes.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To understand the fundamental features of Oracle Database 12c backup and recovery facilities Classification: Concept 55) In Oracle Database recovery facilities, OnLine ReDo files are backup log files maintained separately and not necessarily on disk media.

Answer: FALSE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To understand the fundamental features of Oracle Database 12c backup and recovery facilities Classification: Concept 56) The type of failure that occurs when Oracle Database itself fails due to an operating system or computer hardware failure is called an instance failure.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To understand the fundamental features of Oracle Database 12c backup and recovery facilities Classification: Concept

10 ..

57) The type of failure that occurs when Oracle Database is unable to write to a physical file is called a media failure.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To understand the fundamental features of Oracle Database 12c backup and recovery facilities Classification: Concept 58) In Oracle Database backup and recovery facilities, a consistent backup is one in which all uncommitted changes have been removed from the datafiles.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Difficult LO: To understand the fundamental features of Oracle Database 12c backup and recovery facilities Classification: Concept 59) Which of the following is the easiest tool for creating a database with Oracle Database?

A) The Oracle Enterprise Manager Database Express B) The Oracle SQL*Plus command utility program C) The Oracle Database Configuration Assistant D) The Oracle SQL Developer Answer: C AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To install Oracle Database 12c and create a database Classification: Concept 60) Which of the following is an account name for which you are asked to enter a password when Oracle Database creates a new database?

A) ORACLE B) SYS C) INTERNAL D) DBA Answer: B AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To understand how Oracle Database 12c implements server and database security Classification: Concept

11 ..

61) Which of the following is a tool for managing an existing Oracle Database database?

A) The Oracle Enterprise Manager Database Express B) The Oracle SQL*Plus command utility program C) The Oracle SQL Developer D) The Oracle DBA Manager Answer: A AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To use Oracle Database 12c's Web-based Database Control Enterprise Manager utility Classification: Concept 62) Which of the following Oracle Database structures is a logical subdivision of an Oracle Database database instance that is used to group related tables, views, and other similar objects?

A) Namespace B) Filespace C) Tablespace D) Dataspace Answer: C AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To create and use Oracle Database 12c tablespaces Classification: Concept 63) Which of the following commands does Oracle Database not support?

A) CREATE TABLE B) CREATE CONSTRAINT C) ON DELETE CASCADE D) ON UPDATE CASCADE Answer: D AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Difficult LO: To be able to submit both SQL DDL and DML via the SQL Developer utility Classification: Concept 64) When creating tables, Oracle Database automatically converts the SQL standard data type "int" into ________.

A) number (38,0) B) integer (32) C) number (5,0) D) integer (16) Answer: A AACSB: Information Technology; Application of Knowledge Difficulty: Difficult LO: To be able to submit both SQL DDL and DML via the SQL Developer utility Classification: Concept

12 ..

65) Which method returns the next value in a sequence?

A) CountVal B) Next C) UpVal D) NextVal Answer: D AACSB: Information Technology; Application of Knowledge Difficulty: Easy LO: To be able to submit both SQL DDL and DML via the SQL Developer utility Classification: Concept 66) If T3 is a table with three columns C1, C2, and C3, where C1 is integer data, C2 is character data, and C3 is date data, which of the following would be the proper statement to have Oracle Database enter the date 02/10/03 into a row in table T3 while making sure that it is formatted correctly as shown?

A) SET INTO T3 VALUES (101, 'Smith', '02/10/13'); B) SET INTO T3 VALUES (101, 'Smith', TO_DATE ('02/10/13', 'DD/MM/YY')); C) INSERT INTO T3 VALUES (101, 'Smith', '02/10/2013'); D) INSERT INTO T3 VALUES (101, 'Smith', TO_DATE ('02/10/13', 'DD/MM/YY')); Answer: D AACSB: Information Technology; Application of Knowledge Difficulty: Difficult LO: To be able to submit both SQL DDL and DML via the SQL Developer utility Classification: Application 67) If the SQL statement SELECT C1, C2, C3 FROM T4 WHERE C2 = 'Smith'; is frequently executed, which column(s) should be considered for indexing based only on the statement itself?

A) C1 only B) C2 only C) C3 only D) C1 and C2 Answer: B AACSB: Information Technology; Analytical Thinking Difficulty: Moderate LO: To use Oracle Database 12c's graphical utilities Classification: Application

13 ..

68) Which of the following statements would cause Oracle Database to include a new column named C5, which is a two-digit whole number, to a table named T2?

A) UPDATE TABLE T2 ADD COLUMN C5 NUMBER (2); B) ALTER TABLE T2 ADD C5 NUMBER (2); C) UPDATE TABLE T2 INSERT C5 NUMBER (2,0); D) ALTER TABLE T2 INSERT COLUMN C5 NUMBER (2,0); Answer: B AACSB: Information Technology; Application of Knowledge Difficulty: Difficult LO: To be able to submit both SQL DDL and DML via the SQL Developer utility Classification: Application 69) Which of the following is a GUI tool for application development with Oracle Database?

A) The Oracle Enterprise Manager Database Express B) The Oracle SQL*Plus command utility program C) The Oracle SQL Developer D) The Oracle Database Configuration Assistant Answer: C AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To use Oracle Database 12c's graphical utilities Classification: Concept 70) Which of the following tasks cannot be done using the Oracle SQL Developer GUI features?

A) See the structure of a table B) Add and remove columns from a table C) Insert and delete data from a table D) Create a new tablespace Answer: D AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To use Oracle Database 12c's graphical utilities Classification: Concept 71) The GUI tool for creating a new index is the Oracle SQL Developer ________.

A) Edit Table table editor B) Edit Index index editor C) Edit Schema schema editor D) Physical Design editor Answer: A AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To use Oracle Database 12c's graphical utilities Classification: Concept

14 ..

72) The Oracle tool used to copy data into a database table from a spreadsheet is called the ________.

A) Spreadsheet Wizard B) Data Import Wizard C) Database Configuration Assistant D) Enterprise Manager Database Express Answer: B AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To be able to import data from spreadsheets into Oracle Classification: Concept 73) One limitation of the Oracle Data Import Wizard is that it ________.

A) does not allow addition of a new primary key column B) does not allow data to be imported into an existing table C) does not allow import of "date" type data D) only allows import of data from Microsoft Excel, no other formats Answer: A AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To be able to import data from spreadsheets into Oracle Classification: Concept 74) During the data import process in Oracle, if some of the spreadsheet cells in a column of the source data are empty, ________.

A) you must put some data in them before importing B) you must not specify this column as a foreign key later C) you must ensure the data type for this column is numeric D) you must check the "Nullable" box in the wizard Answer: D AACSB: Information Technology; Application of Knowledge Difficulty: Moderate LO: To be able to import data from spreadsheets into Oracle Classification: Application 75) Copying spreadsheet data into a database is part of a larger data warehousing process known as ________.

A) import/export B) spreadsheet conversion C) extract, transform, and load D) data verification Answer: C AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To be able to import data from spreadsheets into Oracle Classification: Concept 15 ..

76) The Oracle Database variant of SQL with additional procedural language components is ________.

A) T-SQL B) PL/SQL C) My/SQL D) MS/SQL Answer: B AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To understand the use of SQL/Persistent Stored Modules (SQL/PSM) in Oracle Database PL/SQL Classification: Concept 77) The Oracle Database PL/SQL block structure begins with ________.

A) DECLARE B) BEGIN C) IF...THEN...ELSE...END IF D) LOOP Answer: A AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To understand the use of SQL/Persistent Stored Modules (SQL/PSM) in Oracle Database PL/SQL Classification: Concept 78) The Oracle Database PL/SQL statement used to define a set of PL/SQL statements is ________.

A) DECLARE B) BEGIN C) IF...THEN...ELSE...END IF D) LOOP Answer: B AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To understand the use of SQL/Persistent Stored Modules (SQL/PSM) in Oracle Database PL/SQL Classification: Concept

16 ..

79) The Oracle database PL/SQL statement used to test for a condition and then direct when blocks of code should be run depending on the outcome of the test is ________.

A) DECLARE B) BEGIN C) IF...THEN...ELSE...END IF D) LOOP Answer: C AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To understand the use of SQL/Persistent Stored Modules (SQL/PSM) in Oracle Database PL/SQL Classification: Concept 80) The Oracle Database PL/SQL statement used to repeat a set of PL/SQL statements as long as some condition is true is ________.

A) DECLARE B) BEGIN C) IF...ELSE...END IF D) LOOP Answer: D AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To understand the use of SQL/Persistent Stored Modules (SQL/PSM) in Oracle Database PL/SQL Classification: Concept 81) The Oracle Database PL/SQL statement used to complete the basic PL/SQL block structure is ________.

A) DECLARE B) BEGIN C) IF...ELSE...END IF D) END; Answer: D AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To understand the use of SQL/Persistent Stored Modules (SQL/PSM) in Oracle Database PL/SQL Classification: Concept

17 ..

82) Which of the following Oracle Database PL/SQL statements is not used to create a block of code that repeats while some condition is true?

A) FOR B) WHILE C) BEGIN D) LOOP Answer: C AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To understand the use of SQL/Persistent Stored Modules (SQL/PSM) in Oracle Database PL/SQL Classification: Concept 83) Which of the following is not true of stored procedures in Oracle Database?

A) They are programs.

B) They can have parameters.

C) They can be invoked remotely.

D) They can be written in C++.

Answer: D AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To understand the use of SQL/Persistent Stored Modules (SQL/PSM) in Oracle Database PL/SQL Classification: Concept 84) Which of the following is true about stored procedures in Oracle Database?

A) They cannot invoke other procedures.

B) They must include the data type and length of parameters.

C) They can raise exceptions.

D) They do not contain variables.

Answer: C AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To understand the use of SQL/Persistent Stored Modules (SQL/PSM) in Oracle Database PL/SQL Classification: Concept 85) Which of the following can Oracle Database not support?

A) Triggers that are fired when a user logs in to the database B) Triggers that are fired before each row change in a table C) Triggers that are fired once when changes are made to rows in a table D) Triggers that are fired after each row change in a table Answer: A AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To understand the purpose and role of triggers and learn how to create simple triggers Classification: Concept 18 ..

86) In Oracle Database, which of the following prefixes is only available to triggers?

A) :current B) := same C) :new D) := current Answer: C AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Difficult LO: To understand the purpose and role of triggers and learn how to create simple triggers Classification: Concept 87) Which type of trigger is commonly used to update views?

A) BEFORE triggers B) AFTER triggers C) SELECT triggers D) INSTEAD OF triggers Answer: D AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To understand the purpose and role of triggers and learn how to create simple triggers Classification: Concept 88) Which of the following does not describe a user-defined function?

A) It computes a numeric value B) It can be called by name from within an SQL statement C) It may have input parameters passed to it D) It returns an output value to the calling statement Answer: A AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To understand the purpose and role of user-defined functions and learn how to create simple user-defined functions Classification: Concept

19 ..

89) Based on the table below, a function to compute a 10% late penalty on a customer's balance would have how many input parameters?

CUSTOMER CustNo 9870 8590 7840 4870

CustName Winston Gonzales Harris Miles

Balance 500 350 800 100

SalesRepNo 345 434 654 345

A) 0 B) 1 C) 2 D) it doesn't matter Answer: B AACSB: Information Technology; Application of Knowledge Difficulty: Moderate LO: To understand the purpose and role of user-defined functions and learn how to create simple user-defined functions Classification: Application 90) Which of the following is not a transaction isolation level supported by Oracle Database?

A) Read Committed B) Serializable C) Repeatable Read D) Read Only Answer: C AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Difficult LO: To understand how Oracle Database 12c implements concurrency control Classification: Concept 91) Which of the following is the default transaction isolation level offered by Oracle Database?

A) Read Committed B) Serializable C) Repeatable Read D) Read Only Answer: A AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To understand how Oracle Database 12c implements concurrency control Classification: Concept

20 ..

92) In Oracle Database, to achieve transaction level consistency, which level of transaction isolation must be used?

A) Read Committed B) Serializable C) Repeatable Read D) Read-only Answer: B AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To understand how Oracle Database 12c implements concurrency control Classification: Concept 93) Which of the following is true of Oracle Database when the isolation level is set to Serializable?

A) It will update any row having an SCN greater than the Transaction SCN. B) It will delete any row having an SCN greater than the Transaction SCN. C) It will read any row having an SCN greater than the Transaction SCN. D) It will wait for a blocking transaction to release an exclusive lock.

Answer: D AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To understand how Oracle Database 12c implements concurrency control Classification: Concept 94) Which of the following Oracle Database ReDo files are stored on disk and contain the rollback segments from recent database changes?

A) OnLine ReDo files B) Active ReDo files C) OffLine ReDo files D) Archive ReDo files Answer: A AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To understand how Oracle Database 12c implements concurrency control Classification: Concept

21 ..

95) For which of the following types of failure would Oracle Database use OnLine ReDo files as part of a recovery effort?

A) Instance failure B) Application failure C) Media failure D) Logic failure Answer: B AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To understand the fundamental features of Oracle Database 12c backup and recovery facilities Classification: Concept 96) For which of the following types of failure would Oracle Database use Offline ReDo files as part of a recovery effort?

A) Instance failure B) Application failure C) Media failure D) Logic failure Answer: C AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To understand the fundamental features of Oracle Database 12c backup and recovery facilities Classification: Concept 97) What is SQL*Plus?

Answer: SQL*Plus is a character-based command line utility program, and it allows users to enter SQL*Plus commands after an "SQL>" command prompt. SQL commands such as CREATE TABLE can be entered and run in SQL*Plus. SQL*Plus has been a very popular utility for Oracle Database users.

AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To install Oracle Database 12c and create a database Classification: Concept 98) What is SQL Developer?

Answer: SQL Developer is the GUI tool that is intended to be used instead of SQL*Plus. It is generally used for application development, and provides a comprehensive development environment for Oracle Database users and developers.

AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To use Oracle Database 12c's graphical utilities Classification: Concept

22 ..

99) What is the Database Configuration Assistant (DBCA)?

Answer: The Oracle Database Configuration Assistant (DBCA) is a GUI administration tool used to create and manage Oracle Database database instances. It can be run during the Oracle Database installation process to create a database instance with example structures. It can be run anytime a new database instance needs to be created, changes made to an existing instance, or when an existing instance needs to be deleted.

AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To install Oracle Database 12c and create a database Classification: Concept 100) What is the Oracle Enterprise Manager Database Express?

Answer: The Oracle Enterprise Manager Database Express is a Web-based administration utility that is the preferred tool for database instance management. It is not intended for application development, only database administration. It is used to create tablespaces, user accounts, roles, and other administrative tasks.

AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To use Oracle Database 12c's Web-based Enterprise Manager Database Express utility Classification: Concept

23 ..

101) Explain sequences and their relationship to surrogate keys. Include an example.

Answer: A sequence is an Oracle Database object that generates a sequential series of unique numbers. It allows the developer to specify the sequence's starting value and increment.

Sequences are useful for specifying surrogate keys. The sequence methods CurrVal and NextVal may be used to access the row with the current sequence number and the next sequence number respectively. Using sequences, however, does not guarantee valid surrogate key values. For example, there is nothing that forces the surrogate key field to use the numbers generated by the sequence, therefore a record may be inserted that does not follow the sequence. This means code must be written to control surrogate key values when sequences are used. Nonetheless, sequences are the best way to work with surrogate keys in Oracle Database. As an example, the following SQL statements create a sequence then use that sequence to insert a new student with ID value 1: CREATE SEQUENCE seqSID INCREMENT BY 1 START WITH 1; INSERT INTO STUDENT VALUES (seqSID.NextVal, ….); AACSB: Information Technology; Application of Knowledge Difficulty: Moderate LO: To be able to submit both SQL DDL and DML via the SQL Developer utility Classification: Application 102) Explain the Oracle Database PL/SQL Block Structure.

Answer: The Oracle Database PL/SQL block structure is: DECLARE {Declare variables here - optional} BEGIN {Executable statements here - required} [EXCEPTION - Optional error handling] END; / This structure starts by declaring any variables, and then runs the executable code between BEGIN and END;. The slash after the END; keyword tells Oracle Database to compile and execute the block.

AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To understand the use of SQL/Persistent Stored Modules (SQL/PSM) in Oracle Database PL/SQL Classification: Concept

24 ..

103) Explain the Oracle Database PL/SQL control-of-flow statements.

Answer: The Oracle Database PL/SQL control-of-flow statements are used to direct which blocks of code are executed and in what order. The IF..THEN...ELSE..END IF structure is used to test conditions and execute code blocks based on the results. The FOR, WHILE, and LOOP keywords are used to create repeating blocks of code. The EXIT WHEN keywords are used to exit a block of code, and the RETURN keyword is used to exit a block of code and terminate whatever code structure is running.

AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To understand the use of SQL/Persistent Stored Modules (SQL/PSM) in Oracle Database PL/SQL Classification: Concept 104) Explain the Oracle Database PL/SQL cursor statements.

Answer: The Oracle Database PL/SQL cursor statements include DECLARE CURSOR to define a cursor, OPEN cursor to actually start the use of the cursor, and CLOSE CURSOR to end the use of a cursor. While the cursor is running, the FETCH keyword is used to retrieve row data.

A cursor is used with a looping structure of some sort, which can be created using the FOR, WHILE or LOOP keywords.

AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To understand the use of SQL/Persistent Stored Modules (SQL/PSM) in Oracle Database PL/SQL Classification: Concept 105) Briefly describe how Oracle Database implements serializable transaction isolation. Include an example.

Answer: Whenever a transaction begins, Oracle Database records a System Change Number (SCN), which is a database-wide value that is incremented every time a change is made to the database. As a transaction proceeds, for each record the transaction reads, Oracle retrieves the committed values that the record contained when its SCN was less than or equal to the SCN of the current transaction. This prevents any dirty reads, nonrepeatable reads, or phantom reads. As long as the transaction does not attempt to update or delete a record that has a committed change with an SCN greater than the SCN of the current transaction, the transaction will proceed normally. If the transaction does attempt to change a record with a greater SCN, then an error is produced that must be handled by the application program. For example, suppose a transaction begins when the SCN is 100. The transaction first reads a record with an SCN of 97. The transaction is allowed to proceed since the record's changes were committed prior to the start of the current transaction. The transaction next attempts to read a record with SCN 102. At this point the transaction will be cancelled since allowing it to proceed could violate serializability.

AACSB: Information Technology; Application of Knowledge Difficulty: Difficult LO: To understand how Oracle Database 12c implements concurrency control Classification: Application

25 ..

106) Briefly explain the different types of files used by the Oracle Database recovery facilities.

Answer: The first type of file is the datafile. Datafiles contain the user and system data. Because Oracle Database writes data from its buffers to disk at arbitrary times, the datafiles often contain uncommitted changes to the database that will eventually either be committed or removed.

OnLine ReDo files are backups of the rollback segments that Oracle Database keeps in memory.

The rollback segments contain information about changes made to the database. These changes are periodically written to the OnLine ReDo files. Offline or Archive ReDo files are historical copies of the OnLine ReDo files that have been created as the OnLine ReDo files become full.

Control files are small files that tell Oracle the names, contents, and locations of files that Oracle Database needs to operate. These control files are updated frequently by Oracle Database.

AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Difficult LO: To understand the fundamental features of Oracle Database 12c backup and recovery facilities Classification: Concept

26 ..

Database Processing, 14e (Kroenke) Online Chapter 10C: Managing Databases with MySQL 5.6 1) MySQL is an open source DBMS that only runs on Unix and Linux operating systems.

Answer: FALSE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To install MySQL 5.6 and create a database Classification: Concept 2) Microsoft Windows users should install MySQL Community Edition using the MySQL Installer for Windows.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To install MySQL 5.6 and create a database Classification: Concept 3) The MySQL Workbench is included in the MySQL Server Community Edition installation.

Answer: FALSE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To install MySQL 5.6 and create a database Classification: Concept 4) MySQL is configured using the MySQL Server Instance Configuration Wizard.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To install MySQL 5.6 and create a database Classification: Concept 5) For use with this book, it is recommended that MySQL be configured as a developer machine.

Answer: FALSE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To install MySQL 5.6 and create a database Classification: Concept 6) The spreadsheet data must first be highlighted (selected) in order to be imported using the MySQL for Excel Add-In. Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To import Microsoft Excel worksheet data into a database table Classification: Concept 1 ..

7) It is recommended that MySQL be used with the InnoDB storage engine.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To install MySQL 5.6 and create a database Classification: Concept 8) To start working with MySQL Community Edition in Windows, use the command Start | All Programs | MySQL | MySQL Workbench CE 6.2. (or the version number you have installed).

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To install MySQL 5.6 and create a database Classification: Concept 9) Users log into MySQL Workbench using the Connect to Database and Connect to MySQL Server dialog boxes.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To use the MySQL Workbench graphical utility Classification: Concept 10) MySQL Community Edition uses only operating system authentication.

Answer: FALSE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To understand how MySQL 5.6 implements server and database security Classification: Concept 11) Schema is the MySQL synonym for database.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To use the MySQL Workbench graphical utility Classification: Concept 12) Database objects are displayed in the Object Explorer window in the MySQL Workbench.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To use the MySQL Workbench graphical utility Classification: Concept

2 ..

13) A new MySQL database is created using the New Database dialog box.

Answer: FALSE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To use the MySQL Workbench graphical utility Classification: Concept 14) The MySQL Command Line Client is the MySQL command line utility.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To submit both SQL DDL and DML via the MySQL Workbench Classification: Concept 15) MySQL Workbench is the MySQL GUI application development utility.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To use the MySQL Workbench graphical utility Classification: Concept 16) MySQL Workbench is the MySQL GUI database administration utility.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To use the MySQL Workbench graphical utility Classification: Concept 17) The MySQL Table Editor is accessible from the MySQL Workbench.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To use the MySQL Workbench graphical utility Classification: Concept 18) SQL statements can be run individually or as part of a related group of SQL statements known as a script.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To submit both SQL DDL and DML via the MySQL Workbench Classification: Concept

3 ..

19) To run an SQL script, click the "Execute SQL Script (or selected portion)" button on the MySQL Workbench.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To submit both SQL DDL and DML via the MySQL Workbench Classification: Concept 20) To display an existing SQL script, click the "Open an SQL script file (in new query tab)" button.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To submit both SQL DDL and DML via the MySQL Workbench Classification: Concept 21) In MySQL, surrogate keys that use a sequence maintained by MySQL should be given a data type of IDENTITY. Answer: FALSE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To submit both SQL DDL and DML via the MySQL Workbench Classification: Concept 22) MySQL indexes can be created by using the GUI MySQL Table Editor or an SQL statement.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To understand how MySQL 5.6 implements indexes, concurrency control, and cursors Classification: Concept 23) To execute an SQL query, click the "Execute the selected portion of the script or everything, if there is no selection" button.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To submit both SQL DDL and DML via the MySQL Workbench Classification: Concept 24) The MySQL statement BEGIN is used to define a set of MySQL procedure statements.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To understand the use of SQL/Persistent Stored Modules (SQL/PSM) in MySQL SQL Classification: Concept

4 ..

25) The MySQL block structure defines variables with the BEGIN keyword.

Answer: FALSE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To understand the use of SQL/Persistent Stored Modules (SQL/PSM) in MySQL SQL Classification: Concept 26) The MySQL IF statement is used to test for a condition and then direct which blocks of code should be run depending on the outcome of the test.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To understand the use of SQL/Persistent Stored Modules (SQL/PSM) in MySQL SQL Classification: Concept 27) The MySQL LOOP statement is used to repeat a set of SQL statements as long as some condition is true.

Answer: FALSE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To understand the use of SQL/Persistent Stored Modules (SQL/PSM) in MySQL SQL Classification: Concept 28) The MySQL END statement is used to complete the basic SQL block structure.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To understand the use of SQL/Persistent Stored Modules (SQL/PSM) in MySQL SQL Classification: Concept 29) MySQL supports BEFORE triggers.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To understand the purpose and role of triggers and learn how to create simple triggers Classification: Concept 30) MySQL supports AFTER triggers.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To understand the purpose and role of triggers and learn how to create simple triggers Classification: Concept

5 ..

31) MySQL supports INSTEAD OF triggers.

Answer: FALSE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To understand the purpose and role of triggers and learn how to create simple triggers Classification: Concept 32) MySQL uses the MySQL LAST_INSERT_ID() function to provide the value of the most recently created surrogate key.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To understand the purpose and role of stored procedures and learn how to create simple stored procedures Classification: Concept 33) MySQL uses the MySQL CALL statement to run a stored procedure.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To understand the purpose and role of stored procedures and learn how to create simple stored procedures Classification: Concept 34) MySQL uses the MySQL TODAYS_DATE() function to provide the value of the current date.

Answer: FALSE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To understand the purpose and role of stored procedures and learn how to create simple stored procedures Classification: Concept 35) MySQL uses MySQL NEW transition variables with triggers to access new data inserted into a table row.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To understand the purpose and role of triggers and learn how to create simple triggers Classification: Concept

6 ..

36) MySQL uses MySQL OLD transition variables with triggers to access old data updated or deleted from a table row.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To understand the purpose and role of triggers and learn how to create simple triggers Classification: Concept 37) MySQL uses the "Safe Updates"—Forbid UPDATE and DELETE statements with no key in WHERE clause or no LIMIT clause—checkbox to control the behavior of UPDATE and DELETE statements run from the MySQL Workbench.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To submit both SQL DDL and DML via the MySQL Workbench Classification: Concept 38) Triggers that have been created in MySQL are displayed as objects in the Object Browser of the MySQL Workbench.

Answer: FALSE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To understand the purpose and role of triggers and learn how to create simple triggers Classification: Concept 39) MySQL concurrency options include four transaction isolation levels: READ UNCOMMITTED, READ COMMITTED, REPEATABLE READ, and SERIALIZABLE. Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To understand how MySQL 5.6 implements indexes, concurrency control, and cursors Classification: Concept 40) The default transaction isolation level in MySQL is REPEATABLE READ. Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To understand how MySQL 5.6 implements indexes, concurrency control, and cursors Classification: Concept 41) MySQL concurrency options include four scopes for the transaction isolation level: GLOBAL, LOCAL, SESSION and TRANSACTION. Answer: FALSE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To understand how MySQL 5.6 implements indexes, concurrency control, and cursors Classification: Concept 7 ..

42) The MySQL transaction isolation level can be manually set using a MySQL SET {SCOPE} TRANSACTION ISOLATION LEVEL {LEVEL OPTION} command.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To understand how MySQL 5.6 implements indexes, concurrency control, and cursors Classification: Concept 43) The MySQL Workbench is the main utility used to implement MySQL security.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To understand how MySQL 5.6 implements server and database security Classification: Concept 44) When MySQL Server Administration is opened in the MySQL Workbench, the Startup/Shutdown page is initially displayed.

Answer: FALSE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To understand how MySQL 5.6 implements server and database security Classification: Concept 45) MySQL users are created on the Users and Privileges page in the MySQL Workbench.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To understand how MySQL 5.6 implements server and database security Classification: Concept 46) MySQL users are granted MySQL privileges for specific schemas only.

Answer: FALSE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To understand how MySQL 5.6 implements server and database security Classification: Concept 47) MySQL users may be granted MySQL server administrative roles.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To understand how MySQL 5.6 implements server and database security Classification: Concept

8 ..

48) MySQL users must be granted the right to have MySQL schema privileges before the specific privileges themselves are granted.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To understand how MySQL 5.6 implements server and database security Classification: Concept 49) The MySQL Schema Privileges Select "ALL" button marks all MySQL privileges for assignment to the user.

Answer: FALSE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To understand how MySQL 5.6 implements server and database security Classification: Concept 50) MySQL users should always be given the GRANT OPTION for each schema.

Answer: FALSE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To understand how MySQL 5.6 implements server and database security Classification: Concept 51) MySQL databases are backed up using the MySQL Backup System.

Answer: FALSE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To understand the fundamental features of MySQL 5.6 backup and recovery facilities Classification: Concept 52) MySQL uses the term data export dump as a synonym for backup.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To understand the fundamental features of MySQL 5.6 backup and recovery facilities Classification: Concept 53) MySQL backups are run on the Administration - Data Export tab of the Data Export page.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To understand the fundamental features of MySQL 5.6 backup and recovery facilities Classification: Concept

9 ..

54) A MySQL data backup is accomplished by using the "Data Export" feature.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To understand the fundamental features of MySQL 5.6 backup and recovery facilities Classification: Concept 55) MySQL restores are run on the Restore from Disk tab of the Data Export and Restore page.

Answer: FALSE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To understand the fundamental features of MySQL 5.6 backup and recovery facilities Classification: Concept 56) The MySQL Installer for Windows requires the ________ operating system.

A) Suse Linux B) Red Hat Linux C) Android D) Microsoft Windows Answer: D AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To install MySQL 5.6 and create a database Classification: Concept 57) The main MySQL GUI utility is ________.

A) MySQL Management Studio B) MySQL Developer C) My SQL Workbench D) Both A and B are correct Answer: C AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To install MySQL 5.6 and create a database Classification: Concept 58) Which of the following MySQL configuration settings are recommended for use with this book?

A) Developer machine B) Multifunction machine C) Decision Support (DSS)/OLAP D) Custom setup that only installs the needed components Answer: D AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To install MySQL 5.6 and create a database Classification: Concept 10 ..

59) Logging into the MySQL DBMS is done using ________.

A) the Connect to Server command B) the Connect to Server dialog box C) the Local instance MySQL56 command D) the Local instance MySQL56 dialog box Answer: D AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To use the MySQL Workbench graphical utility Classification: Concept 60) DBMS objects are displayed ________.

A) in the Navigation Pane B) in the Object Browser C) in the tabbed database window D) in the tabbed document window Answer: B AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To use the MySQL Workbench graphical utility Classification: Concept 61) A new MySQL database is created using ________.

A) the New Database dialog tab B) the Create Database command C) the new_schema dialog tab D) the Create Schema command Answer: C AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To use the MySQL Workbench graphical utility Classification: Concept 62) The active MySQL database is specified using ________.

A) the Set Schema command B) the Set Database command C) the Make Default Schema command D) the Set as Default Schema command Answer: D AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To use the MySQL Workbench graphical utility Classification: Concept

11 ..

63) The MySQL command line utility is ________.

A) MySQL*Plus B) the MySQL Command-Line Client C) MySQL-Shell D) MySQL-CMD Answer: B AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To submit both SQL DDL and DML via the MySQL Workbench Classification: Concept 64) Which of the following statements is not true concerning the MySQL for Excel Add-In? A) It must be installed into MySQL before importing from Excel can be performed.

B) The user must enter a password to connect to the MySQL instance.

C) The data must first be normalized before importing.

D) The user can modify some of the table characteristics before the actual data transfer.

Answer: C AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To import Microsoft Excel worksheet data into a database table Classification: Concept 65) SQL statements can be run individually or as part of a related group of SQL statements known as a ________.

A) Result B) Resultset C) Script D) Scriptset Answer: C AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To use the MySQL Workbench graphical utility Classification: Concept 66) To run a single SQL command in MySQL Community Edition ________.

A) click the "Execute" button in the MySQL Workbench B) click the "Execute SQL in Connected Server" button in the MySQL Workbench C) click the "Execute SQL Script in Connected Server" button in the MySQL Workbench D) click the "Execute SQL Statement under the keyboard cursor" button in the MySQL Workbench Answer: D AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To submit both SQL DDL and DML via the MySQL Workbench Classification: Concept

12 ..

67) The SQL query data results are displayed ________.

A) in the Navigator window B) in a tabbed Result Grid C) in a Messages window D) in a tabbed Action Output window Answer: D AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Difficult LO: To submit both SQL DDL and DML via the MySQL Workbench Classification: Concept 68) MySQL indexes can be created by using ________.

A) the MySQL Table Editor B) the MySQL Index Editor C) an SQL statement D) Both A and C are correct Answer: D AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Difficult LO: To understand how MySQL 5.6 implements indexes, concurrency control, and cursors Classification: Concept 69) To create a MySQL index using SQL, the correct SQL statement is ________.

A) ALTER TABLE {TableName} ADD INDEX {IndexName} B) ALTER TABLE {TableName} INSERT INDEX {IndexName} C) CREATE INDEX {IndexName} ON TABLE {TableName} D) Both A and C are correct Answer: A AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Difficult LO: To understand how MySQL 5.6 implements indexes, concurrency control, and cursors Classification: Concept 70) To insert non-sequential data into a MySQL table that uses AUTO_INCREMENT ________.

A) Disable AUTO_INCREMENT B) Temporarily remove AUTO_INCREMENT C) Use the AUTO_INCREMENT_INSERT command D) Both A and C are correct Answer: B AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To submit both SQL DDL and DML via the MySQL Workbench Classification: Concept

13 ..

71) The MySQL statement used to define a set of MySQL procedure statements is ________.

A) DECLARE B) BEGIN C) IF...THEN...ELSE...END IF D) REPEAT Answer: B AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To understand the use of SQL/Persistent Stored Modules (SQL/PSM) in MySQL SQL Classification: Concept 72) The MySQL SQL/PSM code structure defines variables with the keyword ________.

A) DECLARE B) BEGIN C) IF...THEN...ELSE...END IF D) VAR Answer: A AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To understand the use of SQL/Persistent Stored Modules (SQL/PSM) in MySQL SQL Classification: Concept 73) The MySQL SQL/PSM statement used to test for a condition and then direct which blocks of code should be run depending on the outcome of the test is ________.

A) DECLARE B) BEGIN C) IF...THEN...ELSE...END IF D) REPEAT Answer: C AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To understand the use of SQL/Persistent Stored Modules (SQL/PSM) in MySQL SQL Classification: Concept 74) The MySQL statement used to repeat a set of SQL statements as long as some condition is true is ________.

A) LOOP B) BEGIN C) IF...THEN.ELSE...END IF D) REPEAT Answer: D AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To understand the use of SQL/Persistent Stored Modules (SQL/PSM) in MySQL SQL Classification: Concept

14 ..

75) The MySQL statement used to complete the basic SQL block structure is ________.

A) DECLARE B) BEGIN C) a right brace symbol } D) END Answer: D AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To understand the use of SQL/Persistent Stored Modules (SQL/PSM) in MySQL SQL Classification: Concept 76) The MySQL delimiter that must be used with MySQL procedures as used in this text is ________.

A) / B) \ C) // D) \\ Answer: C AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To understand the use of SQL/Persistent Stored Modules (SQL/PSM) in MySQL SQL Classification: Concept 77) The MySQL keyword to create a cursor is ________.

A) DECLARE CURSOR {CursorName} B) OPEN {CursorName} C) FETCH D) CLOSE {CursorName} Answer: A AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To understand the use of SQL/Persistent Stored Modules (SQL/PSM) in MySQL SQL Classification: Concept 78) The MySQL keyword to actually start using a cursor is ________.

A) DECLARE CURSOR {CursorName} B) OPEN {CursorName} C) FETCH D) CLOSE {CursorName} Answer: B AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To understand how MySQL 5.6 implements indexes, concurrency control, and cursors Classification: Concept

15 ..

79) The MySQL keyword to close and exit a cursor is ________.

A) DECLARE CURSOR {CursorName} B) OPEN {CursorName} C) FINISH {CursorName} D) CLOSE {CursorName} Answer: D AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To understand how MySQL 5.6 implements indexes, concurrency control, and cursors Classification: Concept 80) The MySQL keyword used to retrieve a row of data while the cursor is operating is ________.

A) DECLARE CURSOR {CursorName} B) OPEN {CursorName} C) FETCH D) CLOSE {CursorName} Answer: C AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To understand how MySQL 5.6 implements indexes, concurrency control, and cursors Classification: Concept 81) The MySQL statement to store a stored procedure in the database is ________.

A) CREATE PROCEDURE B) ALTER PROCEDURE C) DROP PROCEDURE D) CLOSE PROCEDURE Answer: A AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To understand the purpose and role of stored procedures and learn how to create simple stored procedures Classification: Concept 82) The MySQL statement to change a stored procedure already stored in the database is ________.

A) CREATE PROCEDURE B) ALTER PROCEDURE C) DROP PROCEDURE D) CLOSE PROCEDURE Answer: B AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To understand the purpose and role of stored procedures and learn how to create simple stored procedures Classification: Concept 16 ..

83) The MySQL statement to delete a stored procedure already in the database is ________.

A) CREATE PROCEDURE B) ALTER PROCEDURE C) DROP PROCEDURE D) CLOSE PROCEDURE Answer: C AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To understand the purpose and role of stored procedures and learn how to create simple stored procedures Classification: Concept 84) Which trigger type(s) does MySQL support?

A) BEFORE B) AFTER C) INSTEAD OF D) Both A and B are correct Answer: D AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To understand the purpose and role of triggers and learn how to create simple triggers Classification: Concept 85) Which trigger type(s) does MySQL not support?

A) BEFORE B) AFTER C) INSTEAD OF D) Both A and B are correct Answer: C AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To understand the purpose and role of triggers and learn how to create simple triggers Classification: Concept 86) Which transaction isolation level scope(s) is (are) available in MySQL? A) LOCAL B) SESSION C) TRANSACTION D) Both B and C are correct Answer: D AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To understand how MySQL 5.6 implements indexes, concurrency control, and cursors Classification: Concept

17 ..

87) Which transaction isolation level option(s) is (are) available in MySQL? A) READ UNCOMMITTED B) READ COMMITTED C) REPEATABLE WRITE D) Both A and B are correct Answer: D AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To understand how MySQL 5.6 implements indexes, concurrency control, and cursors Classification: Concept 88) Which of the following set of MySQL authorizations can be specifically assigned to a user account?

A) Administrative roles B) Schema privileges C) Root user equivalence D) Both A and B are correct Answer: D AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To understand how MySQL 5.6 implements server and database security Classification: Concept 89) Which schema privilege should not be specifically assigned to a user account?

A) SELECT B) CREATE C) GRANT D) Both A and B are correct Answer: C AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Difficult LO: To understand how MySQL 5.6 implements server and database security Classification: Concept 90) What term does MySQL use as a synonym for backup?

A) Replica B) Export C) Data export D) Data export dump Answer: D AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To understand the fundamental features of MySQL 5.6 backup and recovery facilities Classification: Concept

18 ..

91) What is MySQL? Answer: MySQL is an open source DBMS that runs on many operating systems including Windows, Linux and Unix. It is downloadable from the MySQL Web site. MySQL lacks some of the features of commercial DBMSs such as DB2, SQL Server and Oracle Database. However, it is comparatively easy to use.

AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To install MySQL 5.6 and create a database Classification: Concept 92) Describe how to create a new database in MySQL Community Edition.

Answer: In MySQL Community Edition, new databases are created in the MySQL Workbench.

Click the Add Schema button. The new_schema dialog box is displayed. In the new_schema dialog box, enter the database name. Click the Apply button to display the Apply SQL Script to Database: Review SQL Script dialog box. Click the Apply button to run the SQL script. The Apply SQL Script to Database: Apply SQL Script dialog box is displayed. Click the Finish button, and the new_schema dialog box is displayed again. It is OK to ignore a warning message about capital letters in the new schema name, the name will be converted to lowercase if necessary.

AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To install MySQL 5.6 and create a database Classification: Application 93) Describe how to create and run an SQL query in MySQL Server Community Edition.

Answer: [This is actually covered in Chapter 2, but it is important to know.]

In MySQL Community Edition, SQL queries are created and run in the MySQL Workbench. A Query window should be open, but if it isn't, use the File | New Query Tab command to open a new tabbed Query window. Type the SQL query into the query window, and then click the "Execute the selected portion of the script or everything, if there is no selection" button on the toolbar to run the query, or place the cursor in the desired query and click the "Execute the statement under the keyboard cursor" button. Results are displayed in the associated tabbed Result window.

AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To submit both SQL DDL and DML via the MySQL Workbench Classification: Application 94) What is the MySQL Command-Line Client?

Answer: The MySQL Command-Line Client is a character-based command line utility program, and it allows users to enter SQL commands after a "mysql>" command prompt. SQL commands such as CREATE TABLE can be entered and run in the MySQL Command-Line Client. The MySQL Command-Line Client is the classic utility for MySQL users.

AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To submit both SQL DDL and DML via the MySQL Workbench Classification: Concept 19 ..

95) What is the MySQL Workbench?

Answer: The MySQL Workbench is the GUI tool that is intended to be used instead of the MySQL Command-Line Client. It is generally used for application development, and provides a comprehensive development environment for MySQL users and developers.

AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To use the MySQL Workbench graphical utility Classification: Concept 96) What MySQL utility is used for DBMS administration?

Answer: The MySQL Workbench is now the single, integrate GUI administration tool. As such, it is used to now manage databases (schemas), user account and security, and to backup and restore databases.

AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To use the MySQL Workbench graphical utility Classification: Concept 97) What is the MySQL Table Editor?

Answer: The MySQL Table Editor is a GUI administration tool used to create and manage MySQL tables. It can be opened in the MySQL Workbench, but is not accessible as a separate utility because it must operate on the default schema. It allows the user to graphically build table and database structures such as indexes.

AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Difficult LO: To use the MySQL Workbench graphical utility Classification: Concept

20 ..

98) Explain the MySQL Block Structure.

Answer: The MySQL block structure is: DELIMITER // BEGIN DECLARE {optional} {Executable statements - required} END // DELIMITER ; This structure starts by defining the delimiter to be used instead of the SQL semicolon (;), declaring any variables, and then runs the executable code. The code block ends with END and the defined delimiter. Finally the delimiter is redefined back to the SQL semicolon.

AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Difficult LO: To understand the use of SQL/Persistent Stored Modules (SQL/PSM) in MySQL SQL Classification: Application 99) Explain the MySQL control-of-flow statements.

Answer: The MySQL control-of-flow statements are used to direct which blocks of code are executed and in what order. Blocks of code can be labeled with block labels to identify them.

The IF..THEN...ELSE..END IF structure is used to test conditions and execute code blocks based on the results, and also includes an IF...ELSEIF...END variant. The REPEAT and WHILE LOOP keywords are used to create repeating blocks of code. The LEAVE {BlockLabel} keywords are used to exit a block of code.

AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To understand the use of SQL/Persistent Stored Modules (SQL/PSM) in MySQL SQL Classification: Application 100) Explain the MySQL cursor statements.

Answer: The MySQL cursor statements include DECLARE CURSOR {CursorName} to define a cursor, OPEN {CursorName} to actually start the use of the cursor, and CLOSE {CursorName} to end the use of a cursor. While the cursor is running, the FETCH keyword is used to retrieve row data. A cursor is used with a looping structure of some sort, which can be created using the REPEAT and WHILE keywords.

AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To understand the use of SQL/Persistent Stored Modules (SQL/PSM) in MySQL SQL Classification: Application

21 ..

101) Briefly explain the process for configuring MySQL for importing Excel 2013 spreadsheet data into a SQL Server table, then discuss the import process using the MySQL for Excel AddIn. Answer: Using the MySQL installer, select "MySQL for Excel" that will install the MySQL for Excel Add-In. When Excel is launched, the add-in will appear on the DATA tab in the Excel 2013 ribbon as a button. Click on the button to launch the "Open a MySQL Connection" pane.

Double-click the appropriate Local Connection link and enter the password. Select the database schema name, select the sheet with the data, and be sure to highlight the entire data range then click "Export Excel Data to New Table." Set the desired table characteristics such as the new table name, primary key, datatype and NULL/NOT NULL. Then click the "Export Data" button to populate the table. Click OK then Close to finish the process. The imported table does not have to be normalized, so adjustments may have to be made.

AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To import Microsoft Excel worksheet data into a database table Classification: Application

22 ..

Database Processing, 14e (Kroenke) Appendix A: Getting Started with Microsoft Access 2013 1) Microsoft Access is a personal database that combines a DBMS with an application generator.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To create databases in Microsoft Access 2013 Classification: Concept 2) The Microsoft Access application generator provides the ability to create and store forms, reports, and queries.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To create databases in Microsoft Access 2013 Classification: Concept 3) Microsoft Access 2013 databases are stored using the file extension .accdb.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Difficult LO: To create databases in Microsoft Access 2013 Classification: Concept 4) Microsoft Access 2013 uses the Access 2003 .mdb file format as the default file format for database files.

Answer: FALSE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To create databases in Microsoft Access 2013 Classification: Concept 5) Microsoft Access uses the AutoNumber data type to create surrogate keys.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To understand Microsoft Access 2013 data types Classification: Concept 6) To start Microsoft Access 2013 in Windows 8, use the Start | All Programs | Microsoft Office | Microsoft Access 2013 command.

Answer: FALSE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To create databases in Microsoft Access 2013 Classification: Concept 1 ..

7) Microsoft Access 2013 uses the Microsoft Office Fluent User Interface.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To create databases in Microsoft Access 2013 Classification: Concept 8) Most Microsoft Access 2013 commands and tools are available on the tabbed Ribbon.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To create databases in Microsoft Access 2013 Classification: Concept 9) The Microsoft Access 2013 tabbed Ribbon contains a set of control tabs.

Answer: FALSE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To create databases in Microsoft Access 2013 Classification: Concept 10) Each Microsoft Access 2013 command tab contains a set of tools grouped into sets of related commands.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To create databases in Microsoft Access 2013 Classification: Concept 11) The default Microsoft Access 2013 command tabs are HOME, CREATE, INTERNAL DATA and DATABASE TOOLS. Answer: FALSE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To create databases in Microsoft Access 2013 Classification: Concept 12) In addition to the basic command tabs, Microsoft Access 2013 also has additional contextual command tabs.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To create databases in Microsoft Access 2013 Classification: Concept

2 ..

13) Microsoft uses the term object as a general name for various parts of a Microsoft Access 2013 database.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To create databases in Microsoft Access 2013 Classification: Concept 14) Microsoft Access database objects are displayed in the Browser Pane.

Answer: FALSE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To create databases in Microsoft Access 2013 Classification: Concept 15) The Microsoft Access window Close button is actually a close-and-exit button.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To create databases in Microsoft Access 2013 Classification: Concept 16) In Microsoft Access, relationships between tables are created in the Relationships window.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To create relationships between tables in Microsoft Access 2013 Classification: Concept 17) In Microsoft Access, foreign keys are designated by using the Foreign Key button in the toolbar.

Answer: FALSE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To create relationships between tables in Microsoft Access 2013 Classification: Concept 18) In Microsoft Access, a relationship is created by dragging a foreign key column and dropping it on top of the corresponding primary key.

Answer: FALSE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To create relationships between tables in Microsoft Access 2013 Classification: Concept

3 ..

19) Microsoft Access SQL commands are run within the SQL View of a Query window.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To create Query-by-Example (QBE) queries in Microsoft Access 2013 Classification: Concept 20) Microsoft Access can run QBE queries, but not SQL queries.

Answer: FALSE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To create Query-by-Example (QBE) queries in Microsoft Access 2013 Classification: Concept 21) To open a new Microsoft Access Query window, click the Query Design button on the Create command.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To create Query-by-Example (QBE) queries in Microsoft Access 2013 Classification: Concept 22) In Microsoft Access, the primary key must be set as a field property while the table is in Design View.

Answer: FALSE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To create tables in Microsoft Access 2013 Classification: Concept 23) Microsoft Access wizards allow easy building of forms and reports.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To understand the use of the Report Wizard in Microsoft Access 2013 Classification: Concept

4 ..

24) Microsoft Access is a personal database system, and a personal database system is characterized by ________.

A) the DBMS removing the metadata from the database B) the DBMS product taking the role of the DBMS and the database application generator C) the DBMS not supporting indexes D) the DBMS product being limited to a maximum of ten tables in any given database Answer: B AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Difficult LO: To create databases in Microsoft Access 2013 Classification: Concept 25) The Microsoft Access application generator is not responsible for ________.

A) creating forms B) creating reports C) creating queries D) creating tables Answer: D AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Difficult LO: To create databases in Microsoft Access 2013 Classification: Concept 26) Microsoft Access 2013 database files are stored using the file extension of ________.

A) .adb B) .asp C) .accdb D) .mdb Answer: C AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To create databases in Microsoft Access 2013 Classification: Concept 27) The Microsoft Access data type of AutoNumber is used when there is a specific need for a ________.

A) foreign key B) primary key C) surrogate key D) secondary key Answer: C AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Difficult LO: To understand Microsoft Access 2013 data types Classification: Concept

5 ..

28) To start Microsoft Access 2013 in Windows 8, use the command ________.

A) Start | Microsoft Access 2013 B) Start | Microsoft Office | Microsoft Access 2013 C) Start | All Programs | Microsoft Access 2013 D) No command—use the Microsoft Access 2013 app tile Answer: D AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To create databases in Microsoft Access 2013 Classification: Concept 29) The Microsoft Access 2013 Ribbon contains all of the following command tabs except ________.

A) HOME B) SQL C) EXTERNAL DATA D) DATABASE TOOLS Answer: B AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To create databases in Microsoft Access 2013 Classification: Concept 30) In addition to the standard Ribbon command tabs, Microsoft Access 2013 also includes ________.

A) optional command tabs B) contextual command tabs C) quick access tabs D) gallery tabs Answer: B AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To create databases in Microsoft Access 2013 Classification: Concept 31) Microsoft Access database objects are displayed in the ________.

A) Navigation Pane B) Browser Pane C) Object Browser Pane D) Gallery Pane Answer: A AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To create databases in Microsoft Access 2013 Classification: Concept

6 ..

32) The Microsoft Access 2013 Close button is actually a ________.

A) Save and Close button B) Save and Exit button C) Close and Exit button D) Print and Close button Answer: C AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To create databases in Microsoft Access 2013 Classification: Concept 33) In Microsoft Access, relationships between tables are created ________.

A) by the Relationships button on the Create command tab B) by the Relationships button on the Home command tab C) in the Relationships window D) in the Table window of the table containing the primary key Answer: C AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To create relationships between tables in Microsoft Access 2013 Classification: Concept 34) In Microsoft Access, any relationship between two tables is created ________.

A) by entering the name of the foreign key in the appropriate table in Design View B) by dragging the primary key column of one table onto the primary key column of the other table in the Relationships window C) by dragging the primary key column of one table onto the foreign key column of the other table in the Relationships window D) by dragging the foreign key column of one table onto the primary key column of the other table in the Relationships window Answer: C AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To create relationships between tables in Microsoft Access 2013 Classification: Concept 35) In Microsoft Access, referential integrity constraints are created ________.

A) by checking the Enforce Referential Integrity check box in the Edit Relationships dialog box B) by setting a property value on the foreign key in the table which contains it C) by setting a property value on the primary key in the Relationships window D) by setting a property value on the foreign key in the Relationships window.

Answer: A AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To create relationships between tables in Microsoft Access 2013 Classification: Concept 7 ..

36) In Microsoft Access, the relationship between two tables is not actually created until ________.

A) the OK button in the Create Relationships dialog box is clicked B) the Create button in the Create Relationships dialog box is clicked C) the OK button in the Edit Relationships dialog box is clicked D) the Create button in the Edit Relationships dialog box is clicked Answer: D AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To create relationships between tables in Microsoft Access 2013 Classification: Concept 37) Microsoft Access SQL commands are run in ________.

A) the SQL window B) the QBE window C) the SQL View of a Query window D) the Design View of a Query window Answer: C AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To create Query-by-Example (QBE) queries in Microsoft Access 2013 Classification: Concept 38) To open a new Microsoft Access Query window ________.

A) click the New button on the Home command tab B) click the New Query button on the Home command tab C) click the Create Query button on the Create command tab D) click the Query Design button on the Command tab Answer: D AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To create Query-by-Example (QBE) queries in Microsoft Access 2013 Classification: Concept 39) In Microsoft Access, tables are added to a Query window by ________.

A) selecting the tables from the Use Table dialog box B) selecting the tables from the Show Table dialog box C) selecting the tables from the Tables section of the Navigation Pane D) selecting the tables from the Queries section of the Navigation Pane Answer: B AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Difficult LO: To create Query-by-Example (QBE) queries in Microsoft Access 2013 Classification: Concept

8 ..

40) Microsoft Access is a good tool for forms and reports because ________.

A) the form and report generators do not exist within Access itself B) Access forms and reports are very simplistic C) Access wizards make it easy to create the forms and reports D) Access has a version of Microsoft PowerPoint built into it to allow easy creation of PowerPoint slide shows Answer: C AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Difficult LO: To understand the use of the Report Wizard in Microsoft Access 2013 Classification: Concept 41) Tables are created in Microsoft Access using the ________ button.

A) Table Design B) Table Wizard C) Create Table D) Create Relation Answer: A AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To create tables in Microsoft Access 2013 Classification: Concept 42) In Microsoft Access 2013, the maximum length in characters of a "Short Text" data type column is ________.

A) 25 B) 255 C) 65535 D) unlimited Answer: B AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To understand Microsoft Access 2013 data types Classification: Concept 43) Data in columns defined using which of the following data types in Microsoft Access cannot be changed by the user?

A) Long Text B) Date/Time C) Number D) AutoNumber Answer: D AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To understand Microsoft Access 2013 data types Classification: Concept 9 ..

44) Each of the following is a way of inserting data into a Microsoft Access table except ________.

A) Datasheet view B) a data entry form C) QBE D) SQL Answer: D AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To insert data into tables in Microsoft Access 2013 Classification: Concept 45) Microsoft Access Datasheet view can be used for all of the following tasks except ________.

A) writing join queries B) inserting new rows C) updating existing rows D) deleting rows Answer: A AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To insert data into tables in Microsoft Access 2013 Classification: Concept 46) Microsoft Access is considered a "personal database" product. What is a personal database?

Answer: A personal database combines a DBMS with an application generator. The DBMS performs the functions expected of a DBMS such as database creation, processing, and administration. The application generator adds the ability to create and store forms, reports and queries, as well as some other application-related functions.

AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To create databases in Microsoft Access 2013 Classification: Concept 47) What Microsoft Access file format is used by default in Microsoft Access 2013? When was it introduced, and what was the previous format?

Answer: By default, Microsoft Access 2013 supports Access 2007 file formats. Microsoft Access 2007, 2010, and 2013 database files are stored using the .accdb file extension.

AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To create databases in Microsoft Access 2013 Classification: Concept

10 ..

48) What is the Microsoft Office Fluent User Interface?

Answer: The Microsoft Office Fluent User Interface is the GUI display added to Microsoft Office products beginning with Office 2007. It is used in Microsoft Access 2013. In Access 2013, features include the Backstage view, the Quick Access Toolbar, the Ribbon with command tabs and contextual command tabs, tabbed documents, the Navigation Pane, the status bar and the Help system.

AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To create databases in Microsoft Access 2013 Classification: Concept 49) Describe the tabbed Ribbon.

Answer: The tabbed Ribbon, or just Ribbon, is a visual area at the top of the Microsoft Access 2013 window that is the main Microsoft Access 2013 command interface. Commands are grouped into sets of related commands and displayed according to a tab selection. In Microsoft Access 2013, the default Microsoft Access specific command tabs are Home, Create, External Data, and Database Tools. On each command tab, the commands are further grouped in command groups of related commands. For example, the Home command tab has the Views, Clipboard, Sort & Filter, Records, Find, and Text Formatting command groups.

AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To create databases in Microsoft Access 2013 Classification: Concept 50) Describe the Microsoft Access 2013 Navigation Pane.

Answer: The Navigation Pane is an area on the left side of the Access 2013 that controls the display of database objects such as table objects, query objects, and so on. The Navigation Pane is the main tool for accessing the various objects in the database. Double-clicking on an object will open it in a tabbed document window. Right-Clicking on an object will display a shortcut menu associated with that object. The Navigation Pane can be hidden and restored using a button at the top of the Navigation Pane.

AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Difficult LO: To create databases in Microsoft Access 2013 Classification: Concept 51) What is a surrogate key and how does Microsoft Access 2013 create surrogate keys?

Answer: A surrogate key is usually a computer-generated unique number that serves as the identifier of each row in a table. Microsoft Access 2013 generates surrogate keys by using the Microsoft Access AutoNumber data type.

AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To understand Microsoft Access 2013 data types Classification: Concept

11 ..

52) Explain how to create a relationship in Microsoft Access. Include an example.

Answer: In Microsoft Access relationships are created in the Relationships window, which is opened by using the Relationships button on the Database Tools command tab. Once the Relationships window is open, the needed database tables are displayed using the Show Table dialog box. A relationship is initiated by dragging the primary of one table on top and dropping it on top of the corresponding foreign key in the related table. At this point the Edit Relationships dialog box is displayed. A referential integrity constraint can be set in this box by checking the Enforce Referential Integrity check box. The relationship is actually created by clicking the Create button in the Edit Relationship dialog box.

AACSB: Information Technology; Application of Knowledge Difficulty: Difficult LO: To create relationships between tables in Microsoft Access 2013 Classification: Application 53) Explain how to run an SQL query in Microsoft Access.

Answer: [Note that this is actually covered in Chapter 2, but it is important to understand how to do this as part of using Microsoft Access]. To run an SQL query in Microsoft Access, start on the Create command tab. Click the Query Design button, which will display a Query window together with the Show Tables dialog box. Close the Show Table dialog box by clicking the Close button, and then click the SQL View button on the Design command tab to switch the Query window to SQL View. An SQL statement can now be entered into the Query window. To execute the query after the SQL statement is complete, click the Run button on the Design command tab.

AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To create Query-by-Example (QBE) queries in Microsoft Access 2013 Classification: Concept

12 ..

Database Processing, 14e (Kroenke) Appendix B: Getting Started with Systems Analysis and Design 1) Data is facts and numbers.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To understand information systems Classification: Concept 2) One definition of information is knowledge derived from data.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To understand information systems Classification: Concept 3) An information system is a set of components that interact to achieve some purpose or goal.

Answer: FALSE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To understand information systems Classification: Concept 4) A computer-based information system has four components.

Answer: FALSE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To understand information systems Classification: Concept 5) Information systems must be both developed and used to help businesses reach their goals and objectives.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To understand information systems Classification: Concept 6) Michael Porter includes manufacturing operations in his list of primary activities.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To understand business processes Classification: Concept

1 ..

7) A business process is a set of activities that transforms materials into products.

Answer: FALSE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To understand business processes Classification: Concept 8) Information systems are used to support business processes.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To understand business processes Classification: Concept 9) Systems analysis and design is the process of creating and maintaining information systems.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To understand and be able to apply the systems development life cycle (SDLC) model Classification: Concept 10) The classic systems analysis methodology is called the Analysis Development Life Cycle (ADLC).

Answer: FALSE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To understand and be able to apply the systems development life cycle (SDLC) model Classification: Concept 11) User interviews are conducted during the requirements analysis step.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To understand and be able to apply the systems development life cycle (SDLC) model Classification: Concept 12) One deliverable from the requirements analysis step is a statement of requirements (SOR).

Answer: FALSE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To understand and be able to apply the systems development life cycle (SDLC) model Classification: Concept

2 ..

13) Data models are created during the component design step.

Answer: FALSE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To understand and be able to apply the systems development life cycle (SDLC) model Classification: Concept 14) Database designs are created during the component design step.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To understand and be able to apply the systems development life cycle (SDLC) model Classification: Concept 15) Databases are created in a DBMS during the implementation step.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To understand and be able to apply the systems development life cycle (SDLC) model Classification: Concept 16) Data is composed of ________.

A) facts B) numbers C) information D) Both A and B are correct Answer: D AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To understand information systems Classification: Concept 17) Which of the following is not a definition of information?

A) Data presented in a meaningful context B) Knowledge derived from data C) Data processed by summing, ordering, averaging, grouping, comparing or other similar operations D) A list of facts Answer: D AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To understand information systems Classification: Concept

3 ..

18) Which of the following is not a component of a computer-based information system?

A) Hardware B) Software C) The inventory in the warehouse D) Data Answer: C AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To understand information systems Classification: Concept 19) Which of the following is not included in Michael Porter's list of primary or operational activities?

A) Procurement B) Inbound logistics C) Manufacturing operations D) Outbound logistics Answer: A AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To understand information systems Classification: Concept 20) Which of the following is not included in Michael Porter's list of support activities?

A) Technology management B) Customer service C) Human resources management D) Firm infrastructure management Answer: B AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To understand information systems Classification: Concept 21) The classic systems analysis methodology is called the ________.

A) Systems Development Life Cycle (SDLC) B) Analysis Development Life Cycle (ADLC) C) Component Development Life Cycle (CDLC) D) Information Development Life Cycle (IDLC) Answer: A AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To understand and be able to apply the systems development life cycle (SDLC) model Classification: Concept

4 ..

22) User interviews are conducted during the ________ step of the SDLC. A) system definition B) requirements analysis C) component design D) implementation Answer: B AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To understand and be able to apply the systems development life cycle (SDLC) model Classification: Concept 23) A deliverable from the requirements analysis step is a ________.

A) user requirements document (URD) B) user requirements statement (URS) C) statement of work (SOW) D) A and sometimes C Answer: D AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To understand and be able to apply the systems development life cycle (SDLC) model Classification: Concept 24) Data models are created during the ________ step of the SDLC. A) system definition B) requirements analysis C) component design D) implementation Answer: B AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To understand and be able to apply the systems development life cycle (SDLC) model Classification: Concept 25) Database designs are created during the ________ step of the SDLC. A) system definition B) requirements analysis C) component design D) implementation Answer: C AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To understand and be able to apply the systems development life cycle (SDLC) model Classification: Concept

5 ..

26) Databases are created in a DBMS during the ________ step of the SDLC. A) system definition B) requirements analysis C) component design D) implementation Answer: D AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To understand and be able to apply the systems development life cycle (SDLC) model Classification: Concept 27) Hardware specifications are determined during the ________ step of the SDLC. A) system definition B) requirements analysis C) component design D) implementation Answer: C AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To understand and be able to apply the systems development life cycle (SDLC) model Classification: Concept 28) Hardware is installed and tested during the ________ step of the SDLC. A) requirements analysis B) component design C) implementation D) systems maintenance Answer: C AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To understand and be able to apply the systems development life cycle (SDLC) model Classification: Concept 29) People are hired (if necessary) and trained during the ________ step of the SDLC. A) system definition B) requirements analysis C) component design D) implementation Answer: D AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To understand and be able to apply the systems development life cycle (SDLC) model Classification: Concept

6 ..

30) The system is updated with patches, service packs and new software releases during the ________ step of the SDLC. A) requirements analysis B) component design C) implementation D) systems maintenance Answer: D AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To understand and be able to apply the systems development life cycle (SDLC) model Classification: Concept 31) Which of the following does a User Requirements Document (URD) typically NOT contain?

A) A data model B) Functional requirements C) The scope of the work to be done D) Project delivery requirements Answer: C AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To be able to create a user requirements document (URD) Classification: Concept 32) Which of the following does a Statement of work (SOW) typically not contain?

A) Non-functional requirements (speed and time, capacity and reliability) B) An identification of who will do the work C) The objectives of the work to be done D) The location of where the work will be done Answer: A AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To be able to create a statement of work (SOW) Classification: Concept 33) Briefly define and discuss what an information system is, the five components that comprise an information system, and what the purpose of an information system is.

Answer: A system is a set of components that interact to achieve some purpose or goal, and an information system is a system that has the goal of producing information. An information system has five components: hardware, software, data, processing, and people.

AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To understand information systems Classification: Concept

7 ..

34) How does Michael Porter define primary or operational business activities? What do they include?

Answer: Michael Porter includes five business activities in his definition of primary or operational activities. These include: • Inbound logistics: receiving, storing and distributing product inputs.

• Manufacturing operations: transforming inputs into the final product.

• Outbound logistics: collecting, storing, and distributing the product to buyers.

• Sales and marketing: convincing customers to buy the product and selling it to them.

• Customer service: assisting the customers in their use of the product.

AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To understand business processes Classification: Concept 35) How does Michael Porter define support business activities? What do they include?

Answer: Michael Porter includes four business activities in his definition of support activities.

These include: • Procurement: managing supplier relationships and buying the product inputs.

• Technology management: product research and development and new procedures, methods and techniques.

• Human resources management: managing employee resources.

• Firm infrastructure management: general management of the firm, finance, accounting, legal services, and government affairs.

AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To understand business processes Classification: Concept 36) What are the five steps or stages of the systems development life cycle (SDLC)?

Answer: The five steps or stages of the SDLC are: • System definition • Requirements analysis • Component design • Implementation • System maintenance AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To understand and be able to apply the systems development life cycle (SDLC) model Classification: Concept

8 ..

37) What activities take place during the component design step of the systems development life cycle (SDLC)?

Answer: During the component design step of the SDLC, we • Determine hardware specifications • Determine program (software) specifications • Create the database design • Design business procedures • Create job descriptions for business personnel AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To understand and be able to apply the systems development life cycle (SDLC) model Classification: Concept

9 ..

Database Processing, 14e (Kroenke) Appendix C: E-R Diagrams and the IDEF1X Standard 1) IDEF1X entities are the same as the entities in the extended E-R model.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To understand IDEF1X-standard E-R diagrams Classification: Concept 2) Extended E-R model 1:1 relationships are called nonidentifying connection relationships in IDEF1X. Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To understand IDEF1X-standard E-R diagrams Classification: Concept 3) Extended E-R model 1:N relationships are called identifying connection relationships in IDEF1X. Answer: FALSE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To understand IDEF1X-standard E-R diagrams Classification: Concept 4) Extended E-R model N:M relationships are called nonidentifying connection relationships in IDEF1X. Answer: FALSE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To understand IDEF1X-standard E-R diagrams Classification: Concept 5) Extended E-R model weak, but non-ID-dependent relationships are called nonidentifying connection relationships in IDEF1X. Answer: FALSE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To understand IDEF1X-standard E-R diagrams Classification: Concept

1 ..

6) IDEF1X nonspecific relationships correspond to N:M relationships in the extended E-R model.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To understand IDEF1X-standard E-R diagrams Classification: Concept 7) IDEF1X identifying connection relationships correspond to ID-dependent relationships in the extended E-R model.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To understand IDEF1X-standard E-R diagrams Classification: Concept 8) The IDEF1X default cardinality of a nonidentifying connection relationship is one-to-one, with a mandatory parent and an optional child.

Answer: FALSE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To be able to model nonidentifying connection relationships, identifying connection relationships, nonspecific relationships, and categorization relationships using the IDEF1X E-R model Classification: Concept 9) The IDEF1X default cardinality of a nonidentifying connection relationship is indicated by a dashed line with a filled-in circle by the child and no other notation.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To be able to model nonidentifying connection relationships, identifying connection relationships, nonspecific relationships, and categorization relationships using the IDEF1X E-R model Classification: Concept 10) The IDEF1X equivalent of the extended E-R model subtype is the category entity, and category entities are placed in categorization clusters.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To understand the differences between E-R generalization/subtype relationships and IDEF1X categorization relationships Classification: Concept

2 ..

11) The IDEF1X standard excludes the concept of domains found in the extended E-R model.

Answer: FALSE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To understand the use of domains in the IDEF1X E-R model Classification: Concept 12) A categorization relationship is an IS-A relationship.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To understand the differences between E-R generalization/subtype relationships and IDEF1X categorization relationships Classification: Concept 13) IDEF1X categories are put into a cluster.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To understand the differences between E-R generalization/subtype relationships and IDEF1X categorization relationships Classification: Concept 14) IDEF1X category entities are mutually exclusive within a cluster.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To understand the differences between E-R generalization/subtype relationships and IDEF1X categorization relationships Classification: Concept 15) IDEF1X category clusters may be either complete or incomplete.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To understand the differences between E-R generalization/subtype relationships and IDEF1X categorization relationships Classification: Concept 16) IDEFIX domains are numbered sets of values.

Answer: FALSE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To understand the use of domains in the IDEF1X E-R model Classification: Concept

3 ..

17) In IDEF1X, extended E-R model 1:1 relationships are called ________.

A) nonidentifying connection relationships B) identifying connection relationships C) nonspecific relationships D) category clusters Answer: A AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To be able to model nonidentifying connection relationships, identifying connection relationships, nonspecific relationships, and categorization relationships using the IDEF1X E-R model Classification: Concept 18) In IDEF1X, extended E-R model 1:N relationships are called ________.

A) nonidentifying connection relationships B) identifying connection relationships C) nonspecific relationships D) category clusters Answer: A AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To be able to model nonidentifying connection relationships, identifying connection relationships, nonspecific relationships, and categorization relationships using the IDEF1X E-R model Classification: Concept 19) In IDEF1X, extended E-R model N:M relationships are called ________.

A) nonidentifying connection relationships B) identifying connection relationships C) nonspecific relationships D) category clusters Answer: C AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To be able to model nonidentifying connection relationships, identifying connection relationships, nonspecific relationships, and categorization relationships using the IDEF1X E-R model Classification: Concept

4 ..

20) In IDEF1X, extended E-R model ID-dependent relationships are called ________.

A) nonidentifying connection relationships B) identifying connection relationships C) nonspecific relationships D) category clusters Answer: B AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To be able to model nonidentifying connection relationships, identifying connection relationships, nonspecific relationships, and categorization relationships using the IDEF1X E-R model Classification: Concept 21) In IDEF1X, extended E-R model weak, but non-ID-dependent relationships are called ________.

A) identifying connection relationships B) nonspecific relationships C) category clusters D) There is no equivalent IDEF1X term.

Answer: D AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To be able to model nonidentifying connection relationships, identifying connection relationships, nonspecific relationships, and categorization relationships using the IDEF1X E-R model Classification: Concept 22) In IDEF1X, extended E-R model supertype entities are called ________.

A) generic entities B) category entities C) nonspecific entities D) category clusters Answer: A AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To understand the differences between E-R generalization/subtype relationships and IDEF1X categorization relationships Classification: Concept

5 ..

23) In IDEF1X, extended E-R model subtype entities are called ________.

A) generic entities B) category entities C) nonspecific entities D) category clusters Answer: B AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To understand the differences between E-R generalization/subtype relationships and IDEF1X categorization relationships Classification: Concept 24) In IDEF1X, extended E-R model subtype entities are grouped into ________.

A) generic entities B) category entities C) nonspecific entities D) category clusters E) There is no equivalent IDEF1X term.

Answer: D AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To understand the differences between E-R generalization/subtype relationships and IDEF1X categorization relationships Classification: Concept 25) In IDEF1X, the named set of values that an attribute can have is called a ________.

A) domain B) base domain C) type domain D) domain cluster Answer: A AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To understand the use of domains in the IDEF1X E-R model Classification: Concept 26) In IDEF1X, the two kinds of domains are ________.

A) base and column B) base and type C) type and column D) entity and type Answer: B AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To understand the use of domains in the IDEF1X E-R model Classification: Concept 6 ..

27) In IDEF1X, a category cluster includes BLACK and WHITE, which are the only possible categories. This is an IDEF1X ________.

A) complete category cluster B) incomplete category cluster C) inherited category cluster D) inconclusive category cluster Answer: A AACSB: Information Technology; Application of Knowledge Difficulty: Moderate LO: To be able to model nonidentifying connection relationships, identifying connection relationships, nonspecific relationships, and categorization relationships using the IDEF1X E-R model Classification: Application 28) In IDEF1X, a category cluster includes BLACK and WHITE, but does not show GREY, which is also a possible category. This is an IDEF1X ________.

A) complete category cluster B) incomplete category cluster C) inherited category cluster D) inconclusive category cluster Answer: B AACSB: Information Technology; Application of Knowledge Difficulty: Moderate LO: To be able to model nonidentifying connection relationships, identifying connection relationships, nonspecific relationships, and categorization relationships using the IDEF1X E-R model Classification: Application 29) In IDEF1X, a base domain can have any of the following except a ________.

A) data type B) value list C) range definition D) default value Answer: D AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Difficult LO: To understand the use of domains in the IDEF1X E-R model Classification: Concept

7 ..

30) In IDEF1X, a type domain allows ________.

A) different data types B) different values C) greater specificity of values D) default values Answer: C AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Difficult LO: To understand the use of domains in the IDEF1X E-R model Classification: Concept 31) In IDEF1X, a non-specific relationship is indicated by ________.

A) a hollow circle on each end of the solid relationship line B) no circles on either end of the dotted relationship line C) a solid circle on each end of the solid relationship line D) a solid circle on each end of the dotted relationship line Answer: C AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Difficult LO: To be able to model nonidentifying connection relationships, identifying connection relationships, nonspecific relationships, and categorization relationships using the IDEF1X E-R model Classification: Concept 32) In an IDEF1X identifying connection relationship, ________.

A) the identifier of the child is always part of the identifier of the parent B) the identifier of the parent is always part of the identifier of the child C) the identifier of the parent is always the same as the identifier of the child D) the identifier of the parent is optional Answer: B AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Difficult LO: To be able to model nonidentifying connection relationships, identifying connection relationships, nonspecific relationships, and categorization relationships using the IDEF1X E-R model Classification: Concept 33) What is IDEF1X? Answer: IDEF1X stands for Integrated Definition 1, Extended, and is a variation of the extended E-R model. It became a national standard in 1993, and is based on earlier work done for the U.S. military. Companies doing business with the U.S. government may be required to use it, and most data modeling products have some capability to produce IDEF1X type diagrams.

AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To understand IDEF1X-standard E-R diagrams Classification: Concept 8 ..

34) What are the IDEF1X equivalents of 1:1, 1:N and N:M relationships?

Answer: For relationships between strong entities, 1:1 and 1:N relationships are called nonidentifying connection relationships and N:M relationships are called nonspecific relationships. ID-dependent 1:N relationships are called identifying connection relationships, but there is no IDEF1X equivalent term for a weak but non-ID-dependent relationship.

AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To understand IDEF1X-standard E-R diagrams Classification: Concept 35) What line symbols are used in IDEF1X diagrams to represent relationships?

Answer: In IDEF1X, nonidentifying connection relationships are drawn as dashed lines.

Identifying connection relationships are drawn as solid lines, as are nonspecific relationships.

AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To be able to model nonidentifying connection relationships, identifying connection relationships, nonspecific relationships, and categorization relationships using the IDEF1X E-R model Classification: Concept 36) What symbols are used in IDEF1X diagrams to represent cardinalities?

Answer: In IDEF1X, nonidentifying connection relationships have a default cardinality of oneto-many, with a mandatory parent and optional child. This is represented by placing a filled-in circle by the child. The same notation is the default for identifying connection relationships.

Nonspecific relationships place a filled-in circle at each end of the connecting line, but there is no way to indicate a minimum cardinality. Additional symbology that may be used is a diamond next to the parent to indicate that it is optional, a P to indicate "one-or-more", and a Z to indicate "zero-or-one."

AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To be able to model nonidentifying connection relationships, identifying connection relationships, nonspecific relationships, and categorization relationships using the IDEF1X E-R model Classification: Concept 37) What are IDEF1X domains?

Answer: IDEF1X domains define a named set of possible values for an attribute. IDEF1X has two types of domains, base domains and type domains. A base domain is a domain with a data type and a value list or range definition. A type domain is a subset of a base domain or another type domain, and allows a domain hierarchy to be constructed.

AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To understand the use of domains in the IDEF1X E-R model Classification: Concept

9 ..

Database Processing, 14e (Kroenke) Appendix D: E-R Diagrams and the UML Standard 1) UML is intended for modeling and designing object-oriented programs and applications.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To understand UML-style E-R diagrams Classification: Concept 2) In UML, cardinalities are represented by an x .. y format.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To understand UML-style E-R diagrams Classification: Concept 3) Maximum cardinalities are represented in UML-style E-R diagrams with the same notation (1:1, 1:N, N:M) as in traditional E-R diagrams.

Answer: FALSE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To understand UML-style E-R diagrams Classification: Concept 4) In UML-style E-R diagrams, a weak entity is shown by placing a filled-in diamond on the parent of the weak entity.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To understand UML-style E-R diagrams Classification: Concept 5) One weakness of UML-style E-R diagrams is that there is no means of distinguishing between a weak entity that is ID-dependent and a weak entity that is not ID-dependent.

Answer: FALSE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To be able to model HAS-A, nonidentifying, identifying, and IS-A relationships using UML symbols.

Classification: Concept

1 ..

6) UML-style E-R diagrams introduce object-oriented notation that is of limited practical value in traditional, relational database design.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Difficult LO: To understand the object-oriented programming language constructs used in UML Classification: Concept 7) UML-style E-R diagrams allow for the existence of class attributes which are attributes that pertain to the collection of all entities within that class, not to the individual entity instances themselves.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Difficult LO: To understand the object-oriented programming language constructs used in UML Classification: Concept 8) In UML notation, the relationship line in a relationship with an ID-dependent weak entity is labeled as <id-dependent>.

Answer: FALSE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To be able to model HAS-A, nonidentifying, identifying, and IS-A relationships using UML symbols.

Classification: Concept 9) In UML notation, the relationship line in a relationship with a non-ID-dependent weak entity is labeled as <nonidentifying>.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To be able to model HAS-A, nonidentifying, identifying, and IS-A relationships using UML symbols.

Classification: Concept 10) The classes of all entities to be stored in the database are labeled <<persistent>>.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To understand the object-oriented programming language constructs used in UML Classification: Concept

2 ..

11) Persistent means that data should continue to exist in the database even if the object that processes it is destroyed.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To understand the object-oriented programming language constructs used in UML Classification: Concept 12) Three levels of visibility for attributes in UML diagrams are: Private, Protected, and Public.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To understand the object-oriented programming language constructs used in UML Classification: Concept 13) Attributes preceded by a + are protected.

Answer: FALSE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To understand the object-oriented programming language constructs used in UML Classification: Concept 14) Attributes preceded by a # are private.

Answer: FALSE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To understand the object-oriented programming language constructs used in UML Classification: Concept 15) Attributes preceded by a + are public.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To understand the object-oriented programming language constructs used in UML Classification: Concept 16) Which of the following is true about UML? A) UML is a methodology for developing OOP systems.

B) UML is a set of tools to support the development OOP systems.

C) UML is primarily focused on database development.

D) Both A and B are correct.

Answer: D AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To understand UML-style E-R diagrams Classification: Concept 3 ..

17) In UML-style E-R diagrams, the second segment of an entity class contains ________.

A) the name of the entity B) the cardinalities of the entity C) relationships D) entity attributes Answer: D AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To understand UML-style E-R diagrams Classification: Concept 18) In UML-style E-R diagrams, the third segment of an entity class contains ________.

A) the name of the entity B) the cardinalities of the entity C) constraints and methods D) entity attributes Answer: C AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To understand UML-style E-R diagrams Classification: Concept 19) Which of the following would indicate a minimum cardinality of 1 and a maximum cardinality of many in UML notation?

A) 1:N B) 1 .. N C) 1 .. * D) 1:* Answer: C AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To understand UML-style E-R diagrams Classification: Concept 20) Which of the following is not a true statement about the current version of UML? A) UML places a filled-in diamond on the parent of a weak entity.

B) UML provides a means to document exclusivity among subtypes.

C) UML uses the label <identifying> to document an ID-dependent relationship.

D) UML shows the cardinality on the parent entity of a weak entity as simply "1."

Answer: B AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Difficult LO: To be able to model HAS-A, nonidentifying, identifying, and IS-A relationships using UML symbols.

Classification: Concept

4 ..

21) In UML-style E-R diagrams, which of the following would be considered a class attribute of the entity class CUSTOMER? A) Customer Name (meaning, the first and last name of the customer) B) Customer Address (meaning, the street, city, state, and zip code of the customer's residence) C) Customer Count (meaning, the count of the number of customers) D) Customer Number (meaning, an assigned number to uniquely identify a customer) Answer: C AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Difficult LO: To understand the object-oriented programming language constructs used in UML Classification: Concept 22) Which of the following is not a characteristic that was introduced to E-R diagramming by UML? A) Class attributes B) Relationship attributes C) Visibility of attributes D) Methods Answer: B AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Difficult LO: To understand the object-oriented programming language constructs used in UML Classification: Concept 23) In UML, an attribute preceded by a(n) ________ is "protected."

A) <persistent> B) # C) D) + Answer: B AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To understand the object-oriented programming language constructs used in UML Classification: Concept 24) In UML, an attribute that is accessible only by methods of its entity class or of its subclasses is said to be ________.

A) private B) exclusive C) protected D) public Answer: C AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To understand the object-oriented programming language constructs used in UML Classification: Concept 5 ..

25) In UML, an attribute that is accessible only by methods of its entity class is said to be ________.

A) private B) exclusive C) protected D) public Answer: A AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To understand the object-oriented programming language constructs used in UML Classification: Concept 26) In UML, an attribute that is accessible and can be changed by any method of any object is said to be ________.

A) private B) exclusive C) protected D) public Answer: A AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To understand the object-oriented programming language constructs used in UML Classification: Concept

6 ..

27) In the UML-style entity class ORDERS shown above, "SumOfOrders" is ________.

A) an entity attribute B) a method C) a constraint D) a class attribute Answer: D AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To understand the object-oriented programming language constructs used in UML Classification: Concept 28) In the UML-style entity class ORDERS shown above, "GetOrderNo( )" is a ________.

A) private method B) protected method C) public constraint D) public method Answer: D AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Difficult LO: To understand the object-oriented programming language constructs used in UML Classification: Concept

7 ..

29) In UML notation, the relationship line in a relationship between two strong entities is labeled as ________.

A) <persistent> B) <identifying> C) <nonidentifying> D) There is no label used.

Answer: D AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Difficult LO: To be able to model HAS-A, nonidentifying, identifying, and IS-A relationships using UML symbols.

Classification: Concept 30) In UML notation, the relationship line in a relationship with an ID-dependent weak entity is labeled as ________.

A) <persistent> B) <identifying> C) <nonidentifying> D) <protected> Answer: B AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To be able to model HAS-A, nonidentifying, identifying, and IS-A relationships using UML symbols.

Classification: Concept 31) In UML notation, the relationship line in a relationship with an non-ID-dependent weak entity is labeled as ________.

A) <persistent> B) <identifying> C) <nonidentifying> D) There is no label used.

Answer: C AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To be able to model HAS-A, nonidentifying, identifying, and IS-A relationships using UML symbols.

Classification: Concept 32) What new contributions to data modeling do UML-style E-R diagrams introduce?

Answer: UML-style diagrams are a relatively new technique that focus on object-oriented application design. UML-style diagrams introduce new, object-oriented concepts to data modeling such as persistence, class attributes, visibility of attributes, and methods.

AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To understand the object-oriented programming language constructs used in UML Classification: Concept 8 ..

33) How are entity classes drawn in UML-style E-R diagrams?

Answer: UML-style E-R diagrams draw an entity as a vertical rectangle with three segments.

The top segment shows the name of the entity, entity persistence and class attributes (if any). The second segment holds the entity attribute names, and the third segment documents OOP constraints and methods that belong to the entity. Public, Protected, Private attributes and methods are preceded by +.#, -, respectively.

AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To understand UML-style E-R diagrams Classification: Concept 34) What cardinality format is used in UML-style E-R diagrams?

Answer: UML-style E-R diagrams use an x..y cardinality format., where x is the minimum cardinality and y is the maximum cardinality. An asterisk (*) is used to represent an unlimited number. Thus, 0..1 means the entity has optional participation with a maximum of one, and 1..* means that the entity has mandatory participation with an unlimited maximum.

AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To understand UML-style E-R diagrams Classification: Concept 35) What format is used for weak entities in UML-style E-R diagrams?

Answer: UML-style E-R diagrams indicate a weak entity by placing a diamond at the parent end of the connecting line, together with a single number one to represent the a 1..1 cardinality for the parent. To differentiate between ID-dependent and non-ID-dependent relationships, a label is added to the connecting line. If the relationship is ID-dependent, the label <identifying> is added, and if the relationship is non-ID-dependent, the label <nonidentifying> is added.

AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To be able to model HAS-A, nonidentifying, identifying, and IS-A relationships using UML symbols.

Classification: Concept 36) What is OOP persistence, and how is it indicated in UML-style E-R diagrams?

Answer: Persistence in OOP means that the data for classes of entities, and thus the entity class itself, will be stored in the database. This is indicated by labeling entities with the keyword <<Persistent>>.

AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To understand the object-oriented programming language constructs used in UML Classification: Concept

9 ..

Database Processing, 14e (Kroenke) Appendix E: Getting Started with MySQL Workbench Data Modeling Tools 1) The installation of the MySQL Community Edition 5.6 always includes the installation of the MySQL Workbench.

Answer: FALSE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: Learn how to install MySQL Workbench and MySQL ODBC/Connector Classification: Concept 2) The MySQL Installer for Windows can be used to install the MySQL Workbench.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: Learn how to install MySQL Workbench and MySQL ODBC/Connector Classification: Concept 3) The MySQL Installer for Linux can be used to install the MySQL Workbench.

Answer: FALSE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: Learn how to install MySQL Workbench and MySQL ODBC/Connector Classification: Concept 4) In the Windows 8 or 8.1 OS, to start working with the MySQL Workbench use the command Start | All Programs | MySQL | MySQL Workbench 6.1 CE. Answer: FALSE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: Learn how to create database designs in the MySQL Workbench Classification: Concept 5) In order to create MySQL EER diagrams, users must log into MySQL using the Connect to Database and the Connect to MySQL Server dialog boxes.

Answer: FALSE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: Learn how to create database designs in the MySQL Workbench Classification: Concept

1 ..

6) Users should create a MySQL Workspace folder to hold documents created with the MySQL Workbench.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: Learn how to create database designs in the MySQL Workbench Classification: Concept 7) Users should create a folder to hold EER models created with the MySQL Workbench.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: Learn how to create database designs in the MySQL Workbench Classification: Concept 8) The MySQL Workbench EER models are data models.

Answer: FALSE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: Learn how to create database designs in the MySQL Workbench Classification: Concept 9) To create a new MySQL Workbench EER model, you can use the Create new EER Model link on the Home page.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: Learn how to create database designs in the MySQL Workbench Classification: Concept 10) To create a new MySQL Workbench EER model, you can use the File | New Model command.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: Learn how to create database designs in the MySQL Workbench Classification: Concept 11) To add a table to a database design, click the Place a New Table button, move the cursor to the diagram area and click the left mouse button.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: Learn how to create database designs in the MySQL Workbench Classification: Concept

2 ..

12) Table names are edited in the MySQL EER Component Editor.

Answer: FALSE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: Learn how to create database designs in the MySQL Workbench Classification: Concept 13) Table column characteristics can be edited in the MySQL Table Editor.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: Learn how to create database designs in the MySQL Workbench Classification: Concept 14) In the MySQL Table Editor, the abbreviation PK stands for partial key.

Answer: FALSE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: Learn how to create database designs in the MySQL Workbench Classification: Concept 15) In the MySQL Table Editor, the abbreviation NN stands for NOT NULL. Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: Learn how to create database designs in the MySQL Workbench Classification: Concept 16) In the MySQL Table Editor, the abbreviation AI stands for AUTO_INCREMENT. Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: Learn how to create database designs in the MySQL Workbench Classification: Concept 17) In the MySQL Workbench, a 1:N non-identifying relationship between two tables that already contain the needed primary and foreign keys is created using the 1:N Non-identifying Relationship button.

Answer: FALSE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: Learn how to create database designs in the MySQL Workbench Classification: Concept

3 ..

18) In the MySQL Workbench, a 1:N non-identifying relationship between two tables that already contain the needed primary and foreign keys is created using the Place a Relationship Using Existing Columns button.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: Learn how to create database designs in the MySQL Workbench Classification: Concept 19) The MySQL Installer for Windows should be used to install MySQL Community Edition components on computers running which operating system(s)?

A) Microsoft Windows B) Unix C) Linux D) Both B and C are correct Answer: A AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: Learn how to install MySQL Workbench and MySQL ODBC/Connector Classification: Concept 20) The authors recommend using which of the following folder structures with the MySQL Workbench?

A) ..\MyDocuments\MySQL Workbench\EER Models B) ..\MyDocuments\MySQL Workbench\Schemas C) ..\MyDocuments\MySQL Workbench\Databases D) Both A and B are correct.

Answer: D AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: Learn how to create database designs in the MySQL Workbench Classification: Concept 21) In Windows, to use MySQL Workbench to create database designs, you must log into MySQL using ________.

A) the Connect to Database dialog box B) the Connect to MySQL Server dialog box C) the MySQL | Connect to Server command D) No login is required Answer: D AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: Learn how to create database designs in the MySQL Workbench Classification: Concept

4 ..

22) To create a new MySQL Workbench EER model, you can use ________.

A) the add Model link on the Home page B) the File | New Model command C) the Start new EER command D) Both A or B are correct Answer: D AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: Learn how to create database designs in the MySQL Workbench Classification: Concept 23) To place a table in a MySQL database design, start by clicking the ________.

A) Table button B) Entity button C) Place a New Table button D) Place a New Entity button Answer: C AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: Learn how to create database designs in the MySQL Workbench Classification: Concept 24) In the MySQL Table Editor, the abbreviation for NOT NULL is ________.

A) PK B) NN C) UQ D) BIN Answer: B AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: Learn how to create database designs in the MySQL Workbench Classification: Concept 25) In the MySQL Table Editor, the abbreviation for Primary Key is ________.

A) PK B) NN C) UQ D) AI Answer: A AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: Learn how to create database designs in the MySQL Workbench Classification: Concept

5 ..

26) In the MySQL Table Editor, the abbreviation for AUTO_INCREMENT is ________.

A) PK B) NN C) UQ D) AI Answer: D AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: Learn how to create database designs in the MySQL Workbench Classification: Concept 27) In the MySQL Workbench, a 1:N non-identifying relationship between two tables that already contain the needed primary and foreign keys is created using ________.

A) the 1:N Identifying Relationship button B) the 1:N Non-identifying Relationship button C) the N:M Identifying Relationship button D) the Place a Relationship Using Existing Columns button Answer: D AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: Learn how to create database designs in the MySQL Workbench Classification: Concept 28) In the MySQL Workbench, a 1:N non-identifying relationship between two tables that do not contain the needed primary and foreign keys is created using ________.

A) the 1:N Identifying Relationship button B) the 1:N Non-identifying Relationship button C) the N:M Identifying Relationship button D) the Place a Relationship Using Existing Columns button Answer: B AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: Learn how to create database designs in the MySQL Workbench Classification: Concept 29) In the MySQL Workbench, a 1:N identifying relationship between two tables that do not contain the needed primary and foreign keys is created using ________.

A) the 1:N Identifying Relationship button B) the 1:N Non-identifying Relationship button C) the N:M Identifying Relationship button D) the Place a Relationship Using Existing Columns button Answer: A AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: Learn how to create database designs in the MySQL Workbench Classification: Concept 6 ..

30) In the MySQL Workbench, a 1:N identifying relationship between two tables that already contain the needed primary and foreign keys is created using ________.

A) the 1:N Identifying Relationship button B) the 1:N Non-identifying Relationship button C) the N:M Identifying Relationship button D) the Place a Relationship Using Existing Columns button Answer: D AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: Learn how to create database designs in the MySQL Workbench Classification: Concept 31) The MySQL Workbench can be used to create ________.

A) data models B) data designs C) database models D) database designs Answer: D AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: Learn how to create database designs in the MySQL Workbench Classification: Concept 32) By default, the E-R diagrams created in the MySQL Workbench use ________.

A) IE Crow's Foot notation B) IDEF1X notation C) UML notation D) Microsoft Visio 2013 Arrow notation Answer: A AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: Learn how to create database designs in the MySQL Workbench Classification: Concept 33) Describe how to get started creating a new database design in the MySQL Workbench.

Answer: In the MySQL Workbench, new database designs are created using either the File | New Model command or the add Model link on the home page. MySQL calls these models EER models, but they are actually database designs. At this point, the actual ER diagram is created by double clicking the Add Diagram icon in the Model Overview section on the MySQL Model page.

AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: Learn how to create database designs in the MySQL Workbench Classification: Concept

7 ..

34) Describe how to add a table object to a MySQL Workbench database design.

Answer: To add a new table object, click the Place a New Table button, then move the cursor in the E-R diagram area and then click the left mouse button. The new table object appears.

AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: Learn how to create database designs in the MySQL Workbench Classification: Concept 35) Describe how to set table properties in a MySQL Workbench database design.

Answer: Double-click the table object to open the MySQL Table Editor. The Table tab will be selected, which allows the table name to be edited. After the table name is edited, click the Columns tab to create and edit the table properties. These include Column Name, Datatype, and a select of other column properties that include Primary Key (PK), NON NULL (NN), and AUTO_INCREMENT (AI).

AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: Learn how to create database designs in the MySQL Workbench Classification: Concept 36) Describe how to create relationships in a MySQL Workbench database design.

Answer: The MySQL Workbench includes a set of button that are used to create relationships between two tables. If the tables already contain the appropriate primary and foreign keys, the relationship should be created using the Place a Relationship Using Existing Columns button.

If the tables do not have the needed foreign key, use the 1:1 Non-identifying Relationship button, the 1:N Non-identifying Relationship button, the 1:N Identifying Relationship button, the 1:N Identifying Relationship button, or the N:M Identifying Relationship button as appropriate to create the needed relationship. Note that the N:M Identifying Relationship button actually adds an intersection table and two 1:N Identifying Relationships.

AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Difficult LO: Learn how to create database designs in the MySQL Workbench Classification: Concept 37) Describe the MySQL Connector/ODBC and how to install it.

Answer: The MySQL Connector/ODBC is a downloadable utility that provides the MySQL ODBC 5.3.4 driver. For the Windows operating system, use the MySQL Installer for Windows.

For non-Windows operating systems, download it from the MySQL development Web site, and run the installation. After the installation, the MySQL ODBC 5.3.4 driver will appear in the ODBC Data Source Administrator.

AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: Learn how to install MySQL Workbench and MySQL ODBC/Connector Classification: Concept

8 ..

Database Processing, 14e (Kroenke) Appendix F: Getting Started with Microsoft Visio 2013 1) Microsoft Visio 2013 is a component of Microsoft Office 2013.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To learn how to create data models in Microsoft Visio 2013 Classification: Concept 2) Microsoft Visio 2013 can be used to create data models.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To learn how to create data models in Microsoft Visio 2013 Classification: Concept 3) In Microsoft Visio 2013, clicking the File command tab opens the Backstage view.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To learn how to create data models in Microsoft Visio 2013 Classification: Concept 4) In Microsoft Visio 2013, both data models and database designs are created using the Database Model Diagram template.

Answer: FALSE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To learn how to create data models in Microsoft Visio 2013 Classification: Concept 5) In Microsoft Visio 2013, a group of template objects is called a stencil.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To learn how to create data models in Microsoft Visio 2013 Classification: Concept 6) In Microsoft Visio 2013, when the Entity object is placed in a diagram, it is labeled as a table.

Answer: FALSE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To learn how to create data models in Microsoft Visio 2013 Classification: Concept

1 ..

7) In Microsoft Visio 2013, the Crow's Foot Database Notation stencil objects include a Recursive Relationship object.

Answer: FALSE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To learn how to create data models in Microsoft Visio 2013 Classification: Concept 8) In Microsoft Visio 2013, the Crow's Foot Database Notation stencil objects include a Category object.

Answer: FALSE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To learn how to create data models in Microsoft Visio 2013 Classification: Concept 9) In Microsoft Visio 2013, we can create data models using Entity and Relationship objects.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To learn how to create data models in Microsoft Visio 2013 Classification: Concept 10) In Microsoft Visio 2013, we can create database designs using Entity and Dynamic connector objects.

Answer: FALSE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To learn how to create data models in Microsoft Visio 2013 Classification: Concept 11) In Microsoft Visio 2013, Dynamic connector objects can be formatted with the line end symbols needed to create IE Crow's Foot notation.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To learn how to create data models in Microsoft Visio 2013 Classification: Concept 12) In Microsoft Visio 2013, Relationship connector objects can be formatted with the line end symbols needed to create IE Crow's Foot notation.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To learn how to create data models in Microsoft Visio 2013 Classification: Concept 2 ..

13) In Microsoft Visio 2013, the arrow end of the Relationship connector object points to the table containing the foreign key.

Answer: FALSE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To learn how to create data models in Microsoft Visio 2013 Classification: Concept 14) In Microsoft Visio 2013, the arrow end of the Dynamic connector object points to the table containing the primary key.

Answer: FALSE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To learn how to create data models in Microsoft Visio 2013 Classification: Concept 15) In Microsoft Visio 2013, the cardinalities of the relationship are set using the Set Begin Symbol and Set End Symbol commands.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To learn how to create data models in Microsoft Visio 2013 Classification: Concept 16) In Microsoft Visio 2013, for a Relationship object relationship that is one-mandatory on the child side of the relationship, the correct setting in the Symbol menu is ________.

A) 1 and only 1 B) 1 or more C) Zero or 1 D) Zero or more Answer: A AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To learn how to create data models in Microsoft Visio 2013 Classification: Concept 17) In Microsoft Visio 2013, clicking the FILE command tab opens ________.

A) the File menu B) the Backstage view C) the Open dialog box D) the Save As dialog box Answer: B AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To learn how to create data models in Microsoft Visio 2013 Classification: Concept 3 ..

18) In Microsoft Visio 2013, the data models in this book are created using ________.

A) the Chen's Database Notation template B) the UML database Notation template C) the IDEF1X Database Notation template D) the Crow's Foot Database Notation template Answer: D AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To learn how to create data models in Microsoft Visio 2013 Classification: Concept 19) In Microsoft Visio 2013, when the Entity object is placed in a diagram, it is labeled as a(n) ________.

A) entity B) table C) relationship D) dynamic connector Answer: A AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To learn how to create data models in Microsoft Visio 2013 Classification: Concept 20) In Microsoft Visio 2013, the Crow's Foot Database Notation stencil objects include ________.

A) an Entity object B) a Relationship object C) a Dynamic connector object D) Both A and B are correct Answer: D AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To learn how to create data models in Microsoft Visio 2013 Classification: Concept 21) In Microsoft Visio 2013, we can create data models using ________.

A) Entity and Dynamic connector objects B) Entity and Relationship connector objects C) Category and Dynamic connector objects D) We cannot create data models in Microsoft Visio 2013.

Answer: B AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Difficult LO: To learn how to create data models in Microsoft Visio 2013 Classification: Concept

4 ..

22) In Microsoft Visio 2013, we can create database designs using ________.

A) Entity and Dynamic connector objects B) Entity and Relationship connector objects C) Category and Dynamic connector objects D) We cannot create database designs in Microsoft Visio 2013.

Answer: D AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Difficult LO: To learn how to create data models in Microsoft Visio 2013 Classification: Concept 23) In Microsoft Visio 2013, we can create supertype/subtype relationships in data models using ________.

A) Entity and Dynamic connector objects B) Table and Relationship connector objects C) Category and Relationship connector objects D) There are no separate objects to create supertype/subtype, so we use standard objects.

Answer: D AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To learn how to create data models in Microsoft Visio 2013 Classification: Concept 24) In Microsoft Visio 2013, we can create supertype/subtype relationships in database designs using ________.

A) Entity and Dynamic connector objects B) Entity and Relationship connector objects C) Category and Relationship connector objects D) We cannot create database designs in Microsoft Visio 2013.

Answer: D AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To learn how to create data models in Microsoft Visio 2013 Classification: Concept 25) In Microsoft Visio 2010, which object can be formatted with the line end symbols needed to create IE Crow's Foot notation?

A) Relationship connector object B) Category object C) Parent to category connector object D) Category to child connector object Answer: A AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To learn how to create data models in Microsoft Visio 2013 Classification: Concept 5 ..

26) In Microsoft Visio 2013, the cardinalities of the Relationship connector object end points are formatted using ________.

A) the Set Begin Symbol command B) the Set End Symbol command C) the Set Non-primary Key Unique column D) Both A and B are correct Answer: D AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To learn how to create data models in Microsoft Visio 2013 Classification: Concept 27) In Microsoft Visio 2013, for a Relationship object relationship that is many-mandatory on the child side of the relationship, the correct setting in the Symbol menu is ________.

A) 1 and only 1 B) 1 or more C) Zero or 1 D) Zero or more Answer: B AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To learn how to create data models in Microsoft Visio 2013 Classification: Concept 28) In Microsoft Visio 2013, for a Relationship object relationship that is one-optional on the child side of the relationship, the correct setting in the Symbol menu is ________.

A) 1 and only 1 B) 1 or more C) Zero or 1 D) Zero or more Answer: C AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To learn how to create data models in Microsoft Visio 2013 Classification: Concept 29) When using Microsoft Visio 2013, how do we create a blank diagram for use with a data model?

Answer: To create a blank diagram for a data model or database design, open Microsoft Visio 2013 or click the File command tab as necessary to display the Backstage view, and then click the New tab to display the available templates. Select Database templates , and then the select Crow's Foot Database Notation template. Click the Create button to create the new, blank diagram.

AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To learn how to create data models in Microsoft Visio 2013 Classification: Concept 6 ..

30) In Microsoft Visio 2013, how do we create data models?

Answer: In Microsoft Visio 2013, data models are primarily created using the Entity and Relationship connector objects. The Relationship objects are simple attached line segments, and they do not have any relationship property data such as identifier, primary key or foreign key properties stored with them. They can, however, be formatted so that the line style and line ends match those used in IE Crow's Foot E-R notation.

AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To learn how to create data models in Microsoft Visio 2013 Classification: Concept 31) In Microsoft Visio 2013, how do we format line ends in data models to represent the symbols used in the IE Crow's Foot notation?

Answer: Data models are created using primarily Entity and Relationship objects. The line segments used as relationships can be formatted by using the Set Begin Symbol and Set End Symbol commands on the relationship short cut menu.

AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To learn how to create data models in Microsoft Visio 2013 Classification: Concept 32) In Microsoft Visio 2013, how do we create database designs?

Answer: In Microsoft Visio 2013, we can no longer create database designs as we could in Microsoft Visio 2010. We can only create data models. We can still open database designs created in Microsoft Visio 2010, but they appear unalterable block drawings.

AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To learn how to create data models in Microsoft Visio 2013 Classification: Concept 33) In Microsoft Visio 2013, describe the possible cardinality settings for a Relationship object that can be set in the symbols menu in a database design, and how these settings correspond to the IE Crow's Foot symbols shown in Figure F-20.

Answer: There are five possible settings, and four of these corresponding to IE Crow's Foot symbols in Figure F-21 (repeated Figure 5-8). These are: Zero or more, which corresponds to Many-Optional 1 or more, which corresponds to Many-Mandatory Zero or 1, which corresponds to One-Optional 1 and exactly 1, which corresponds to One-Mandatory The fifth setting allows us to set the cardinality to a specific range.

AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Difficult LO: To learn how to create data models in Microsoft Visio 2013 Classification: Application 7 ..

Database Processing, 14e (Kroenke) Appendix G: Data Structures for Database Processing 1) A flat file is a file that has repeating groups.

Answer: FALSE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To define and illustrate the terms flat file, sequential list, linked list, and index Classification: Concept 2) The DBMS creates physical records, also called blocks, on its direct access fields.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To define and illustrate the terms flat file, sequential list, linked list, and index Classification: Concept 3) Each physical record is addressed by its sequential record number (SRN).

Answer: FALSE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To define and illustrate the terms flat file, sequential list, linked list, and index Classification: Concept 4) Linked lists can be used to keep records in a logical order even if they are not necessarily in physical order.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Difficult LO: To define and illustrate the terms flat file, sequential list, linked list, and index Classification: Concept 5) In a linked list, the sequence field holds the address of the next record in the logical sequence.

Answer: FALSE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To define and illustrate the terms flat file, sequential list, linked list, and index Classification: Concept 6) A two-way linked list has links in both directions.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To define and illustrate the terms flat file, sequential list, linked list, and index Classification: Concept

1 ..

7) An index is a table that cross-references record addresses with some attribute value.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To define and illustrate the terms flat file, sequential list, linked list, and index Classification: Concept 8) A multilevel index that allows both sequential and direct processing of data records is called a C-tree.

Answer: FALSE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To define and illustrate B-tree multilevel indexes Classification: Concept 9) A simple network is a collection of records and the 1:N relationships between them.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To demonstrate how binary relationships are represented using trees, simple networks, and complex networks Classification: Concept 10) A complex network is a collection of records and the 1:N relationships between them.

Answer: FALSE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To demonstrate how binary relationships are represented using trees, simple networks, and complex networks Classification: Concept 11) A tree structure cannot be represented using indexes.

Answer: FALSE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To demonstrate how binary relationships are represented using trees, simple networks, and complex networks Classification: Concept 12) To represent a tree structure using indexes, store each 1:N relationship as an index.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To demonstrate how binary relationships are represented using trees, simple networks, and complex networks Classification: Concept 2 ..

13) A simple network can be represented using linked lists and indexes.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To demonstrate how binary relationships are represented using trees, simple networks, and complex networks Classification: Concept 14) A complex network cannot be decomposed into trees or simple networks.

Answer: FALSE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To demonstrate how binary relationships are represented using trees, simple networks, and complex networks Classification: Concept 15) An intersection record is a record that is created when a complex network is decomposed into a simple network.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To demonstrate how binary relationships are represented using trees, simple networks, and complex networks Classification: Concept 16) The word key indicates a field or fields whose value uniquely or nonuniquely identifies a record or set of records.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Difficult LO: To define and illustrate primary and secondary keys Classification: Concept 17) The primary work key is a field or fields whose value uniquely identifies a record.

Answer: FALSE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To define and illustrate primary and secondary keys Classification: Concept 18) The term set refers to all records having the same nonunique secondary key.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Difficult LO: To define and illustrate unique and nonunique secondary keys Classification: Concept 3 ..

19) A ________ is a file that has no repeating groups.

A) flat file B) stacked file C) record file D) key file Answer: A AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To define and illustrate the terms flat file, sequential list, linked list, and index Classification: Concept 20) The DBMS creates ________, also called blocks, on its direct access fields.

A) psuedo records B) physical records C) secondary file records D) key file records Answer: B AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To define and illustrate the terms flat file, sequential list, linked list, and index Classification: Concept 21) Each physical record is addressed by its ________.

A) relative record number (RRN) B) sequential record number (SRN) C) transaction record number (TRN) D) ultimate record number (URN) Answer: A AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To define and illustrate the terms flat file, sequential list, linked list, and index Classification: Concept 22) Linked lists can be used to keep records in ________.

A) logical order B) physical order C) sequential order D) pseudo order Answer: A AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To define and illustrate the terms flat file, sequential list, linked list, and index Classification: Concept

4 ..

23) A collection of records and the 1:N relationships between them is a ________.

A) simple network B) complex network C) compound network D) logical network Answer: A AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To demonstrate how binary relationships are represented using trees, simple networks, and complex networks Classification: Concept 24) A collection of records and the N:M relationships between them is a ________.

A) simple network B) complex network C) compound network D) logical network Answer: B AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To demonstrate how binary relationships are represented using trees, simple networks, and complex networks Classification: Concept 25) DBMS products represent trees using all of the following except ________.

A) indexes B) linked lists C) sequential lists D) secondary lists Answer: D AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Difficult LO: To demonstrate how binary relationships are represented using trees, simple networks, and complex networks Classification: Concept 26) Simple networks can be represented by using ________.

A) indexes or linked lists B) linked lists or sequential lists C) sequential lists or indexes D) complex networks Answer: A AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Difficult LO: To demonstrate how binary relationships are represented using trees, simple networks, and complex networks Classification: Concept 5 ..

27) Complex networks can be represented by reducing them to simple networks, and then representing the simple networks using ________.

A) indexes or linked lists B) linked lists or sequential lists C) sequential lists or indexes D) trees Answer: A AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Difficult LO: To demonstrate how binary relationships are represented using trees, simple networks, and complex networks Classification: Concept 28) Complex networks can be represented by reducing them to simple networks, which requires the introduction of a(n) ________.

A) association record B) link record C) intersection record D) sequential record Answer: C AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To demonstrate how binary relationships are represented using trees, simple networks, and complex networks Classification: Concept 29) Keys may include all of the following except ________.

A) primary keys B) unique secondary keys C) nonunique secondary keys D) nonunique primary keys Answer: D AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To define and illustrate primary and secondary keys Classification: Concept

6 ..

30) The term set refers to all records that have the same ________.

A) primary key B) unique secondary key C) nonunique secondary key D) search key Answer: C AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To define and illustrate unique and nonunique secondary keys Classification: Concept 31) Each of the following is an example of a data structure except ________.

A) binary relationship B) sequential list C) linked list D) index Answer: A AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To define the term data structures Classification: Concept 32) Data structures are typically used to ________.

A) unbalance a B-Tree B) represent simple and complex networks C) enhance database security D) fry an egg Answer: B AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To define the term data structures Classification: Concept 33) In a B-Tree whose top entry contains the values 47 and 88, the middle arrow allows access to all records whose key field values are ________.

A) less than 47 B) greater than 47 and less than 88 C) greater than 47 and less than or equal to 88 D) greater than 88 Answer: C AACSB: Information Technology; Application of Knowledge Difficulty: Difficult LO: To define and illustrate B-tree multilevel indexes Classification: Application

7 ..

34) An important property of B-Trees is that they are balanced to maintain efficient and predictable performance. "Balanced" here means that ________.

A) every pointers allows access to the same number of data records B) the numbers at every level of the B-Tree have the same average value C) the key field values are the same at every level D) every data record is the same distance from the top entry of the B-Tree Answer: D AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To define and illustrate B-tree multilevel indexes Classification: Concept 35) How does a DBMS store data on its direct access files?

Answer: Usually the DBMS creates large physical records, also called blocks. The physical records are used as containers for logical records. Physical records are addressed by a relative record number (RRN).

AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To define and illustrate the terms flat file, sequential list, linked list, and index Classification: Concept 36) What is a linked list?

Answer: A linked list is a logical tool used to keep records in a logical order that may differ from the physical order in which they are stored. A linked list is created by adding a link field to each record. The link field holds the address of the next record in the logical sequence.

AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To define and illustrate the terms flat file, sequential list, linked list, and index Classification: Concept 37) What is a B-tree?

Answer: A B-tree is a multilevel index that allows both sequential and direct processing of data records. The B-tree index is composed of two parts: (1) a sequence set, which is an index containing an entry for every record in the file, and (2) an index set, which is an index pointing to groups of entries in the sequence set index. The index set provides rapid direct access to records in the file, and it is what makes a B-tree unique.

AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Difficult LO: To define and illustrate B-tree multilevel indexes Classification: Concept

8 ..

38) What are tree, simple networks and complex networks?

Answer: A tree is a set of records and the 1:N relationships between them, where a child record has only one parent. A simple network is a set of records and the 1:N relationships between them, but a child record may have more than one parent. A complex network is a set of records and the N:M relationships between them.

AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To demonstrate how binary relationships are represented using trees, simple networks, and complex networks Classification: Concept 39) What is a set?

Answer: A key is a field that identifies a record. We can have primary keys, which uniquely identify a record, unique secondary keys and nonunique secondary keys. The term set refers to all records having the same nonunique secondary key. For example, we may have sets based on ZIP code as a nonunique secondary key.

AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Difficult LO: To define and illustrate unique and nonunique secondary keys Classification: Concept

9 ..

Database Processing, 14e (Kroenke) Appendix H: The Semantic Object Model 1) Whether a developer uses an E-R model or a semantic object model, the eventual database design that is created should be exactly the same.

Answer: FALSE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To compare the semantic object model to the entity-relationship model Classification: Concept 2) Semantic objects represent the user's perceptions more closely than the E-R model.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To compare the semantic object model to the entity-relationship model Classification: Concept 3) Semantic objects represent distinct identities.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To define the term semantic object Classification: Concept 4) A semantic object must represent something with a physical existence.

Answer: FALSE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To define the term semantic object Classification: Concept 5) A simple attribute has only one element.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To define and illustrate the use of simple, group, and object link attributes Classification: Concept 6) The cardinalities of an attribute operate only between the attribute and the container of the attribute.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To demonstrate the use of semantic object diagrams to build a data model Classification: Concept 1 ..

7) Group attributes are composites of other attributes.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To define and illustrate the use of simple, group, and object link attributes Classification: Concept 8) An object identifier is one or more attributes that the users employ to identify object instances.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To define and illustrate the use of simple, group, and object link attributes Classification: Concept 9) Object identifiers may or may not be unique.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To define and illustrate the use of simple, group, and object link attributes Classification: Concept 10) The key of an attribute is a description of an attribute's possible values.

Answer: FALSE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To demonstrate the use of semantic object diagrams to build a data model Classification: Concept 11) A "simple object" can contain only simple attributes.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To define and illustrate the seven basic types of semantic objects Classification: Concept 12) A "composite object" cannot contain more than one multivalued attribute.

Answer: FALSE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To define and illustrate the seven basic types of semantic objects Classification: Concept

2 ..

13) A "hybrid object" is a semantic object that relates two or more objects and stores data that are peculiar to that relationship.

Answer: FALSE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To define and illustrate the seven basic types of semantic objects Classification: Concept 14) An association object relates two (or more) objects and stores data that are peculiar to that relationship.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To define and illustrate the seven basic types of semantic objects Classification: Concept 15) The first attribute of a subtype object is the childID attribute.

Answer: FALSE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To demonstrate the use of semantic object diagrams to build a data model Classification: Concept 16) A subtype inherits all the attributes of its parent.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To define and illustrate the seven basic types of semantic objects Classification: Concept 17) The term semantic means ________.

A) meaning B) data C) detailed D) attribute Answer: A AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To define the term semantic object Classification: Concept

3 ..

18) Semantic objects are grouped into ________.

A) composites B) entities C) objects D) classes Answer: D AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To define the term semantic object Classification: Concept 19) What type of attribute has a single element?

A) Single B) Simple C) Link D) Compound Answer: B AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To define and illustrate the use of simple, group, and object link attributes Classification: Concept 20) What type of attribute is composed of other attributes?

A) Simple B) Group C) Compound D) Composite Answer: B AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To define and illustrate the use of simple, group, and object link attributes Classification: Concept 21) A group identifier ________.

A) has more than one attribute B) identifies a group of instances C) identifies a group of attributes in an object D) is the identifier for a group of semantic objects Answer: A AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To define and illustrate the use of simple, group, and object link attributes Classification: Concept

4 ..

22) A simple object is a semantic object that contains only ________.

A) single-value, simple or group attributes B) single-value, object attributes C) single-value, simple attributes D) multi-value, simple or group attributes Answer: A AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To define and illustrate the seven basic types of semantic objects Classification: Concept 23) A composite object is a semantic object that contains ________.

A) single-value, simple or group attributes, but no object attributes B) at least one object attribute C) at least one multi-value, simple or group attribute but no object attributes D) at least one multi-value, object attribute Answer: C AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To define and illustrate the seven basic types of semantic objects Classification: Concept 24) A compound object is a semantic object that contains at least one ________.

A) single-value, group attribute B) multi-value, simple or group attribute C) object attribute D) multi-value attribute Answer: C AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To define and illustrate the seven basic types of semantic objects Classification: Concept 25) A hybrid object is a semantic object that contains at least one ________.

A) single-value group attribute that includes a multi-value semantic object attribute B) single-value group attribute that includes any semantic object attribute C) multiple-value group attribute that includes a multi-value semantic object attribute D) multiple-value group attribute that includes any semantic object attribute Answer: D AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To define and illustrate the seven basic types of semantic objects Classification: Concept

5 ..

26) A parent object is also known as a(n) ________.

A) supertype object B) child object C) subtype object D) multiple-value object Answer: A AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To define and illustrate the seven basic types of semantic objects Classification: Concept 27) The relationship between a parent object and its associated subtype objects is a(n) ________.

A) HAS-A relationship B) WANTS-A relationship C) NEEDS-A relationship D) IS-A relationship Answer: D AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To define and illustrate the seven basic types of semantic objects Classification: Concept 28) Which of the following statements about Subtype objects is not true?

A) Subtypes can be Inclusive (an object may be more than one subtype).

B) Subtypes can be Exclusive (an object may only be one of the subtypes).

C) Subtypes can be Nested.

D) All relations between the parent and subtype are 1:N. Answer: D AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Difficult LO: To define and illustrate the seven basic types of semantic objects Classification: Concept 29) A version object ________.

A) may be a composite object B) typically contains the archetype object in its identifier C) typically is a simple object D) produces archetype objects Answer: B AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To define and illustrate the seven basic types of semantic objects Classification: Concept

6 ..

30) Semantic objects are said to be ________.

A) Semantically self-contained B) Semantically complete C) Semantically inclusive D) Both A and B are correct Answer: D AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Difficult LO: To compare the semantic object model to the entity-relationship model Classification: Concept 31) Explain the concept of semantic objects as being a sufficient description.

Answer: A semantic object is said to be a sufficient description because: (1) it contains all the attributes necessary for the users to do their work, and (2) it is self-contained, which means that all the data required about a given object is contained in that object.

AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To define the term semantic object Classification: Concept 32) Explain why semantic object attributes are called paired attributes.

Answer: Semantic object attributes are used to indicate a relationship between two semantic objects. When there is a relationship between two objects, the objects are placed as object attributes within each other. They are called "paired attributes" because relationships are by definition two definition two-way relationships. Thus, when a semantic object is placed in another semantic object as an object attribute, a corresponding object attribute representing the second object is required in the first semantic object.

AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To define and illustrate the use of simple, group, and object link attributes Classification: Concept 33) Distinguish between the physical description and the semantic description of an attribute domain.

Answer: The physical description of an attribute defines the data type, data length, and other data value constraints, and thus indicates specifications for the storage and processing of the attribute. The semantic description of the attribute indicates the logical meaning of the attribute in the users' environment, and thus the semantic description differentiates between attributes having the same physical description.

AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To demonstrate the use of semantic object diagrams to build a data model Classification: Concept

7 ..

34) Describe the two ways that semantic object views can be used.

Answer: A semantic view can be used: (1) during database design to reverse-engineer a data model, since the view an application has of an object is represented in the reports, forms and queries of that application, and (2) once the database structure has been created, views can be used to develop new forms and reports from the existing database.

AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To demonstrate the use of semantic object diagrams to build a data model Classification: Concept 35) Explain the differences between the E-R model and the semantic object model.

Answer: The primary differences between the E-R model and the semantic object model are differences in orientation. The E-R model considers entities and relationships to be the basic building blocks of a data model, while the semantic object model considers semantic objects to be the basic building blocks. Semantic objects are self-contained from the users perspectiveeverything that a user thinks of as being a characteristic of a given identity in his or her environment is captured within a single semantic object. With E-R models, all the data that a user thinks of as being a characteristic of a given identity is spread across multiple entities, and thus relationships are required to reconstruct the user's perspective. Therefore, semantic models tend to produce a data model that more closely resembles the user's model.

AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To compare the semantic object model to the entity-relationship model Classification: Concept

8 ..

Database Processing, 14e (Kroenke) Appendix I: Getting Started with Web Servers, PHP, and the NetBeans IDE 1) NetBeans is a development environment that can be used for PHP program development.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To know how to download, install and use the NetBeans IDE Classification: Concept 2) Apache is the Web server typically used on computers running the Windows operating system.

Answer: FALSE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To know how to install and manage the Microsoft IIS Web server Classification: Concept 3) Apache is the Web server typically used on computers running the Linux operating system.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To know how to install and manage the Microsoft IIS Web server Classification: Concept 4) The IIS Web server is automatically installed when the Windows operating system is installed, and no additional steps are necessary to either install or activate it.

Answer: FALSE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To know how to install and manage the Microsoft IIS Web server Classification: Concept 5) The IIS Web server is managed using the Microsoft Internet Information Service (IIS) Manager.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To know how to install and manage the Microsoft IIS Web server Classification: Concept 6) The default Web page for the IIS Web server is index.html.

Answer: FALSE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To understand the file system structure used by IIS Classification: Concept 1 ..

7) For a workstation running the Windows operating system, a commonly used Web browser is Microsoft Internet Explorer.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To know how to use the Microsoft Internet Explorer Web browser Classification: Concept 8) For a workstation running the Windows operating system, a commonly used file system utility is Microsoft Internet Explorer.

Answer: FALSE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To know how to use the Microsoft Internet Explorer Web browser Classification: Concept 9) For a workstation running the Windows operating system, all the necessary user file system permissions to the Web page area are already granted.

Answer: FALSE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Difficult LO: To understand the file system structure used by IIS Classification: Concept 10) For a workstation running the Windows operating system, the user file system permissions Modify and Write must be granted to the Users group at the wwwroot folder.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Difficult LO: To understand the file system structure used by IIS Classification: Concept 11) The easiest way to install the NetBeans IDE is to install it at the same time as Java.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To know how to download, install and use the NetBeans IDE Classification: Concept 12) The Java JRE is installed directly from the Java download page at www.oracle.com.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To know how to download and install the Java Software Development Kit (JDK) Classification: Concept 2 ..

13) The NetBeans IDE supports PHP directly without any plugins.

Answer: FALSE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To know how to download, install and use the NetBeans IDE Classification: Concept 14) Only the 64-bit version of the Java Runtime Environment should be installed when using a 64-bit operating system.

Answer: FALSE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To know how to download and install the Java Software Development Kit (JDK) Classification: Concept 15) A Java Virtual Machine must be installed on a computer before running the NetBeans IDE. Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To know how to download and install the Java Software Development Kit (JDK) Classification: Concept 16) There is only one way to install PHP. Answer: FALSE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To know how to download, install and use PHP Classification: Concept 17) When using IIS, Microsoft recommends using the FastCGI protocol option when installing PHP. Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To know how to download, install and use PHP Classification: Concept 18) Installing PHP using the Microsoft Web Platform Installer always installs the most current version of PHP. Answer: FALSE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To know how to download, install and use PHP Classification: Concept

3 ..

19) For a Web server running the Windows operating system, the Web server typically used is ________.

A) the IIS Web server B) the Apache Web server C) the Tomcat Web server D) the ASP.NET Web server Answer: A AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To know how to install and manage the Microsoft IIS Web server Classification: Concept 20) For a Web server running the Linux operating system, the Web server typically used is ________.

A) the IIS Web server B) the Apache Web server C) the Tomcat Web server D) the ASP.NET Web server Answer: B AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To know how to install and manage the Microsoft IIS Web server Classification: Concept 21) The IIS Web server is managed using the ________.

A) Microsoft Internet Information Service (IIS) Manager B) Microsoft SQL Server Management Studio C) Microsoft Visual Studio D) Microsoft IIS Workbench Answer: A AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To know how to install and manage the Microsoft IIS Web server Classification: Concept 22) The default Web page for the IIS Web server is ________.

A) startup.html B) startup.htm C) index.htm D) iisstart.htm Answer: D AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To understand the file system structure used by IIS Classification: Concept

4 ..

23) For a workstation running the Windows operating system, the additional user file system permissions ________ must be granted to the Users group at the wwwroot folder.

A) Read and Write B) Modify and Read C) Modify and Write D) Read and Execute Answer: C AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Difficult LO: To understand the file system structure used by IIS Classification: Concept 24) For a workstation running the Windows operating system, the user file system permissions Modify and Write must be granted to ________ at the wwwroot folder.

A) the ISUR_{WebServerName} User B) the IAPP_{WebServerName} User C) the WebUsers group D) the Users group Answer: D AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Difficult LO: To understand the file system structure used by IIS Classification: Concept 25) For a workstation running the Windows operating system, the user file system permissions Modify and Write must be granted to the Users group at the ________ folder.

A) wwwroot B) inetpub C) Web D) eclipse Answer: A AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To understand the file system structure used by IIS Classification: Concept 26) Before installing theNetBeans IDE, we have to install ________.

A) the Java JRE B) Microsoft IIS server C) PHP D) the PHP plugin Answer: A AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To know how to download, install and use the NetBeans IDE Classification: Concept 5 ..

27) The Java JRE is installed directly from the Java download page at ________.

A) www.oracle.com B) www.jre.com C) www.jdk.com D) www.sun.com Answer: A AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To know how to download and install the Java Software Development Kit (JDK) Classification: Concept 28) The delimiters for embedding PHP code in a web page are ________.

A) { and } B) <php and /php> C) <?php and ?> D) {php and ?} Answer: C AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To know how to download, install and use PHP Classification: Concept 29) Which PHP command displays the current configuration settings on the web page ________.

A) phpconfig( ) B) phpinfo( ) C) index.html D) phptest.php Answer: B AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To know how to download, install and use PHP Classification: Concept 30) Which of the following is not true about PHP dynamic extension files (dll files)?

A) They can be shared by many applications.

B) They allow php to make application calls directly to the DBMS rather than using ODBC. C) There is no relationship between the php.ini file and the dll files.

D) They enable support for PHP Data Objects (PDO).

Answer: C AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Difficult LO: To know how to download, install and use PHP Classification: Concept

6 ..

31) What is PHP? Answer: PHP, which is an abbreviation for PHP: Hypertext Processor, is a scripting language that can be embedded in Web pages. PHP was recently ranked as one of the top ten most popular programming languages in the world. It is easy to learn, and can be used with most Web servers and DBMS products.

AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To know how to download, install and use PHP Classification: Concept 32) What is theNetBeans IDE? Answer: The NetBeans IDE is a software development platform written in Java, to develop programs written in Java and other languages, including PHP. AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To know how to download, install and use the NetBeans IDE Classification: Concept 33) What are the Java JVM, JRE, SDK, and NetBeans? How do they relate?

Answer: The Java Virtual Machine is needed to run Java programs. It is included in the Java Runtime Environment and the Software Development Kit , which includes the Java compiler and other development utility programs.Before NetBeans is installed, we must install the JRE or SDK because NetBeans is written in java. All of these are available from Oracle corporation at www.oracle.com. Unlike most other program installations, we install the JRE directly onto our workstation from this Web site.

AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To know how to download and install the Java Software Development Kit (JDK) Classification: Concept 34) What is the Microsoft Web Platform Installer, and what are the advantages and disadvantages of using it to install PHP? Answer: The Microsoft Web Platform Installer is downloadable Microsoft utility that is used to monitor and update Web server installations on a computer. The advantage of using it to install PHP is that the workstation installation is simplified for us. Disadvantages are (1) the WPI does not install PHP the way we needed it installed, and (2) an older version of PHP may be installed instead of the latest release.

AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To know how to download, install and use PHP Classification: Concept

7 ..

35) What additional permissions must be assigned before a user can work with files on the IIS Web server?

Answer: For a workstation running the Windows operating system, the user file system permissions Modify and Write must be granted to the Users group at the wwwroot folder. The file system permissions Read & execute, List folder contents, and Read have already been granted to this group.

AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Difficult LO: To understand the file system structure used by IIS Classification: Concept

8 ..

Database Processing, 14e (Kroenke) Appendix J: Business Intelligence Systems 1) Business Intelligence (BI) systems are information systems that help users analyze and use data.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To learn the basic concepts of business intelligence (BI) systems Classification: Concept 2) Business Intelligence (BI) systems support operational activities.

Answer: FALSE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To learn the basic concepts of business intelligence (BI) systems Classification: Concept 3) Business Intelligence (BI) reporting systems are used to filter data, sort data, group data, and make simple calculations based on the data.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To learn the basic concepts of reporting systems Classification: Concept 4) Business Intelligence (BI) reporting systems can analyze data using standard SQL. Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To learn the basic concepts of reporting systems Classification: Concept 5) BI reporting systems summarize the current status of business activities and compare that status with past events but not with predicted future activities.

Answer: FALSE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Difficult LO: To learn the basic concepts of reporting systems Classification: Concept

1 ..

6) Data mining uses sophisticated statistical and mathematical techniques to perform what-if analyses, to make predictions, and to facilitate decision making.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To learn the basic concepts of data mining Classification: Concept 7) Report delivery is more difficult for data mining than it is for reporting systems.

Answer: FALSE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To learn the basic concepts of reporting systems Classification: Concept 8) A data warehouse is a database system that has data for, programs for, and personnel specialized in BI processing.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To learn the basic concepts of business intelligence (BI) systems Classification: Concept 9) Data warehouses are populated with data prepared by Extract, Transform, and Load (ETL) systems.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To learn the basic concepts of data warehouses and data marts Classification: Concept 10) Problematic data include so-called dirty data.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To learn the basic concepts of data warehouses and data marts Classification: Concept 11) A data mart is a collection of data that addresses a particular component of functional area of a business.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To learn the basic concepts of data warehouses and data marts Classification: Concept

2 ..

12) BI reporting systems are intended to create meaningful information from disparate data sources and to deliver that information to the proper users on a timely basis.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To learn the basic concepts of reporting systems Classification: Concept 13) RFM analysis is a way of analyzing and ranking customers based on on-line survey data.

Answer: FALSE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To learn how to create RFM reports Classification: Concept 14) In RFM analysis, R stands for "how recently", F stands for "how frequently" and M stands for "how many months."

Answer: FALSE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To learn how to create RFM reports Classification: Concept 15) In a common form of RFM analysis, customers with an R score of 5 are in the 20% of customers who have the most recent orders.

Answer: FALSE AACSB: Information Technology; Application of Knowledge Difficulty: Moderate LO: To learn how to create RFM reports Classification: Application 16) In a common form of RFM analysis, a score of 1 is "high" or "good" while a score of 5 is "low" or "bad."

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To learn how to create RFM reports Classification: Concept 17) In a common form of RFM analysis, an RFM score of 5 1 1 means that the customer orders frequently and orders items of high monetary value but has not ordered anything for some time.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology; Application of Knowledge Difficulty: Difficult LO: To learn how to create RFM reports Classification: Application 3 ..

18) A reporting system does not maintain a database of metadata.

Answer: FALSE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To learn the basic concepts of reporting systems Classification: Concept 19) A digital dashboard is an electronic display customized for an individual user.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To learn the basic concepts of reporting systems Classification: Concept 20) Report modes include dynamic and static.

Answer: FALSE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Difficult LO: To learn the basic concepts of reporting systems Classification: Concept 21) Reports that do not change once prepared are called static reports.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To learn the basic concepts of reporting systems Classification: Concept 22) Reports that rely on the most current data when they are prepared are called dynamic reports.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To learn the basic concepts of reporting systems Classification: Concept 23) A report that is sent to users on a predetermined schedule is called a push report.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To learn the basic concepts of reporting systems Classification: Concept

4 ..

24) A report that is sent to users only upon the user's request is called on-demand report.

Answer: FALSE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To learn the basic concepts of reporting systems Classification: Concept 25) Report systems include three functions: authoring, management, and delivery.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To learn the basic concepts of reporting systems Classification: Concept 26) Report authoring includes responsibility for delivery of the report.

Answer: FALSE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To learn the basic concepts of reporting systems Classification: Concept 27) Report management defines who gets the report, how often, and how it is to be delivered.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To learn the basic concepts of reporting systems Classification: Concept 28) Report management systems include the ability to create associated user accounts and groups.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To learn the basic concepts of reporting systems Classification: Concept 29) Data mining is the application of mathematical and statistical techniques to find patterns and relationships that can be used to classify and predict.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To learn the basic concepts of data mining Classification: Concept

5 ..

30) Most data mining techniques are simple and easy to use.

Answer: FALSE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To learn the basic concepts of data mining Classification: Concept 31) In unsupervised data mining, explanations are created after patterns are found.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Difficult LO: To learn the basic concepts of data mining Classification: Concept 32) In unsupervised data mining, a model or hypothesis is created ahead of time.

Answer: FALSE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To learn the basic concepts of data mining Classification: Concept 33) In supervised data mining, statistical techniques are used to estimate the parameters of the model.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To learn the basic concepts of data mining Classification: Concept 34) Cluster analysis is a commonly used technique in supervised data mining.

Answer: FALSE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Difficult LO: To learn the basic concepts of data mining Classification: Concept 35) Market basket analysis is a data mining technique for determining which sets of products customers tend to purchase at the same time.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To learn the basic concepts of market basket analysis Classification: Concept

6 ..

36) Market basket analysis as described in the text uses the technique of conditional probabilities.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Difficult LO: To learn the basic concepts of market basket analysis Classification: Concept 37) In market basket analysis, support is defined as the probability that two items will be purchased together.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To learn the basic concepts of market basket analysis Classification: Concept 38) In market basket analysis, confidence is the probability that one particular product will be purchased.

Answer: FALSE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To learn the basic concepts of market basket analysis Classification: Concept 39) In market basket analysis, lift is confidence divided by support.

Answer: FALSE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Difficult LO: To learn the basic concepts of market basket analysis Classification: Concept 40) Business Intelligence (BI) systems do which of the following?

A) Analyze current and past activities B) Predict future events C) Record and process transactions D) Both A and B are correct Answer: D AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To learn the basic concepts of business intelligence (BI) systems Classification: Concept

7 ..

41) Business Intelligence (BI) systems fall into which of the following categories?

A) Processing B) Reporting C) Data mining D) Both B and C are correct Answer: D AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To learn the basic concepts of business intelligence (BI) systems Classification: Concept 42) Business Intelligence (BI) systems obtain their data by all of the following means except ________.

A) read and process data from an operational database B) triggers defined on the operational database C) process data purchased from data vendors D) process extracts from operational databases Answer: B AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To learn the basic concepts of business intelligence (BI) systems Classification: Concept 43) Business Intelligence (BI) reporting systems can do all of the following operations except ________.

A) filter data B) group data C) modify data D) sort data Answer: C AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To learn the basic concepts of reporting systems Classification: Concept 44) One Business Intelligence (BI) reporting system that uses extensions to SQL is ________.

A) cluster analysis B) OLAP C) regression analysis D) RFM analysis Answer: B AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To learn the basic concepts of reporting systems Classification: Concept

8 ..

45) Data mining applications are used accomplish all of the following tasks except ________.

A) update the database B) make predications C) facilitate decision making D) perform what-if analysis Answer: A AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To learn the basic concepts of data mining Classification: Concept 46) Which of the following is (are) true about data mining applications?

A) They use sophisticated mathematical techniques.

B) They use sophisticated statistical techniques.

C) Their report delivery is more difficult than report delivery for reporting systems.

D) Both A and B are correct Answer: D AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Difficult LO: To learn the basic concepts of data mining Classification: Concept 47) Which of the following is not a reason that operational data are difficult to read?

A) Dirty data B) Large values C) Non-integrated data D) Missing values Answer: B AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To learn the basic concepts of data warehouses and data marts Classification: Concept 48) We have obtained access to the company's operational data. In one record, we find that a customer's age has been recorded as "337". This is an example of ________.

A) dirty data B) inconsistent data C) non-integrated data D) a "wrong format" problem Answer: A AACSB: Information Technology; Application of Knowledge Difficulty: Difficult LO: To learn the basic concepts of data warehouses and data marts Classification: Application

9 ..

49) We have obtained access to the company's operational data. We examine 50 records for customers with phone numbers that should use the current area code of 345. Of these 50 records, we find 10 that still use an older area code of 567. This is an example of ________.

A) dirty data B) inconsistent data C) non-integrated data D) a "wrong format" problem Answer: B AACSB: Information Technology; Application of Knowledge Difficulty: Difficult LO: To learn the basic concepts of data warehouses and data marts Classification: Application 50) We have obtained access to the company's operational data. We have been asked to produce a report with an item by item analysis of sales, but the only sales figure available is the total sale value for each order. This is an example of ________.

A) dirty data B) inconsistent data C) nonintegrated data D) a "wrong format" problem Answer: D AACSB: Information Technology; Application of Knowledge Difficulty: Difficult LO: To learn the basic concepts of data warehouses and data marts Classification: Application 51) A data warehouse database differs from an operational database because ________.

A) data warehouse data are not stored in tables B) data warehouse databases do not have metadata C) data warehouse data are often stored in a dimensional database D) efficiency does not matter in a data warehouse Answer: C AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To learn the basic concepts of data warehouses and data marts Classification: Concept 52) Which of the following is not a component of a data warehouse?

A) Data extract, transform, and load (ETL) preparation programs B) Data warehouse data C) Data warehouse metadata D) Operational database updates Answer: D AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To learn the basic concepts of data warehouses and data marts Classification: Concept 10 ..

53) A data mart differs from a data warehouse in all the following ways except ________.

A) data marts use more operational data B) it deals with a particular component or functional area of the business C) data mart users do not have the data management expertise of data warehouse employees D) it has a smaller database Answer: A AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To learn the basic concepts of data warehouses and data marts Classification: Concept 54) A BI reporting system ________.

A) creates meaningful information from disparate data sources.

B) delivers information to users on a timely basis.

C) uses statistical procedures to predict future events.

D) Both A and B are correct Answer: D AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To learn the basic concepts of reporting systems Classification: Concept 55) RFM analysis analyzes and ranks customers based on ________.

A) their purchasing patterns B) their income status C) their residential location.

D) their age Answer: A AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To learn how to create RFM reports Classification: Concept 56) The "R" in RFM analysis stands for ________.

A) rank B) recent C) relationship D) readiness Answer: B AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To learn how to create RFM reports Classification: Concept

11 ..

57) RFM scores commonly range from ________, with ________ being the "high" or "most desirable" score.

A) 0 to 5; 0 B) 0 to 5; 5 C) 1 to 5, 1 D) 1 to 5; 5 Answer: C AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To learn how to create RFM reports Classification: Concept 58) We have done an RFM analysis on our customer data. John Smith has a score of "5 1 1".

This means that John ________.

A) has ordered recently, and orders a lot when he orders B) hasn't ordered recently, but orders a lot when he orders C) has ordered recently, but doesn't order a lot when he orders D) hasn't ordered recently, and doesn't order a lot when he orders Answer: B AACSB: Information Technology; Application of Knowledge Difficulty: Moderate LO: To learn how to create RFM reports Classification: Application 59) RFM analysis can be done using SQL ________.

A) user-defined functions B) stored procedures C) triggers D) union queries Answer: B AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To learn how to create RFM reports Classification: Concept 60) To produce the set of customers with a R score of 2, the SQL SELECT TOP ________ PERCENT syntax should be used.

A) 50 B) 33 C) 25 D) 20 Answer: C AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Difficult LO: To learn how to create RFM reports Classification: Concept 12 ..

61) The metadata maintained by a reporting system database describes all of the following except ________.

A) triggers B) users C) groups D) reports Answer: A AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To learn the basic concepts of reporting systems Classification: Concept 62) The reports generated by a reporting system can be classified as any of the following except ________.

A) static B) dynamic C) fluid D) push Answer: C AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To learn the basic concepts of reporting systems Classification: Concept 63) A report generated by a reporting system is delivered to the appropriate users via an electronic display customized for each user. This system uses which of the following media?

A) Paper B) Web portal C) Digital dashboard D) E-mail Answer: C AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To learn the basic concepts of reporting systems Classification: Concept 64) The reports generated by a reporting system can be delivered in all of the following media except ________.

A) Paper B) Smoke signals C) Digital dashboard D) E-mail Answer: B AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To learn the basic concepts of reporting systems Classification: Concept 13 ..

65) A report generated by a reporting system is delivered to the appropriate users via a printed report on a pre-determined schedule. This system uses which of the following report modes?

A) Push B) Pull C) Query D) OLAP Answer: A AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To learn the basic concepts of reporting systems Classification: Concept 66) OLAP stands for ________.

A) Online Analytical Processing B) Offline Analytical Processing C) Online Analysis Process D) Offline Analytical Process E) Lazy, Old And Particular Answer: A AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To learn the basic concepts of reporting systems Classification: Concept 67) Data mining techniques are used to find patterns and relationships that can be used to ________.

A) report B) classify C) predict D) Both B and C are correct Answer: D AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To learn the basic concepts of data mining Classification: Concept 68) Which of the following is a common unsupervised data mining technique?

A) Cluster analysis B) Regression analysis C) RFM analysis D) QBE queries Answer: A AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To learn the basic concepts of data mining Classification: Concept 14 ..

69) Which of the following is a common supervised data mining technique?

A) Cluster analysis B) Regression analysis C) RFM analysis D) SQL analysis Answer: B AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To learn the basic concepts of data mining Classification: Concept 70) Which of the following popular data mining techniques does not require special software?

A) Decision tree analysis B) Logistic regression analysis C) Market basket analysis D) Neural networks Answer: C AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Difficult LO: To learn the basic concepts of data mining Classification: Concept 71) Market basket analysis is ________.

A) a data mart specific technique B) a reporting technique C) an OLAP application D) a data mining technique Answer: D AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Difficult LO: To learn the basic concepts of data mining Classification: Concept

15 ..

Here is Market Basket data for 1,000 transactions at a Drug Store. All transactions involve 1 or 2 drugs. Use the table below to answer the following questions.

1,000 Transactions Drug A Drug B Drug C No Additional Drug

Drug A

Drug B

Drug C

500

300

200

0 100 125 275

100 25 75 100

125 75 0 0

72) Refer to the table above. What is the definition of support for Drug A and Drug B? A) The probability that Drug A will be purchased.

B) The probability that Drug B will be purchased.

C) The probability that both Drug A and Drug B will be purchased.

D) The probability that Drug A will be purchased given that Drug B has been purchased.

Answer: C AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To learn the basic concepts of market basket analysis Classification: Concept 73) Refer to the table above. What is the support for Drug A and Drug B? A) .025 B) .075 C) .100 D) .125 Answer: C AACSB: Information Technology; Application of Knowledge Difficulty: Difficult LO: To learn the basic concepts of market basket analysis Classification: Application 74) Refer to the table above. What is the definition of confidence for Drug B with reference to Drug A? A) The probability that Drug A will be purchased.

B) The probability that Drug B will be purchased.

C) The probability that both Drug A and Drug B will be purchased.

D) The probability that Drug B will be purchased given that Drug A has been purchased.

Answer: D AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To learn the basic concepts of market basket analysis Classification: Concept

16 ..

75) Refer to the table above. What is the confidence of Drug B being purchased given that Drug A has been purchased?

A) .200 B) .250 C) .333 D) .400 Answer: A AACSB: Information Technology; Application of Knowledge Difficulty: Difficult LO: To learn the basic concepts of market basket analysis Classification: Application 76) Refer to the table above. What is the lift for Drug B being purchased given that Drug A has been purchased?

A) .200 B) .250 C) .333 D) .667 Answer: D AACSB: Information Technology; Application of Knowledge Difficulty: Difficult LO: To learn the basic concepts of market basket analysis Classification: Application 77) What are Business Intelligence (BI) systems?

Answer: Business Intelligence (BI) systems are information systems used by managers and other business professionals to analyze past and current activities and to predict future events. BI systems do not support the recording and processing of operational data—this is left to transaction processing systems. Instead, BI systems are management support systems use that produce information for assessment, analysis, planning and control. There are two main categories of BI systems: reporting systems and data mining applications.

AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To learn the basic concepts of business intelligence (BI) systems Classification: Concept 78) What is a reporting system?

Answer: A reporting system is one of the main categories of a Business Intelligence (BI) system. Reporting systems are used to filter data, sort data, group data, and make simple calculations based on the data. These systems summarize the current status of business activities and compare the current status to past or predicted results. They are also used to classify entities such as customers, employees, products, etc. Report delivery is a critical aspect of reporting systems.

AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To learn the basic concepts of reporting systems Classification: Concept 17 ..

79) What is data mining application?

Answer: A data mining application uses sophisticated statistical and mathematical techniques to do what-if analyses, forecast predicted values and facilitate decision making. In unsupervised data mining, analysts run tools against the raw data without a prior hypothesis or theory—after the analysis hypothesis and theories are created to explain the results. In supervised data mining, the analysts create the theory and hypothesis first, and then run tools on the raw data to calculate parameter values for the theoretical models. Report delivery is not as critical in data mining as it is in reporting systems.

AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To learn the basic concepts of data mining Classification: Concept 80) Why is operational data sometimes unusable for Business Intelligence use?

Answer: Data in operational databases can suffer from a number of problems. These include: (1) Dirty data—data that has problems with it, for example an age of "323"; (2) Missing values— data values that are unknown, for example a person's age; (3) Inconsistent data—Old data values that needed to be updated may not have been—for example a ZIP code in an area that was split into two new ZIP codes; (4) Data not integrated—when data from two or more data sets is used, the data may be from two or more different DBMSs; (5) Data in the wrong format—data values may have been recorded at an inappropriate value for the needed analysis—for example, distance may have been recorded in miles when we need meters; (6) Too much data—it is possible to simply have very large data sets in terms of records or fields.

AACSB: Information Technology; Analytical Thinking Difficulty: Moderate LO: To learn the basic concepts of data warehouses and data marts Classification: Synthesis 81) What is a data warehouse?

Answer: A data warehouse is a non-operational database intended for use by Business Intelligence applications. A data warehouse is a database system that has data, programs and personnel who specialize in the preparation of data for Business intelligence processing.

Database in data warehouses are frequently denormalized to speed up BI processes. The components of a data warehouse include programs for data extraction/cleaning/preparation, data warehouse DBMSs, data warehouse metadata and data warehouse data. The data warehouse metadata database records the date warehouse data's source, format assumptions, constraints and other relevant facts.

AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To learn the basic concepts of data warehouses and data marts Classification: Concept

18 ..

82) What is a star schema?

Answer: The star schema describes the arrangement of the tables in a dimensional database. A fact table is the center of the star, while dimension tables are connected to the fact table and can be illustrated as the points of the star.

AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To learn the basic concepts of data warehouses and data marts Classification: Concept

19 ..

Database Processing, 14e (Kroenke) Appendix K: Big Data 1) NoSQL really stands for "Not only SQL." Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To learn the basic concepts of non-relational database management systems Classification: Concept 2) One of the four categories of NoSQL databases used in the text is the Key-Value database.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To learn the basic concepts of non-relational database management systems Classification: Concept 3) One of the four categories of NoSQL databases used in the text is the Word Processing database.

Answer: FALSE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To learn the basic concepts of non-relational database management systems Classification: Concept 4) One of the four categories of NoSQL databases used in the text is the Column Family database.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To learn the basic concepts of non-relational database management systems Classification: Concept 5) One of the four categories of NoSQL databases used in the text is the Graphical database.

Answer: FALSE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To learn the basic concepts of non-relational database management systems Classification: Concept 6) The CAP theorem defines the three properties, one of which is consistency.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To learn the basic concepts of Big Data Classification: Concept 1 ..

7) The CAP theorem defines the three properties, one of which is authorization.

Answer: FALSE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To learn the basic concepts of Big Data Classification: Concept 8) The CAP theorem defines the three properties, one of which is partition tolerance.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To learn the basic concepts of Big Data Classification: Concept 9) The key-value database uses columns.

Answer: FALSE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To learn the basic concepts of key value databases Classification: Concept 10) A document database may use either XML or JSON as the basis for storing data.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To learn the basic concepts of document databases Classification: Concept 11) XML stands for Extensible Markup Language.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To understand the importance of XML Classification: Concept 12) JSON stands for Jason Script Object Notation.

Answer: FALSE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To learn the basic concepts of JSON as a way of structuring non-relational data Classification: Concept

2 ..

13) XML provides a standardized, non-customizable way to describe the content of a document.

Answer: FALSE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To understand the importance of XML Classification: Concept 14) Unlike SQL views, XML views are not limited to one multivalued path.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Difficult LO: To understand the importance of XML Classification: Concept 15) SOAP was originally an XML-based standard for providing remote procedure calls over the Internet.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To understand the importance of XML Classification: Concept 16) XML designers created a system that allows document structure, data content, and materialization to be mixed.

Answer: FALSE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To understand the importance of XML Classification: Concept 17) DTD stands for Document Type Declaration.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To understand how to describe XML document structure using document type declarations (DTDs) and XML Schema Classification: Concept 18) All type-valid XML documents are required to have a DTD. Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To understand how to describe XML document structure using document type declarations (DTDs) and XML Schema Classification: Concept

3 ..

19) XML documents that conform to their DTD are said to be type-valid XML documents.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To understand how to describe XML document structure using document type declarations (DTDs) and XML Schema Classification: Concept 20) XML documents that do not conform to their DTD are said to be non-type-valid XML documents.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To understand how to describe XML document structure using document type declarations (DTDs) and XML Schema Classification: Concept 21) XSLT is a robust and powerful transformation language that can be used to materialize XML documents into HTML. Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To understand the role of XSLT in materializing XML documents Classification: Concept 22) XML Schema is a synonym for Document Type Declaration (DTD).

Answer: FALSE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To understand how to describe XML document structure using document type declarations (DTDs) and XML Schema Classification: Concept 23) XML documents that conform to an XML Schema are validated against that schema.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To understand how to describe XML document structure using document type declarations (DTDs) and XML Schema Classification: Concept

4 ..

24) XML documents and XML Schemas are created in different languages.

Answer: FALSE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To understand how to describe XML document structure using document type declarations (DTDs) and XML Schema Classification: Concept 25) An important improvement of XML Schema over DTDs is that XML Schemas are themselves XML documents.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To understand how to describe XML document structure using document type declarations (DTDs) and XML Schema Classification: Concept 26) XML Schemas consist of elements, attributes, and properties.

Answer: FALSE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To understand how to describe XML document structure using document type declarations (DTDs) and XML Schema Classification: Concept 27) In XML Schema, there are two types of elements, simple and composite.

Answer: FALSE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To understand how to describe XML document structure using document type declarations (DTDs) and XML Schema Classification: Concept 28) A complex element must have more than one simple element.

Answer: FALSE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To understand how to describe XML document structure using document type declarations (DTDs) and XML Schema Classification: Concept

5 ..

29) For database/XML applications, a good rule to follow is that elements are used to carry data and attributes are used to carry metadata.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To learn the elements of XML documents Classification: Concept 30) In XML Schema, the default cardinality of elements is 0.1.

Answer: FALSE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To understand how to describe XML document structure using document type declarations (DTDs) and XML Schema Classification: Concept 31) In XML Schema, the default minimum cardinality can be overridden using the minOccurs attributes.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To understand how to describe XML document structure using document type declarations (DTDs) and XML Schema Classification: Concept 32) Column family databases may use columns, super columns, column families, and super column families.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To learn the basic concepts of column family databases Classification: Concept 33) Column family databases that use column families and super column families contain keyspaces.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Difficult LO: To learn the basic concepts of column family databases Classification: Concept 34) Graph databases are composed of three elements, one of which is the node.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To learn the basic concepts of graph databases Classification: Concept 6 ..

35) Graph databases are composed of three elements, one of which is the attribute.

Answer: FALSE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To learn the basic concepts of graph databases Classification: Concept 36) Graph databases are composed of three elements, one of which is the edge.

Answer: TRUE AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To learn the basic concepts of graph databases Classification: Concept 37) DBMSs associated with the NoSQL movement use all of the following kinds of database management systems except ________.

A) Key-Value B) Document C) Relational D) Graph Answer: C AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To learn the basic concepts of non-relational database management systems Classification: Concept 38) The CAP Theorem defines three properties of distributed database systems, which are ________.

A) consistency, always-on, properties B) competency, always-on, properties C) consistency, availability, partition tolerance D) competency, availability, partition tolerance Answer: C AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To learn the basic concepts of Big Data Classification: Concept

7 ..

39) An example of a key-value database is ________.

A) DynamoDB B) Couchbase Server C) Bigtable D) Neo4j Answer: A AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To learn the basic concepts of non-relational database management systems Classification: Concept 40) An example of a document database is ________.

A) Dynamo B) Couchbase Server C) Bigtable D) Neo4j Answer: B AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To learn the basic concepts of non-relational database management systems Classification: Concept 41) An example of a graph database is ________.

A) Dynamo B) Couchbase Server C) Bigtable D) Neo4j Answer: D AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To learn the basic concepts of graph databases Classification: Concept 42) XML stands for ________.

A) Experimental Markup Language B) Extendable Markup Language C) Extensible Markup Language D) Active X-control Markup Language Answer: C AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To understand the importance of XML Classification: Concept

8 ..

43) SOAP originally stood for ________.

A) Simple Operational Application Protocol B) Standard Operational Application Protocol C) Simple Object Application Protocol D) Simple Object Access Protocol Answer: D AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To understand the importance of XML Classification: Concept 44) SOAP has become ________.

A) just a name, not an acronym B) a standard protocol for sending any type of message C) an old technology replaced by XML D) Both A and B are correct Answer: D AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To understand the importance of XML Classification: Concept 45) Which of the following is true about XML? A) It allows the confounding of document structure, content, and format.

B) It is non-standardized to allow for extension by developers.

C) The structure of documents is formally defined.

D) XML tags, like some HTML tags, are vague and arbitrary.

Answer: C AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To learn the elements of XML documents Classification: Concept 46) The first section of an XML document might be a ________.

A) Document Definition Section (DDS) B) Document Type Declaration (DTD) C) Data Type (DTYPE) D) Document Type (DOCTYPE) Answer: B AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To learn the elements of XML documents Classification: Concept

9 ..

47) The document type declaration for an XML document begins with the keyword ________.

A) XML B) DTD C) TYPE D) DOCTYPE Answer: D AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To understand how to describe XML document structure using document type declarations (DTDs) and XML Schema Classification: Concept 48) XML documents that conform to their DTD are said to be ________.

A) type-valid B) XML-valid C) DTD-compliant D) not-type-valid Answer: A AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To understand how to describe XML document structure using document type declarations (DTDs) and XML Schema Classification: Concept 49) XML documents that are not-type-valid can still be ________.

A) DTD-valid B) XML-valid C) DTD-compliant D) proper XML documents Answer: D AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To understand how to describe XML document structure using document type declarations (DTDs) and XML Schema Classification: Concept 50) Which of the following is not true about document type declarations for XML documents?

A) They are not required.

B) They are required for type-valid documents.

C) They cannot be contained inside the XML document.

D) Storing the DTD externally allows many documents to be validated against the same DTD. Answer: C AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To understand how to describe XML document structure using document type declarations (DTDs) and XML Schema Classification: Concept 10 ..

51) XML Schema is used to define ________.

A) document content and structure B) XQL queries C) DOM-compliant parsers D) DTDs Answer: A AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To understand how to describe XML document structure using document type declarations (DTDs) and XML Schema Classification: Concept 52) XML documents can be ________ against their XML Schema.

A) measured B) grown C) validated D) browsed Answer: C AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To understand how to describe XML document structure using document type declarations (DTDs) and XML Schema Classification: Concept 53) An important improvement of XML Schema over DTDs is that ________.

A) XML Schema can be stored external to the document B) XML Schema support XQL queries C) XML Schema are XML documents D) XML Schema are not required Answer: C AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Easy LO: To understand how to describe XML document structure using document type declarations (DTDs) and XML Schema Classification: Concept

11 ..

54) The XML Schema statement xmlns:xsd indicates that ________.

A) this XML Schema uses a labeled namespace called xsd B) this XML Schema is validated at www.xsd.com C) this XML Schema is validated at www.xmlns.com using the xsd XML Schema located there D) this XML Schema is using a non-standard looping procedure, where xsd is the variable name of the loop increment Answer: A AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Difficult LO: To understand how to describe XML document structure using document type declarations (DTDs) and XML Schema Classification: Concept 55) XML Schemas consist of ________.

A) elements B) attributes C) properties D) Both A and B are correct Answer: D AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Difficult LO: To understand how to describe XML document structure using document type declarations (DTDs) and XML Schema Classification: Concept 56) Which of the following is a type of element in an XML Schema?

A) Simple B) Composite C) Compound D) Primitive Answer: A AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Difficult LO: To understand how to describe XML document structure using document type declarations (DTDs) and XML Schema Classification: Concept

12 ..

57) XML Schema elements of the complexType may contain ________.

A) one primitive element B) at most one complexType element C) any number of simple elements but no complex elements D) any combination of simple and complex elements Answer: D AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To understand how to describe XML document structure using document type declarations (DTDs) and XML Schema Classification: Concept 58) In database/ XML applications, it is a recommended practice that ________.

A) elements carry data, and attributes carry metadata B) elements carry metadata, and attributes carry data C) elements and attributes carry data, and the XML Schema carry metadata D) elements and attributes carry metadata, and the XML Schema carry data Answer: A AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Difficult LO: To learn the elements of XML documents Classification: Concept 59) The default cardinality for elements in an XML Schema is ________.

A) 0.1 B) 1.1 C) 1.N D) M.N Answer: B AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To understand how to describe XML document structure using document type declarations (DTDs) and XML Schema Classification: Concept 60) The use of the XML Schema expression minOccurs="0" ________.

A) is an XML Schema default B) is required as there are no defaults in an XML Schema C) is similar to the SQL schema NULL constraint D) indicates that no value can be placed there Answer: C AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Difficult LO: To understand how to describe XML document structure using document type declarations (DTDs) and XML Schema Classification: Concept 13 ..

61) Which of the following is not true about XSLT? A) It requires the use of CSS. B) It is a transformation language.

C) It can materialize XML documents into HTML. D) It is a declarative language.

Answer: A AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To understand the role of XSLT in materializing XML documents Classification: Concept 62) Which of the following is true about XSLT? A) It can be used to materialize XML documents into HTML. B) XSLT processors are context oriented.

C) It is a non-declarative transformation language.

D) Both A and B are correct Answer: D AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Difficult LO: To understand the role of XSLT in materializing XML documents Classification: Concept 63) The SQL Server statement SELECT * FROM Table01 FOR XML RAW tells SQL Server to place the data values from the columns in the table into XML ________.

A) elements B) attributes C) either elements or attributes, as chosen by SQL Server D) either elements or attributes, as designated by the developer Answer: B AACSB: Information Technology; Application of Knowledge Difficulty: Easy LO: To learn the basic concepts involved in using the SQL SELECT . . . FOR XML statement Classification: Concept

14 ..

64) The SQL Server statement SELECT * FROM Table01 FOR XML EXPLICIT tells SQL Server to place the data values from the columns in the table into XML ________.

A) elements B) attributes C) either elements or attributes, as chosen by SQL Server D) either elements or attributes, as designated by the developer Answer: D AACSB: Information Technology; Application of Knowledge Difficulty: Moderate LO: To learn the basic concepts involved in using the SQL SELECT . . . FOR XML statement Classification: Concept 65) The SQL Server XML SELECT statements can be applied to ________.

A) single table SELECT statements B) multiple table SELECT statements C) XML Schema statements D) Both A and B are correct Answer: D AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To learn the basic concepts involved in using the SQL SELECT . . . FOR XML statement Classification: Concept 66) Graph databases are composed of ________.

A) Nodes, Properties, and Edges B) Properties, Columns, and SuperColumns C) Edges, Nodes, and Tables D) Nodes, Columns, and Properties Answer: A AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To learn the basic concepts of graph databases Classification: Concept

15 ..

67) The "value" in a key value database can be ________.

A) any string value only B) any numeric value only C) any value of any size or type D) any list of values only Answer: C AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To learn the basic concepts of key value databases Classification: Concept 68) In a key value database, the basic "get" operation ________.

A) retrieves all values in the database B) retrieves all keys with a specified value C) retrieves all values associated with a key D) retrieves the value associated with a key Answer: D AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To learn the basic concepts of key value databases Classification: Concept 69) Document databases typically base their data structuring features on ________.

A) JSON B) XML C) relations D) Both A and B are correct Answer: D AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To learn the basic concepts of document databases Classification: Concept

16 ..

70) In the following sample document data (presented in MongoDB syntax), how many documents are there? { _id: "Advisor1", name: "Shire, Robert", dept: "History", yearHired: 1975 } { _id: 555667777, name: "Tierney, Doris", majors: ["Music", "Spanish"], addresses: [ { street: "14510 NE 4th Street", city: "Bellevue", state: "WA", zip: "98005" }, { street: "335 Aloha Street", city: "Seattle", state: "WA", zip: "98109" } ], advisorID: "Advisor1" } A) 2 B) 4 C) 6 D) 8 Answer: B AACSB: Information Technology; Application of Knowledge Difficulty: Difficult LO: To learn the basic concepts of document databases Classification: Application

17 ..

71) In a column family database, the unit of data that most closely corresponds to a relation is the ________.

A) column B) timestamp C) column family D) keyspace Answer: C AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To learn the basic concepts of column family databases Classification: Concept 72) One important difference between a relation and a column family is that ________.

A) the rows in a column family can have different numbers of columns B) the columns in a column family are unnamed C) all values in a column family must have the same timestamp D) values in a column family must be strings Answer: A AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To learn the basic concepts of column family databases Classification: Concept 73) JSON has sophisticated data structuring capabilities. Which of the following statements is not true about JSON? A) A value can be a simple value such as a string or number.

B) A value can be an object (a set of [field, value] pairs).

C) A value can be an array of objects.

D) A value can be a relational table.

Answer: D AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To learn the basic concepts of JSON as a way of structuring non-relational data Classification: Concept

18 ..

74) In the following sample JSON data (presented in MongoDB syntax), the word "addesses" is a ________. { _id: 555667777, name: "Tierney, Doris", majors: ["Music", "Spanish"], addresses: [ { street: "14510 NE 4th Street", city: "Bellevue", state: "WA", zip: "98005" }, { street: "335 Aloha Street", city: "Seattle", state: "WA", zip: "98109" } ], advisorID: "Advisor1" } A) value list B) object identifier C) field name D) value Answer: C AACSB: Information Technology; Application of Knowledge Difficulty: Difficult LO: To learn the basic concepts of JSON as a way of structuring non-relational data Classification: Application 75) What does NoSQL stand for, and what does it mean?

Answer: NoSQL actually stands for "Not only SQL." The term NoSQL is a mis-nomer, since the term really refers to the various types of non-relational databases and DBMSs that are becoming widely used by Web applications such as Facebook and Twitter. A NoSQL database is often a distributed, replicated database.

AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To learn the basic concepts of non-relational database management systems Classification: Concept

19 ..

76) Specify the four categories of NoSQL databases used in the text, and give an example of each.

Answer: The four categories of NoSQL databases with examples are: • Key-value—Dynamo and MemcachedDB • Document—Couchbase server and MongoDB • Column Family—Apache Cassandra and HBase • Graph—Neo4j and AllegroGraph AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To learn the basic concepts of non-relational database management systems Classification: Concept 77) What is the CAP theorem, and what does it show?

Answer: The CAP theorem, which was first proposed by Eric Brewer in 2000, and then proven as a theorem by Seth Gilbert and Nancy Lynch in 2002, basically states that there are three properties of distributed database systems, and a DBMS system cannot guarantee that all three properties will be satisfied at the same time. At least one of the properties will be at least somewhat compromised. The three properties are: • Consistency—all the database partition replicas see the same data at any given point in time.

• Availability—unless a node has failed, it will respond to a request.

• Partition tolerance—the distributed database is doing its job, and therefore if we can't get to the data on one partition, it will be available on another.

AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Difficult LO: To learn the basic concepts of Big Data Classification: Concept 78) What is XML, and why is it significantly better than HTML? Answer: XML stands for Extensible Markup Language, and it is a subset of Standard Generalized Markup Language (SGML). XML is significantly better than HTML because: (1) XML provides a clean break between document structure, content, and materialization, which prevents the confounding of these functions; and (2) while XML is standardized, it allows for extension by application developers. The structure of any document is formally defined with XML in a standardized way.

AACSB: Information Technology; Analytical Thinking Difficulty: Moderate LO: To understand the importance of XML Classification: Concept

20 ..

79) What is an XML DTD? Answer: An XML DTD is a Document Type Declaration. A DTD is the first section of an XML document, while the document data itself makes up the second part of the document. The DTD begins with the DOCTYPE, and then details the name of the document and its structure. The data that is actually in the second part of the document may or may not conform to the DTD. If the document does conform to the DTD the document is called a type-valid XML document, and if the document does not conform to the DTD it is called a non-type-valid XML document. A document can be not-type-valid, and still be a good XML document.

AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To understand how to describe XML document structure using document type declarations (DTDs) and XML Schema Classification: Concept 80) What is an XML Schema?

Answer: An XML schema defines the structure and content of XML documents. It is similar to a DTD specification, but better because it extends the DTD specification. Further, an XML Schema is itself an XML Schema, so no other syntax is needed. Since you can evaluate an XML document against its schema, and since XML Schemas are XML documents, you can evaluate XML Schemas. Schemas consist of elements and attributes, and elements may be simple or complex. A good rule to follow is that elements should carry data and attributes should carry metadata.

AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To understand how to describe XML document structure using document type declarations (DTDs) and XML Schema Classification: Concept 81) What are the elements of a graph database?

Answer: Based on mathematical graph theory, graph databases are composed of nodes, properties and edges. Nodes are equivalent to entities in E-R data modeling and tables (or relations) in database design. They represent the things that we want to keep track of or about which we want to store data. Properties are equivalent to attributes in E-R data modeling and columns (or fields) in database design. They represent the data items that we want to store for each node. Edges are similar to, but not identical to, the relationships in E-R data models and database designs. They are similar because they connect nodes as relationships connect entities, but they are different because they also store data. Edges can be one-way or two-way.

AACSB: Information Technology Difficulty: Moderate LO: To learn the basic concepts of graph databases Classification: Concept

21 ..